Home

Mail Express v3.2 User Guide - Support

1. ee Welcome to the Mail Express Site Username Request Account Password Lost Password M Remember me Rese 2 Click Request Account The Request Account Page appears Request Account Page Please provide identifying information so your account can be created Name Email address Message to accompany your request Please enter the text you see above Reset Captcha Cancel Request account 3 Provide your Name Email address and reason for the request complete the CAPTCHA then click Request account An email is sent to the Mail Express administrator 174 Using Mail Express in a Web Browser Requesting Access to the Internal Portal If you need to use the Internal Portal to send documents using Mail Express on the Mail Express Welcome page you can request an account The request is sent to the Mail Express administrator To send file using the drop off page 1 Open a web browser and navigate to the web address of the internal portal e g https mymailexpress org internal 2 A welcome page appears and displays icons with which to connect to the Drop Off portal or Internal Portal Click Internal Portal 3 Click Request Account The Request Account Page appears Request Account Page Please provide identifying information so your account can be created Name Email address Message to accompany your request Please enter the text you see above Can
2. 2 GRANT OF LICENSE A EVALUATION LICENSE If you acquired the license for any component of the Software on an evaluation or trial basis you may use the Software without charge for the evaluation period Your evaluation period begins on the day the registration serial number is issued by GlobalSCAPE You must pay the license fee and activate your copy in the manner required below to continue to use the Software after the evaluation period An evaluation license for the Software may not be transferred to any other person B STANDARD LICENSE i SERVER PROGRAM You may install and use one copy of the Server Program on that number of server computers for which you have purchased a separate license as indicated on your invoice or sales receipt ii WEB INTERFACE S Notwithstanding the restrictions in Section 7 you may customize the Web Interface created through the Server Program for the Software subject at all times to GlobalSCAPE s rights set forth in Section 13 Upon modification however GlobalSCAPE shall have no further obligations under Section 8 or any related M amp S Plan in relation to the Web Interface Such modification may only be used for your internal business purposes and may not be licensed or sublicensed to any third party iii ADD IN The Add In requires a CAL client access license You may install the Add In on as many
3. cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 149 Send Options 00 0 cecseeeeeeseeeeeeesteeeeeeees 161 165 Send Options dialog ccccceeeeeseeeeeseeeeeees 165 sendattachmenttemplate html ftl eee 117 sendDropoffURLTemplate html ftl ee 117 sendDropoffURLTemplate subject ftl 117 sendDropoffURLTemplate text ftl ee 117 SOM GCM ris sides ca janes EE eats dh baain dah uacteetaanidantaueed 151 Sender Outbound Activity ccceeeeeeeeees 151 Sending Files Using the Drop Off Page 175 Sending Files with the Internal Web Portal 177 Sending Files with the Mail Express Outlook Add I deexesceeateataateeei eat eti tel aeesvadectnas a etd aad 169 Sending Files with the Reply Portal 185 Sending Invites with the Internal Portal 179 SENblteMS veined eae paaa 169 server URL a a a a Eaa a 70 175 Service Principal Name n se 37 Setup Wizard seeeseeeseeeeeeesesseesreessresreesreesren 37 SDANDO epeei a estate TE Ea 188 teto TA I aE E T A 70 signed Certificate ee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeenes 130 Silent install cece ccceceseesssseseeeeeeceaneeeneeeess 33 46 Silent installation Mode ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 46 Silent Installation of Mail Express Server 33 Silent Installation of the Outlook Add 46 SMUT Poa ra a dates 9 15 78 169 181 SMTP SENVENTA NES 15 Specifying an SSL Certificate 0 ee 130 Specifying the Mail
4. 17 Install the Outlook Add In on the client workstation s including Add In prerequisites 18 Specify the host name username and password for the Internal user created during server setup 19 Enable the Mail Express User Interface in Outlook 20 Enable the Status pane in Outlook to display the connection status between the Mail Express Add In and Mail Express Server 21 Send a test email with an attachment using the Attach File icon on the Mail Express tool bar 22 Pick up the package Advanced Features can be setup after the initial configuration is completed and the basic system functionality has been verified Not critical to the basic functionality of the system Specify a Mail Express SSL Certificate Enable Active Directory Authentication Enable Single Sign On using Kerberos Enable Drop off Page Enable and configure Internal Portal Register the Server and DMZ Gateway in the Mail Express administration interface a Enable and configure the Reply Portal 4 14 What s New in Mail Express The following features were added for Mail Express version 3 2 e Connect to an external database not installed by Mail Express e Internal users can send invitations to external users to create a Drop Off user account e Reply Portal allows recipients access to Mail Express when using the Reply link in email e File Management page separate from the Package Management p
5. 39 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 e f you click Single sign on in the Service Principal Name SPN box specify the service context e g lt service type gt lt mail express instance server host name gt lt port number gt lt service name gt For instance HTTP meserver The SPN is a name by which the Add In can uniquely identify the Mail Express Server Service e To create the SPNs execute the following commands on the domain s primary Active Directory server using the command console In the commands below substitute lt MailExpressServerHostName gt with the host name of the Mail Express Server lt MailExpressServerFullyQualifiedDomainName gt with the fully qualified domain name of the Mail Express Server lt PreAuthUsername gt with the username of the pre auth user account You will need to create a domain account for the Mail Express Server for participating in Kerberos authentication This account is used by the Mail Express Server when authenticating with the Kerberos Key Distribution Center typically Active Directory and allows a Service Principal Name SPN to be associated with the account using the setspn command setspn A HTITP lt MailExpressServerHostName gt lt PreAuthUsername gt setspn A HTITP lt MailExpressServerFullyQualifiedDomainName gt lt PreAuthUsername gt For example setspn A HITP meserver mepreauthuser setspn A HTTP meserver globalscape
6. You have been invited to create a Mail Express Drop Off account Print all D X Inbox x Karla to me show details 10 43 AM 0 minutes ago Reply You have been invited to upload files using a Mail Express Drop Off account Please activate your account to begin sending files You can respond to this message with attachments of your own Reply to sender Reply to all The links within this message can be accessed until May 12 2011 6 43 36 AM PDT Please follow the enclosed link to set up an account for the Mail Express Drop Off Portal It will just take a few moments and then you can securely send me files any time you need Powered by GlobalS CAP B hail Express Reply Forward To activate your account 1 Inthe invitation email click activate in Please activate your account to begin sending files 2 The Mail Express Account Activation Portal opens in your default browser Welcome to the Mail Express Account Activation Portal Username Display name krsh gmail com Password Confirm password 3 The username box is completed by Mail Express and is not editable The email address displayed is your username to access the Drop Off Portal of Mail Express 4 Inthe Display name box the email address displayed is the name that will appear in the From box in emails that you send 5 Inthe Password and Confirm password boxes provide a password The password must be between 6 and 256 characters
7. 29 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 1 Click Use an existing SQL Server or SQL Server Express then click Next The Choose New or Existing Database page appears c Create a new database Use this option to have the installer create a new database and database user within an existing SQL Server Instance The installer will also initialize the database and configure the Mail Express Server to use the newly created database user when connecting to the database You will need to provide the installer with the SQL Server Instance connection information and user credentials for an account such as the sa account that has privileges to create the database and database user The installer will use these credentials to create the new database database user and database objects 2 5 xl Dy Choose to create a new database if you would like the installer to create a new database for use by Mail Express Choose to use an existing database if one is already available and you would like to use it with this installation of Mail Express Z GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup i Choose New or Existing Database Choose whether to create a new database or use an existing database Create a new database Use an existing database Nullsoft Install System v2 46 2 Click Create a new database The Configure Database Server Connection Settings page appears 2 5 x Dy Please specify the database server name and the
8. Description The login name that the Mail Express server should use when connecting to the database when DBOAuthenticationT ype SQLSERVER Additionally this is the account created when ExternalDatabaseMode CREATE Default None Example DBOLoginName medatabase DBOLoginPassword lt password gt Description The password to use when connecting to the database when AuthenticationT ype SQLSERVER Default None Example DBOLoginPassword fk V6ZsX669p3 SkipPrereqCheck Description Skips checking the common and installation prerequisites that occurs when the installer is initially launched This setting is mainly used for debugging purposes Default Disabled by default Example SkipPrereqCheck SkipDBUtilFirewallUpdate Description The installer uses an embedded Java based utility for interacting with the database If Windows Firewall is enabled a dialog may be displayed when running the installer asking the user to configure the firewall rules for the embedded Java Runtime Environment To prevent this dialog from displaying the installer temporarily modifies the Windows Firewall settings This command line option instructs the installer to bypass modifying the Windows Firewall This setting is mainly used for debugging purposes Default Disabled by default Example SkipDBUtilFirewallUpdate 59 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 SkipDesktopShortcut Description Skips creation of the Windows Desktop shor
9. 0068 46 MailExpressOutlookAddinInstaller mSi 37 mail express windOWS X86 32 X cceeee 23 mail express windows x86 64 eX6 0cee 23 Main Installer Logioles eie ma 116 Managing Drop Off User Accounts 0 149 Managing Internal User Accounts 0 6 147 Managing Packages cccscscceeesteeeeenteeeeees 111 Manual Authentication ecceesseeeeeeteeeeeenes 46 Maximum File Size for Browser 183 MAXTHLEAS cccccccessessseeceeeeeceaneesseeeees 130 134 Message Forimat ceccceceseeeeeeetteeeeeneeeeees 172 GRANIN Aiino aiaa ieaiai e ien 172 Message Options cccccceceeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeeeees 165 Microsoft Exchange Serve useen 78 Microsoft ISA Server cccecccceeccesseeeeesteeeeseeeeeees 15 Microsoft Office Online n 190 Microsoft OUtIOOK cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 161 173 Microsoft Outlook 2003 cccceeeeesteeeteeeeees 37 Microsoft Outlook 2007 cceseeeeeeee 37 190 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 ceee 15 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 e 15 modify client configuration cceeeeeeees 139 modify Server configuration cseeeeeee 139 modify the Mail Express Server 139 modifying Internet Explorer 139 MSi ce seach tata baaeeanserscien ca anaeien E 37 N name of Mail Express Servet s es 164 Notifications as i ia aane 95 97 117 NON Y e i E S 165 O O
10. The email will remain in the Outbox until the Add In is finished processing the email and uploading its attachments The Mail Express Add In is configured by the network system administrator The Add In can be configured to have very strict settings or flexible settings Instructions for adjusting the settings ona workstation are in Configuring Message Options The Mail Express User Interface When the Outlook Add In is installed the Mail Express user interface can be enabled to provide a way for users to configure the Add In and view the status of emails it is managing By default the user interface is hidden so that the Add In runs transparently to the user The Add In provides the following user interface elements e A Mail Express ribbon tab Outlook 2010 or toolbar Outlook 2007 and 2003 on the primary Outlook window with options to configure the connection to Mail Express Server configure message options hide or show the Mail Express status pane and access the Mail Express help documentation e Message buttons on the email composition windows for attaching files to emails or for configuring settings that pertain to a specific email e Progress meter at the bottom of the primary Outlook window within Outlook s status bar which shows the aggregate transfer progress of attachments that the Add In is uploading Using the Mail Express Attach File button rather than the Outlook Attach File button provides better performance a
11. User Guide Version 3 2 giobalscape GlobalSCAPE Inc GSB Corporate Headquarters Address 4500 Lockhill Selma Road Suite 150 San Antonio TX USA 78249 Sales 210 308 8267 Sales Toll Free 800 290 5054 Technical Support 210 366 3993 Web Support http www globalscape com support 2008 2012 GlobalSCAPE Inc All Rights Reserved November 1 2012 Table of Contents Introduction to Mail Express 0scc cesscececeat ccc cesseces sat was eenvvaceusat venveceudessen edseecendetvessseaseeteue 9 Mail BXDFESS ATCIILGCUUN 6 cliches aaee aaa aao aa ee Daa aaa ra aa aaa Onn E Eaa E aa KEEL Taua iia 10 Mall Express Quick Stawt TT TTE 13 What s New in Mail Express cccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseennees 15 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express cccccccsscesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeneeeeeeeenneees 15 System Requirements and Prerequisites ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeceeeeeseaeeeseaeseeseeseeeeeecaeeseaeseeeeeeaas 15 Mail Express Server Requirements PrerequiSites cccccccceeeeseeceeeeeceeeeeaaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeesaeeneneeenaees 15 SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Installation Requirements PrerequiSites cccecceceteeeeseeeeeseeeeeees 17 Outlook Add In Requirements PrerequiSites cccccceseceecceceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeseeaeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeseaeeeeaees 17 Outlook Add In Prerequisite Resource
12. ccccceceeeessseeeeeeeeeeesneneees 70 182 Lost Serial Number cesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 51 M Mail Express Activity a e 151 Mail Express Admin ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 69 Mail Express Architecture esenee 10 Mail Express Database Tables Basic Index 160 Mail Express email address eens 78 Mail Express Menu cccceeseeeeeenneeeeeeneeeeeenae 161 Mail Express Message OptionS 000e 171 Mail Express Outlook Add IN 0 ccceeeeeeeees 161 Mail Express Quick Start erene 13 Mail Express Security 130 Mail Express Send Options cceeeeeeee 165 Mail Express Server 15 23 51 69 71 161 164 165 169 170 181 Mail Express Server Administration Account 23 Mail Express Server Administration Interface 51 71 147 149 151 154 156 157 Mail Express Server Database Account 23 Mail Express Server Diagnostics Logging 116 Mail Express Server HOSt c scccccssseeeeeees 164 Mail Express Server Logging s 116 Mail Express Server Service Principal Name 37 Mail Express Server Sign In 70 Mail Express Status ccccccssseeeeenees 69 170 Mail Express Toolbars 161 164 165 170 mailexpresS cccecececeeeeseceeceeeeeseeeeeteaeeeeees 69 171 MailExpressOutlook2003AddinSetup exe 37 MailExpressOutlook2007AddinSetup exe 37 MailExpressOutlookAddinInstaller
13. Certificates 21 a idee catia ceed cnet aaa tect a a Ai idadeathhaael a ne 132 Manually Configuring SSL Certificate Key Options eccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeeeeaaeseeeeesaas 133 Resetting the Configuration of the SSL Certificate and Key ccscceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaaeseeeeeseas 134 SSL Certificate Authority Certificate Chain SUPPOMt ccceecceceeeeeeeeeceeeee seas eeseaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeseneeseeeeess 135 What is the Mail Express Server Public Certificate Private Key Pair ccceeesceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeteeeeees 135 What is an SSL Certificate Authority Certificate Chain 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeene esses eeeeeeseneeeeaeeeeaeeeeenees 136 When do I need to specify an SSL Certificate Authority Certificate Chain n 136 How is the SSL Certificate Authority Certificate Chain Configured c ccccecceeeeeeeeeteeeeseeeeeeeeees 136 Supported Certificate Chain Format cc cccccsccccecseececessneeeeeenneeeeesaeeeeesaeeeessaeeeeesseeesesseeeeesseeeeess 137 How do know that it is working 0 ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee seas eeeaaeeeeaeeseaeeeceaeeesaaesseeeeseaeeesaaeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaas 137 Higher Security Settings cccccecccceeseceececeeeeecaeeeeaaeseneeceeeeesaaeseeaaesganeeceaeeeseaesseaaeseaeeeseaeeeeaeseaesseneeees 139 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Internet Explorer and High Security SettingS ccccccceesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaees
14. The Internal User Details page appears Internal User Details User Information Email bbkley nbc com Username Display name Bob Password evvcceee Confirm password eeeccces Account Options V Enabled Force password change v Drop Off access enabled v Allow account invitations V Allow Mail Express Reply links Restore Cancel Save b Inthe Email box provide the email address associated with the account c Inthe Username box provide the username for the account i If a manually created Internal user account has a username that matches a username in the defined set of Active Directory user accounts Mail Express will only authenticate against the manually created user account It will not attempt to authenticate against the Active Directory account 148 Managing Administrator and User Accounts Optional In the Display name box provide the name for the account user The Display name appears in the From box with the sender s email address for example Subject In the Password and Confirm Password boxes provide a password for the account The password must be between 6 and 256 characters and adhere to at least 3 of the following requirements contain at least 1 number 1 upper case 1 lower case and 1 non alphanumeric character The Enabled check box is selected by default To disable the account clear the check box To force the user to change the account password u
15. The system proxy settings are obtained for the user account under which the Mail Express Server Windows service is running By default the Mail Express Server Windows service runs under the Local System account This account may not have the appropriate proxy settings configured You should run the Mail Express Server under a named account and ensure that the proxy settings have been properly configured for that account e No proxy No proxy is in use e Manually configure proxy Provide connection details in Proxy Configuration settings 8 Click Register Mail Express connects to the GlobalSCAPE registration server then adds the serial number to our registration database Your contact information is used to look up your account if you contact Customer Support or Sales A message appears indicating successful activation If activation is not successful ensure you have access to the Internet and try again or contact GlobalSCAPE Support on the GlobalSCAPE Web site http www globalscape com support customerservice aspx Licensing the Outlook Add in Licensing of the Outlook Add In is controlled by the Client Access License CAL on the Mail Express server The number of clients Mail Express Outlook Add Ins allowed to connect at the same time depends on the number of CALs on the server A single Mail Express Server can support up to 9999 CALs When the Mail Express Outlook Add In connects to the server it provides its IP addr
16. W WED n pdre orra paea a a aanas aAA E Rea a 161 WODSEIVEl AIS AA AARAA ARR RTA EAAS AA 23 What is This Recover Email 171 What s New in Mail Express seeen 15 WINCOWS 2008 carrieira kideari iita taita rdi 15 Windows 2008 Server c cccccccseeeeeseeteeeeees 15 Windows Authentication c eseeeeees 37 164 Windows Event LOg cccseeeeesteeeeeteeeeeeenes 116 Windows Event Viewer 115 Windows Vista BUSINESS 32 aeee 15 Windows XP Pro 32 cceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaees 15 X XN eiria rai eed Ae 130 134 139 XML fileira ii ages va 37 205 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 206
17. eceeeeeeeeee 116 Database Installation Log eeeeeeseeeeseeeeennn 116 Database Connectivity ccceceeeeeseteees 115 Debug Logging cceeeeceeeeeteeeeeteteeeeetneeeeeeae 116 delete esc in iege iri iia a 147 149 Deploying the Outlook Add IN ceceseeeeees 37 Detailed Activity Report ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 153 disable isnadi iain 147 149 doma o aa aana A e a chi Taan SERENA 71 download attachments sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneen 106 201 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Download Files on the Pick 165 download notification 181 Download Notification Email 0 eee 117 downloadnotification NtMI ftl 0 eee 117 downloadnotification subject ftl eee 117 downloadnotification text ftl 0 eee 117 DropOft jeicentiae Havel ein eu eee 98 149 174 Drop off Pornal aen einsa ie 115 Drop Off Portal Send Confirmation 117 Drop Off Portal URL sssssesssesseesseeseenesrnesrneseness 117 dropoffloginportalcustomization html ftl 117 dropoffportalcustomization html ftl 05 117 dropoffsendconfirmation html ftl ee 117 dropoffsendconfirmation subject ftl ee 117 dropoffsendconfirmation text ftl 0 eee 117 dropoffsendnotification htm ft eee 117 dropoffsendnotification subject ftl ee 117 dropoffsendnotification text ftl ee 117 E East ASlansccciaiias tie ae he een eee 183 East Asian Languages ceesseeeee
18. provide the string used as the domain name when mapping between Windows Domains and the Kerberos Realm For example globalscape com e Inthe KDC Pre auth Username box provide the username of the account that will be used to authenticate with the KDC e Inthe KDC Pre auth User Password and Confirm KDC Pre auth User Password boxes provide the password of the account that will be used to authenticate with the KDC Under Policy Settings specify when Outlook users should use Mail Express e Always Use Mail Express Selected by default use Mail Express to manage attachments for every email e Mail Express not Required Outlook Add In users can use Mail Express if they want to but the administrator is not requiring its use e Use Mail Express based on the following policy Any attachment that matches one of the criteria cause all attachments to send using Mail Express When you select this option the section expands to provide Usage Policy options o File Size Messages that match or exceed the defined file size aggregate of all files attached to message triggers Mail Express use 103 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 12 13 14 15 16 o File Type Attached files with extensions defined in this section trigger Mail Express use Default file types are doc and pdf Provide only the extension no periods or wildcards To add a file type select the check box type the extension then click Add To remove a file
19. then specify the file size in the boxes from 1 KB 2 GB The default is 5 MB To expire download links select the Link expiration check box then specify the duration If no link expiration is defined packages will be purged based on the file retention policy When you modify the file expiration value you are modifying this setting for all future transfers Packages that are active within the system retain the expiration value in place at time that they were created The default is 2 weeks Link expiration can be from 1 hour to 99 years To exclude specific file types from being transferred select the File type exclusions check box then list up to 50 file extensions in the box Wildcards are not supported e To add file extensions to the list type the file extension in the small box then click Add e To remove a file extension from the list click the file extension in the list then click Remove To limit the domains to which drop off users can send files select the Valid recipient domains check box The domain is everything that comes after the symbol in the email address For example if the address is mike example com the domain is example com e To add domains to which drop off users can send files type the domain in the small box then click Add Changes are not saved until you click Save e To remove domains to which drop off users can send files click the domain in the list then click Remove Changes are not
20. trial fully registered or expired and the number of client access licenses CAL that are allowed based upon the current license When you provide a Serial number the system contacts the GlobalSCAPE registration server to validate the serial number and update the licensing accordingly Mail Express uses a Client Access License CAL to define the number of active connections allowed to the server The CAL applies to the number of internal senders that may use the Outlook Add In concurrently The server maintains a list of consumed licenses that include the username IP address host name date and time of the connection and most recent activity date and time The server expires the consumed CALs automatically after 1 hour of Add In inactivity or when Outlook is closed The CAL can specify from 1 to 9999 concurrent connections or sessions A session is a connection that is actively querying the server The 30 day trial is restricted to 50 CALs To activate Mail Express 1 Open a web browser and log in to the Mail Express administration interface 2 Inthe left navigation pane under Configuration click General 3 On the General Configuration page in the Mail Express area click Register 51 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Licensing and Registration Mail Express License type License state Client access licenses Trial expiration date DMZ Gateway License type License state Trial expiration date Trial Regist
21. 175 SO UIDIN I heisch sadist E Aa EE EARE 181 Supplemental Language Support 008 183 System Event Log ccccceceeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeees 116 System Information seeen 37 System Requirements s seeen 15 23 T TOP raaa a R a E 23 Technical SUPPOSt ccceesseeeeesteeeeesteeeeeeaes 190 TOM Plate i 2 coond etl evehinaeddenseheesdiobesiaccieanencieeesant 117 Template Customization eee eee 156 204 TSU EE eevee ttle heed atin aeons avers 74 Test Connection 0ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeetees 164 Lest Email misne iasanen aa tua 117 tost PerM faia i tit pie 117 teSt SUDjOCt ft cece eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 117 testte MU Soares eaa e ees 117 Testing Mail Express Exchange Configuration 94 The DMZ Protocol Handler s e 143 The Mail Express Toolbar ceeceeceeeeeeeeees 161 TESI a ae a a ea A aE 139 TOODA E a e E a 37 161 TOPIC Mkaa RTN 188 Total Inbound Activity cc eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 151 Total Outbound Activity aseeseen eeen 151 Transfer Status 0 cccccecsceceeeceseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeees 170 Trst CEMO aes ccscteztsdiccdestbscaechienieesvareansng eoessenets 168 Turning On or Off the Outlook Add In 168 U Undeliverable Message c csseeeeseeeeenees 156 Undeliverable Notification 0 0 00 eeeeeeeeees 117 UndeliverableMessage cceecseeeeesteeeeeenaes 156 undeliverablenotification html ftl 0 e
22. 2 Inthe navigation pane under Auditing click Events The Audit Event History report page appears 3 Inthe Start date boxes specify the beginning date and time of the report range Reports default to a minimum start date of the Mail Express Server installation date Click the calendar icon to select a date from a popup calendar 4 Inthe End date boxes specify the end date and time of the report range Click the calendar icon to select a date from a popup calendar 5 Optional In the Search by boxes click the down arrow to filter by IP Address Severity Event Type or User then in the box specify the IP address severity event type or user by which to filter the date Select the Exact Match check box to display only those items that exactly match your filter For example to display all users that contain the letter j in the Search By box click User then type a j in the box The report will display all usernames that contain the letter j kjomalley jsmithson bjones etc To display only a specific user click User type the username in the box then select the Exact Match check box 6 Click Filter The report updates with your search and filter selections Click Reset to clear the filter criteria 156 Auditing and Reporting Mail Express Activity Audit Event History Start Date 01 24 2011 afz oo AM 7 End Date 01 24 2011 mf J07 AM 7 Search By iP Address gt I Exact Match Filter Reset Date
23. EmailAddress the sender s email address replyTo list of the TO recipient EmailAddress es with the addition of the sender if he she is not also a recipient 125 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Template Name Template Files Data Model Outlook Add In e addinsendtemplate htm ftl Send Notification The email sent to recipients of packages sent from the Outlook Add In e addinsendtemplate text ftl hasDownload boolean whether the package has attachments hasAccountinvite boolean whether the package has account invitations hasReplylinvite boolean whether the package has reply invitations recipientHeader String the header token RecipientHeader or the disambiguation header if it is the same for all recipients or empty if it is not required expiration java util Date when the package expires may be null subject String subject line from the sender s email packageLinkOnly Boolean whether to include links to all the files in the package individually or only the package pickup page packageLink String PickupPageLink this is a fixed token so that the Outlook Add In can replace it replyLink String ReplyPageLink this is a fixed token so that the Outlook Add In can replace it replyAllLink String ReplyAllPageLink this is a fixed token so that the Outlook Add In can replace it accountLink String InvitePageLink this is a fixed token so that the Outlook Add
24. Exchange Configuration 86 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server Configuring Authenticated Access to Exchange Typically SMTP uses port 25 However an alternative SMTP submission port has been reserved on port 587 For Exchange 2007 and 2010 installation will create a Default module listening on port 25 as well as a Client module listening on port 587 Exchange 2003 installation will only create the Default module For authenticated access create a module listening on port 587 The important requirements for Mail Express are that the module accept basic authentication and that an appropriate user with the necessary permissions be made available to the Mail Express system See also Configuring Anonymous Access to Exchange Installation of Exchange 2007 2010 creates an alternative client submission receive connector Exchange 2003 does not install an alternative client submission virtual server so you must create one Exchange 2007 and 2010 1 Inthe Exchange Management Console click Server Configuration gt Hub Transport gt ADSERVER gt Client ADSERVER then right click Client ADSERVER and click Properties The Client ADSERVER Properties dialog box appears 2 Click the Network tab x Gereral Network Authentication Pemission Groupe Use these local IP addresses to receive mal Al avollable IPv4 addresses 587 Recetye mal from remote servers that have these IP addresses pad
25. Exchange authentication Username kmargop Password eeweceee Confirm password ececccee Mailbox Settings Mailbox monitoring for forwarding system messages M Monitor mailbox Mailbox Type Mailbox Port Email Settings Email addresses used for notifications sent by Mail Express From address kmargop escape com Reply to address kmargop escape com Test Configuration Test email send amp receive In the Host box specify the Exchange Server s host name e g mail company edu In the Port box specify the port used by the Exchange Server usually port 25 If you are using SSL on the Exchange server select the Connect using SSL check box The Trusted Certificate Authority CA Certificate box appears 79 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Host Settings Host mail globalscape com z 25 I Always trust certificates from Exchange server Trusted Certificate Authority CA Certificate z Upload X 509 y y NN certificate Browse 6 Select the Always trust certificates from Exchange server check box if Mail Express should implicitly trust the certificate provided by the Exchange server Clear the check box if you want to provide a separate certificate If you select the Always trust certificates from Exchange server check box you do NOT need to specify the certificate o If you want to provide a separate certificate and did NOT select the Always trust certificates from Exchange serve
26. Express Uninstall Mail Express 66 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express 4 Click Modify database configuration then click Next The Database Server Connection Settings page appears Z GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup q 5 xj Configure Database Server Connection Settings Specify the database connections settings and login credentials A Database server host MyNewDatabase 000 Database server port 1433 5 IV Database instance name MALEXPRESS2 sis IV Database name MALEXPRESS2 se ss S Authentication mode SQL Server authentication Windows authentication Login name Mailexpress2 Password CLLLIIITITIT Test Nullsoft Install System v2 46 5 The current database connection settings appear Provide the new connection information Refer to Installing Mail Express Server for details of these fields 6 To verify that Mail Express will be able to connect to the database using these settings click Test If the connection fails verify that you have entered the configuration correctly 7 Ifthe connection is successful click Save 8 You will have to restart the Mail Express Server service for the Server to connect to the new database You should do this during times of least user activity Repairing the Mail Express Installation If you need to reinstall Mail Express on the same computer you can do so using the Mail Express Setup Wizard Reinstalling Mail Express updates only the
27. Express Host Name 71 Specifying the System Notification email Address ae daa E A Gocuec ta obe cae a be ETE 73 SQLs oh esti ea n E EA E iss 15 23 SOL EXpreSS arena a a a a aaien 23 SAL SENO ean a naan AAE 15 SQL Server Administration Account 05 23 SQL Server EXpreSS n 23 SQL Server Express Database Engine 23 SSI Dirada i een del 74 78 130 134 139 SSL CA Certificate Chain Support 135 DOL COM feiss ete i itl ddl A E T 134 SSL Certificate nav kanina iiaei 130 134 SSL KEY er eaa iia E e ee 130 SSLCertificateFile ssssseeeenrnrnrrrrrrrrnnnn 130 134 SSLCertificateKeyFile 0 ceeeeees 130 134 SOLGIPNGS setesse 2 ive nie eee eels 139 SSLCipherSuite ccccccecseeseeseeeeeeeneees 130 134 SSL EN ADOC tei vitecscelecedeia ncvaves a 130 134 SSLPASSWOMK aiaei a 130 134 SSLProt tO hennen iiinn aa 130 134 139 SSLV2 ienaa ae ai 130 134 139 SSLV3 nede Rue RAiled foes a aa iaid 139 SSLVerifyClient ccccccesseeeeesteeeeesnees 130 134 SSLVerifyDepth eeeceeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeees 130 134 Status hinn ain e a i nA 69 170 SOAGE ri a aaia a aiana a IE ER 95 SIONS EE P EE EA A N E ET 115 Store Quota Notification sseeeseeeeeee eeren 117 storenotification Nt ftl oe eee eeeeeeeeeeeee 117 storenotification subject ftl ei eeeeeeeeeee 117 storenotification text ftl oe eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeee 117 SUDJOCtisiiedsa sez dtr aes adits avedienenaiazsten
28. Express Server computer you can still save the report in the format you want and then open it on another computer on which the application is installed For example you could save the report as a PDF then email it or transport it to a computer on which Adobe Reader is installed Viewing Configuration History The Configuration History report displays all modifications of Mail Express components within a particular date range You can filter the data from a particular date range by IP address or modifier and further filter the data by the resource that was modified Database Drop Off Settings File Store General Active Directory Pick Up Settings Exchange or Web Services Settings For details of generating reports of activity events or users refer to Generating Reports of Mail Express Activity Viewing Audit Event History and Viewing User History To view the database schema refer to Mail Express Database Tables To view configuration history 1 2 Log in to the Mail Express Server administration interface In the navigation pane under Auditing click Configuration The Configuration History report page appears In the Start date boxes specify the beginning date and time of the report range Reports default to a minimum start date of the Mail Express Server installation date Click the calendar icon to select a date from a popup calendar In the End date boxes specify the end date and time of the report range Click
29. Express Server the Java Runtime Environment JRE Apache Tomcat webserver and optionally SQL Server 2008 R2 Express If you are installing SQL Server 2008 R2 Express o SQL Server 2008 R2 Express requires that NET Framework 3 5 SP1 is already installed as stated in the system requirements The installer will not proceed with installation if the proper version of NET Framework is not found and if the computer was not rebooted after NET was installed o SQL Server 2008 R2 Express uses TCP IP to connect to the database so the MAILEXPRESS SQL Server database instance is installed with TCP IP support enabled For enhanced security the TCP IP settings are configured to listen for connections from the local computer only using the localhost interface 127 0 0 1 To allow remote connections or to modify the communications settings use the SQL Server Configuration Manager A database instance with an instance name of MAILEXPRESS is created when you use the Mail Express installer to install the database The installer creates the database and creates the Mail Express database user with the username and password supplied during installation o Only the SQL Server Express Database Engine and limited configuration tools are installed including the SQL Server Configuration Manager o Installing SQL Server 2008 R2 Express is optional SQL Server Express is offered only for evaluation purposes it is not recommended for production Service Dep
30. In can replace it accountMessage String lInviteMessageTemplate this is a fixed token so that the Outlook Add In can replace it recipientCount int the total number of To and Cc recipients sender EmailAddress the sender s email address replyTo list of the TO recipient EmailAddress es with the addition of the sender if he she is not also a recipient attachments list of Attachment s Note link String FileLink this is a fixed token based on the attachment s index in the list so that the Outlook Add In can replace it attachmentLengthSize Integer number of characters in the longest attachment length and unit attachmenttTitleSize Integer number of characters in the longest attachment title attachmentLinkSize Integer number of characters in the longest attachment link 126 Configuring the DMZ Gateway Connection Web Portal Templates There are five basic types of web page customizations Account Login Home Portal Misc and Default Each page has two areas that are customizable the header at the top of the page and the footer at the bottom of the page Pages can be further specialized with an enumerated argument Pages can be localized based on the web viewer i e the computer s language setting e Template location o Header o Footer e Specialization parameter o Portal type Admin External Internal Pickup o Account template customization Password
31. Inthe Search filter box provide the search filter that is used to find accounts under the search base for example amp objectclass user sAMAccountName 0 The 0 is the placeholder that will be populated with the username when performing the search 10 Optional but recommended In the Test username Test user password and Confirm test user password boxes provide the credentials for a known AD account then click Test When testing Active Directory configuration via the Active Directory Configuration page you should test using a user account that possesses a mail attribute Otherwise you will see an error in the MailExpressServer log 76 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server 11 Click Save to save your changes on the server or click Restore to cancel changes If you navigate away from the page without clicking Save your changes are discarded Configuring Mail Express for Windows Kerberos Authentication Use this topic as a check list to correctly configure Mail Express so that Internal users can authenticate with the Mail Express Server using integrated Windows Authentication The benefits of using Windows Authentication as it pertains to Mail Express include e The Add In does not need to store any credentials for authenticating which is more secure e Aside from ensuring that each user has a domain account an organization does not need to create and maintain additional credentials for each Mail Ex
32. Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under Reports click a report type All reports have the same basic interface Start Date End Date and File type The Total Outbound Activity Report form is shown below Total Outbound Activity Report Date Range Start date 08 09 2010 fr j2 oo AM gt End date 08710 2010 fiz j2 Joo AM gt Options File type csv Create Report Reset 3 Inthe Start date boxes specify the beginning date and time of the report range Reports default to a minimum start date of the Mail Express Server installation date Click the calendar icon to select a date from a popup calendar 4 Inthe End date boxes specify the end date and time of the report range Click the calendar icon to select a date from a popup calendar 12 00 00 AM is midnight of the previous day For example for a report of activity from June 1 through the end of the day on June 30 set the Start date to 06 01 2010 at 12 00 00 AM and the End date to 07 01 2010 at 12 00 00 AM 152 Auditing and Reporting Mail Express Activity 5 Inthe File type box specify the format in which to save or view the report csv html pdf or rtf 6 Click Create Report A File Download dialog box appears Click Open to view the report now or click Save to save it locally or in a network location e lf the application necessary to view the report is not installed on the Mail Express Serv
33. Mail Express Server files it does not affect the database files or the Add in To repair Mail Express 1 Execute the installer on the Mail Express Server computer The Welcome page appears 2 Click Next The License Agreement appears 3 Click I agree The installer detects that Mail Express Server is already installed 67 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 ZJ GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup 5 xj Bisting Installation Detected Choose the maintenance operation to perform A GlobalSCAPE Mail Express is already installed Select the operation you want to perform Modify database configuration Reinstall Mail Express Uninstall Mail Express Nullsoft Install System v2 46 4 Click Reinstall Mail Express then click Reinstall e If the Mail Express Server service is running a message appears asking you to stop the service Click Yes to continue installation If you click No the installation aborts e If the Mail Express Server service is not running the Mail Express Server files are installed Uninstalling Mail Express Server Uninstall Mail Express Server using Window s Add or Remove Programs utility To remove the Mail Express Server 1 Click Start gt Run The Run dialog box appears 2 Inthe Open box type appwiz cpli then click OK or press ENTER The Add or Remove Programs dialog box appears Click GlobalSCAPE Mail Express then click Remove The uninstaller wizard appears Click Uninstall Ma
34. Microsoft s web site and each can be deployed and installed silently Silent mode is the preferred method for deploying the Add In s prerequisites The same MSI and bootstrapper used to deploy the 32 bit Outlook Add In are used to deploy the 64 bit Outlook Add In 64 bit Outlook Add in support available in v3 2 and later To install the Outlook Add In 1 2 Log in to the Mail Express Administration portal Before installing review the Outlook Add In s system requirements and ensure Outlook is updated with the latest service packs In the navigation pane under System Information click Add In Installer The Outlook Add In Installer page appears Outlook Add in Installer Outlook Add in Installer Files Installer Description MailExpress Outlook Add In Installs the Mail Express Outlook Add In on workstations running Microsoft Office 2003 5 ae Installer Only 2007 and 2010 For use when prerequisite software has been pre installed mint Prerequisite Installer Bundle containing the Mail Express Outlook Add In and prerequisite software for aan Bundle Outlook 2003 installation on workstations running Microsoft Outlook 2003 i Prerequisite Installer Bundle containing the Mail Express Outlook Add In and prerequisite software for TATR Bundle Outlook 2007 installation on workstations running Microsoft Outlook 2007 mic Prerequisite Installer Bundle containing the Mail Express Outlook Add In and prerequisite software for Now Bun
35. Next The Configure Database Settings page appears iE Configure Database Settings i Specify the database name and database owner credentials ZN Please specify the name of the database to be created and the usemame and password of the database owner account that will be used by the Mail Express Server Click Next to continue Database name MAILEXPRESS Authentication mode SQL Server Authentication Windows Authentication Database owner user name Database owner password Confirm password 6 Provide the database name and owner credentials e Database name Name of the database e g MAILEXPRESS e Authentication mode When SQL Server authentication is selected you must specify the username and password for the user account to use when connecting to the database When Windows authentication is selected the installer will use the active Windows user account when connecting to the database The active Windows user account is the account running the installer Database owner username and Database owner password The account credentials to be used by the Mail Express Server when connecting to the database When Windows authentication is selected these fields are disabled 7 If the connection is successful click Install 13 Mail Express Server is installed and then the Installation Complete page appears 31 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Z GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup 5 xj Instal
36. Provider 8 Secure the virtual server by locking down the IP address that clients can use to connect On the Access tab click Connection The Connection dialog box appears IP Address Mack Domain Name l 192 168 101 123 9 Specify the IP address of the Mail Express server then click OK With this configuration the Exchange Server is not acting as an open relay 10 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box Configuring Mail Express with the New Module After you have configured anonymous access in Exchange configure Mail Express to access the Restricted Relay module you defined above 1 On the Mail Express Exchange Configuration page set the Host box to the Exchange Server hostname and the Port box to 24 or whichever port you set in Exchange 2 If you enabled encryption in Exchange select the Connect using SSL check box then do one of the following e Select the Always trust certificates from Exchange Server check box and don t upload a file This option is useful for testing but is less secure that the next option e Clear the Always trust certificates from Exchange Server and then click Choose File to upload the Public Certificate of the of the Certificate Authority that signed the Exchange Server s Public Certificate typically this is the Public Certificate for the Active Directory server 85 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 3 Because Restricted Relay accepts anonymous users ensur
37. Refer to the GlobalSCAPE User Guides in PDF page to download a searchable PDF of this user guide After release of the product the online help is updated as errors and omissions are identified therefore you should visit the Support Center when the help file in the application does not answer your question The following conventions are used in this user guide boldface text Boldface type in text refers to interface buttons hyperlinks and filenames paths Boldface type also serves as emphasis to set apart main ideas italicized text Italicized text applies to new terms introduced for the first time Italicized text can also serve as emphasis for key concepts unicode text Plain text denotes exact code literal commands and user input For more help information refer to the following topics Finding Information in the Help GlobalSCAPE Support Center Using the Knowledgebase 187 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 i If the help opens in the browser without a menu or toolbar right click in a topic or the Help link in Mail Express and then click Open in New Window Finding Information in the Help You can find information in the online application Help in several ways This PDF is also searchable and contains working hyperlinks Contents Displays a logical organization of the help topics similar to chapters in a book Click a main heading represented by a book icon to display pages that link to topics and c
38. Server service and then click Properties 20 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express 3 Click the Log On tab and then do one of the following e To specify that the service uses the Local System account click Local System account Set by default e To specify that the service uses the Local Service account click This account and then type NT AUTHORITY LocalService e To specify that the service uses the Network Service account click This account and then type NT AUTHORITY NetworkService e To specify another account click This account click Browse and then specify a user account in the Select User dialog box When you are finished click OK e Type the password for the user account in the Password and Confirm password boxes and then click OK If you select the Local Service account or Network Service account do not type a password To configure how a service is started using the command line You can also manage services using the sc config command For more information about the options available open a command prompt and type sc config For examples and detailed descriptions of the command line options see the command line reference at http go microsoft com fwlink linkid 53528 Internal SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Instance For new installations you can use an internal evaluation SQL Server 2008 R2 Express database instance When selected the installer will automatically install the database instance w
39. Service is stopped and installation continues If you click No the installation aborts During the Mail Express Server upgrade the Mail Express Server Service will be stopped When the Add In tries to contact the Mail Express Server the server will be unavailable and the Add In will be disconnected Refer to Connecting to Mail Express Server for details of what happens when Mail Express Server is unavailable 9 When installation is complete click Next The final page of the wizard appears 10 Select or clear the check boxes as necessary If you want to view the version history select the Show version history check box If you do not want to create a desktop shortcut for the administration interface clear the Create a desktop shortcut check box If you do not want to start the Mail Express Server service clear the Start the Mail Express Server service check box If you do not want to start the administration interface clear the Start the Administration Interface check box The server service must be started to start the administration interface 11 Click Finish When the upgraded Mail Express Server service is started the previous version s Outlook Add In will not connect The Add In will indicate a version mismatch in the Mail Express Status pane and display an exclamation point on the toolbar ribbon After you upgrade the Add In it will then connect successtully 12 Upgrade the Mail Express Outlook Add I
40. Settings M Use Exchange authentication Username mail express Password Jewweee Confirm password Jecweee Mailbox Settings Mailbox monitoring for forwarding system messages T Monitor mailbox Mailbox Type IMAP4 Mailbox Port 143 Email Settings Email addresses used for notifications sent by Mail Express From address mail express dev globalscape com Reply to address mail express dev globalscape com Test Configuration Test email send Test See also Testing Mail Express Exchange Configuration Testing the Configuration Test the configuration to verify communication between the Exchange server and Mail Express Send emails to from addresses that are internal managed by the Exchange server and external using the following criteria 94 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server Email from the system Send a test email using the Mail Express Exchange Configuration page to a recipient internal to the Exchange mail domain and to one that is external to the domain Verify that the messages are delivered and that the From and Reply to addresses are correct Mailbox monitoring must be off during the test otherwise emails are sent to the mailbox being monitored Email on behalf of a user Send an email on behalf of users who have addresses both internal and external The web portals can be used to execute these tests You can either create internal and external users of Mail Express usi
41. administration and transaction auditing Mail Express offers a web interface that an administrator either an IT administrator or a business unit manager depending on who within an organization owns the solution can use to access all of the necessary management features and functions Outlook Add In The Microsoft Outlook Add In provides the ability to automatically send files using Mail Express via the normal Outlook messaging workflow based either on predetermined use cases either administrator or sender defined or in an ad hoc manner using Mail Express tools that are integrated into the Outlook User Interfaces No Mail Express specific action will be required by the sender after the initial installation and configuration of the Add In Internal Web Portal Mail Express includes an Internal Portal a web page from which internal parties can send files to recipients inside or outside the organization The Internal Portal provides a web based alternative to using the Outlook Add In and is driven by a set of administrative settings that are shared with the Add In Package Drop off Mail Express includes a Package Drop off Portal a web page from which external parties can send files to Mail Express customers The Package Drop off Portal provides a bi directional flow of information between you and your partners Package Pick up Mail Express provides multiple options for recipients to download the files that have been sent to them Recipien
42. all attachments exceeds a certain threshold select the check box then specify the threshold at which to manage attachments o Number of attachments To manage attachments based on the number of attachments select the check box then specify the number of attachments at which to use Mail Express o File type To manage attachments based on file type select the check box then click Add The defaults are specified on the Mail Express server In the Specify a file type box type the file extension e g docx jpg xls then click Add Do not type a period before the extension 166 Using Mail Express in Outlook Z add File Type Mail Express xj Specify a file type e g docx ipa docx Add 3 Inthe Default Send Options area specify the following options e Manage embedded attachments e Notify me when files are picked up e Send pick up page link only e Link expiration Link expiration is enforced by the Mail Express server You can set the expiration to happen sooner than what is defined on the server but you cannot specify a longer time to expiration 4 Inthe Default Reply Options area specify the following options e Always include reply link e Include reply link when attachments are managed e Do not include reply link 5 Inthe Behavior when Mail Express Server is unavailable area specify what you want the Mail Express Add In to do when it cannot connect to Mail Express Server e g during network m
43. and adhere to at least 3 of the following requirements contain at least 1 number 1 upper case 1 lower case and 1 non alphanumeric character 186 Getting Help 6 T Click Create Your account is created and the Drop Off Portal appears After the account is created you will receive an email confirming that the account has been activated and the user who invited you will receive an email confirming that you have accepted the invitation Ensure that emails from the user who invited you are going to your Inbox and not your Junk Mail or Spam folder Successful Account Activation Inbox x krsh globalscape com to me iow details 10 47 AM 25 minutes ago Reply Thank you for using Mail Express and activating your account Account Summary Username krsh gmail com Display name krsh gmail com Portal https localhost dropoff We have sent a note to Karla lt krsh globalscape com gt that you have accepted the invitation Powered by GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Reply gt Forward To send files to Mail Express Internal users using the Drop Off Portal refer to Sending Files Using the Drop Off Portal Getting Help Refer to the topics in this chapter for details of getting help on using Mail Express For the most up to date information regarding this version of Mail Express to view version history updates and activation instructions and for other self help resources visit the Support Center
44. and type the password carefully if you do not know your password at initial login you will not be able to log in and will have to uninstall and then reinstall the application After you log in to the server you will have the opportunity to change the password and to create other administrator accounts Using a UNC path to network locations requires running the Mail Express Server Windows service under a true user account instead of Local System By default Local System account does not have access to network paths and giving it access is not recommended e f you are connecting to a remote SQL Server database supported in v3 2 and later you will need the database connection information host name port privileged user credentials All other configuration such as licensing IP address hostname port and so on is configured in the Web administration interface after installation e Before installing refer to System Requirements If the system requirements are not met the installer will fail e For instructions for uninstalling the server refer to Uninstalling Mail Express Server e The SQL Server Express portion of the installation can be quite time consuming To install Mail Express Server 1 Review the important information above before starting the installation Not reading and heeding the information above could cause your installation to fail 2 If Mail Express version 2 2 is installed uninstall it before continuing
45. cccccccesceceeeeeceeeeeeaaeceeeeecaeeesaaeseeaeeseeeeesaeeeeaaeeeeneeeaas 87 Exchange 2007 and 201 0 oi ccieniehseide ee etelica ane dep eidededeai dese teddies ENE EEE 87 EXChanQe 2003 iaa a A RARA KOR ARASA TAAA PAS KARRE KSE AIE KEARE TAAR aCA AEAN odes 90 Configuring Mail Express for Authenticated ACCESS cccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeesaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeneneeenaees 93 Testing the Configuration siseses eiii viii aiya eaei a Et 94 Configuring File Storage and Purging c cceeececeeeceeeeeeeseeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeceeneecaeeesaaesdeneeseaeeseaeeseeeseeeeeeaas 95 Configuring Database Purging and Notifications ccceccceceeececeneeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeseaeseeneeseeeesaeeseaaeeeeeeeeaas 97 Configuring the Drop Off Portal cccccccccesseeceeeeececeeeeeaeeeeaeeceeeeecaaeeeeaaeseeeeseaeeeseaeseeaeeseeeescaesesaeseeeeeeaes 98 Overview of the Add In and Internal Web Portal ccc cceeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeseaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeseeeeeeeeeess 100 Authenticating Outlook USPS cccccceeceeesseceeeee cee eeceaeeeeaeeceeeeecaaeeeeaaeeseneesaeeesaaeeseaaesseeeeseaeeseaeeneneeennees 100 Manual Authentic atic ncssiecc ssscecveptianced AAE E thug dunia sbbavadvnghvaiiibbivadwaentes 100 SINGIELSIGN ON cesses desea Shee T E T Ai detieary dabnndiesi nn ais 101 Configuring the Add In and Internal Web Portal cccccccsceceeeeeeeeeeeeee scenes caeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeseaeeseeeeess 101 Overview of Mail Express Invitation
46. com mepreauthuser These SPNs should work regardless of the account the Mail Express Server Service is running as To view the SPNs to verify that they were created successfully run the following command substituting lt PreAuthUsername gt with the username of the pre auth user account setspn 1 lt PreAuthUsername gt For example setspn 1 mepreauthuser If the Outlook Add In is installed silently the SPN must be provided as an installation parameter The installation parameter name is SERVICEPRINCIPALNAME d Click Generate to create the installation script The necessary script appears in the e Installation script box Click Download to save the script Save the script and the installation files in the same directory or ensure that the script can access the installer The command line parameters in the script are imperative for the proper operation of the Outlook Add In Use one of the following methods to install the Add In on users desktops Execute the script at each user s desktop to silently install the Add In Install the Add In manually on a user s desktop by double clicking on the Add In MSI installer Or send an email instructing users to install the Add In themselves and provide a walkthrough or screenshots to guide them through the installation wizard screens Deploy the Add In across the enterprise using a deployment tool For example use a logon script to install the Add In si
47. copying or transferring a file in violation of a copyright in violation of any laws related to the transfer of encrypted data or for any other illegal purpose 8 MAINTENANCE AND TECHNICAL SUPPORT SERVICES If you purchased a maintenance and support plan M amp S Plan GlobalSCAPE shall provide the support services at the level agreed by you and GlobalSCAPE and as defined in the GlobalSCAPE Maintenance and Support Guide accessible from http www globalscape com support gme aspx the Guide as of the date of your acceptance of this Agreement and as set forth in your invoice or sales receipt The term of the M amp S Plan may vary and is specified on your invoice or sales receipt Please contact GlobalSCAPE if you would like to extend the term of your M amp S Plan To be eligible for maintenance and support services the Server Program and the Add In if purchased must be covered by an active M amp S Plan 9 PAYMENT TERMS If GlobalSCAPE has agreed to invoice you for license fees or fees applicable to your M amp S Plan invoices shall be transmitted on the date of issuance via electronic or postal mail to the primary or billing contact listed on your account Unless otherwise agreed to in writing full payment is due within thirty 30 days from invoice date Amounts not paid when due shall bear interest at 1 5 per month or the highest non usurious rate permitted under ap
48. database CREATE _DATABASE_USER creates a database user CHECK checks the version of the database to see if it is up to date INIT initializes the database objects and default data PROPS updates the current database settings for use by the Mail Express Server DISPLAY displays the current database settings in use by the Mail Express Server CONNECT tests connecting to a database VALIDATE combines the VALIDATE_DATABASE and VALIDATE_DATABASE_USER actions 63 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 VALIDATE_DATABASE performs some minor validation of database settings VALIDATE_DATABASE_USER performs some minor validation for the current database user o Default None o Example action CREATE_DATABASE e timeout lt seconds gt o Description The timeout in seconds to continue trying to connect to the database A value of 0 will only attempt to connect once o Default 120 seconds o Example timeout 5 e server lt server name gt o Description The database server host or IP address o Default None o Example server Jupiter e port lt port gt o Description The listener port for the database on the database server host o Default None o Example port 1433 e instance lt instance name gt o Description The database server instance name o Default None o Example instance MSSQLSERVER e database lt database name gt o Description The name of the database o Default
49. directory writing to it during the install and then copying it back to the lt Installation Directory gt logs directory at the end e You can write out the same log messages to another log file of your choosing using the logfile lt Log file gt command line switch to the installer Debug Logging The installer is capable of writing the same messages that go to the Main Installer Log see above using the Windows debug logging infrastructure These messages may be viewed using a utility such as SysInternal s DebugView application 55 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 e To enable this logging the installer must be run from the command line with the debug switch see Installation Command Line Parameters Installation Command Line Parameters The installer supports specification of the following command line parameters When run in graphical user interface mode the default these parameters may typically be used to override the default settings When running the installer in silent mode using the S switch these parameters are used to specify both the required and optional values as detailed further in Silent Installation of Mail Express Server Parameter Definitions e S o Description Initiates a silent installation See Silent Installation below for more information o Default The installer defaults to graphical user interface mode o Example S e debug e Description Enables logging to the Windows system debug l
50. feature for the Drop Off and Internal Portals that allows customers to create links to specific email addresses By appending to lt list of recipients gt to the standard Drop Off and Internal Portal URLs where lt list of recipients gt is a comma delimited list of email addresses a URL can be created for use in external sites emails or as a bookmark Use of this feature will pre populate the To field and disable the ability to edit the To field The lt list of recipients gt will be pre validated prior to the display of the page and any malformed addresses or validation errors email address length domain restrictions number of recipients allowed etc will result in a 404 Page Not Found error URLs without to lt list of recipients gt will result in standard behavior Custom URLs must be properly URL encoded For example multiple email addresses can only be separated by commas Any other delimiters such as semicolons will result in errors Additionally the confirmation page will allow the user to send another message for the specific lt list of recipients gt if one was provided via the URL Otherwise the send another link will behave normally renders Drop Off Internal Portal with an editable To field not pre populated Example URLs https me mycompany com dropoft to sales mycompany com could be used to create a link to a client s Drop Off Portal with sales mycompany com pre populated in the To field https me m
51. force attacks on Active Directory accounts To modify these settings 1 Ina text editor open the file lt Installation Directory gt webapps ROOT WEB INF classes META INF staticConfig xml 2 Modify one or more of the following settings e configurationManager enableL DAPViaDMZGateway Sets whether authentication should be performed against LDAP for communications that have been proxied through the DMZ Gateway Default is false 110 Configuring the DMZ Gateway Connection e configurationManager enableAdminPagesViaDMZGateway Sets whether Administration portal pages should render for communications that have been proxied through the DMZ Gateway Default is false e configurationManager enableDropoffPagesViaDMZGateway Sets whether Drop Off portal pages should render for communications that have been proxied through the DMZ Gateway Default is true e configurationManager enablelnternalPagesViaDMZGateway Sets whether Internal portal pages should render for communications that have been proxied through the DMZ Gateway Default is false e configurationManager enablePickupPagesViaDMZGateway Sets whether PickU portal pages should render for communications that have been proxied through the DMZ Gateway Default is true e configurationManager enableClientServiceViaD MZGateway Sets whether the Outlook Add In web service interface should be enabled for communications that have been proxied through the DMZ Gateway Default
52. guarantee that all clients connecting to the web server will possess the necessary trusted CA public certificates It is safer to proactively provide the full certificate chain from the web server As such our recommended best practice is to always configure the full certificate chain provided by the commercial certificate authority How is the SSL Certificate Authority Certificate Chain configured The SSL Certificate Authority CA certificate chain may be configured in the SSL Certificate section of the General Configuration page within the Mail Express Server s administration interface SSL Certificate Upload Certificate Authority certificate chain Upload public certificate Upload private key Private key is password protected Private key password Confirm private key password Note that use of the certificate chain is optional If you do not wish to specify a certificate chain simply don t provide a file for the field If you want to configure a certificate chain note that the public certificate private key and optional private key password settings must all be specified at the same time The interface does not provide a method to configure each setting independent of one another To specify a Certificate Authority certificate chain click Browse to specify the file containing the certificate chain in the format specified below 136 Mail Express Security and SSL Supported Certificate Chain Format The certific
53. invoice shall control In the case of a conflict between this Agreement and the M amp S Plan this Agreement shall control This Agreement may only be modified by a written document signed by GlobalSCAPE No GlobalSCAPE reseller or distributor is authorized to change the terms of this Agreement If any portion hereof is found to be void or unenforceable then such provision shall be reformed without further action by the parties to the extent necessary to make such provision valid and nforceable when applied to such facts or circumstances with the objective of achieving as nearly as legally possible the sam ffect Failure to exercise or delay in the exercise of any right or remedy under this Agreement shall not operate as a waiver thereof If you are located outside the United States then the following provision applies Les parties aux pr sentes confirment leur intention que cette convention ainsi que tous les documents aff rents soient redig s dans la langue anglaise Translation The parties confirm that this Agreement and all related documentation is and will be in the English language Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement or if you desire to contact GlobalSCAPE for any reason please contact GlobalSCAPE by mail at 4500 Lockhill Selma Road Suite 150 San Antonio Texas 78249 USA by telephone at 1 210 308 8267 or by electronic mail from http ww
54. is false e configurationManager enableReplyPagesViaDMZGateway Sets whether the Reply portal pages should render for communications that have been proxied through the DMZ Gateway Default is true e configurationManager enableAccountActivationPagesViaDMZGateway Sets whether account activation portal pages should render for communications that have been proxied through the DMZ Gateway Default is true 3 Save the changes to the file 4 Restart the Mail Express Server Windows service Viewing and Managing Files Occasionally you might want to prevent users from picking up a file that was sent because it was sent erroneously or an external sender attempted to upload malicious files File management allows you to delete any files that you do not want transferred into or out of the organization When you delete a file from the server only the files are removed from the server no transaction history is removed from the database All manual deletions of files are recorded in the database The date and time of the deletion is noted in the audit log as well as the administrator performing the action time and date of deletion and which files were deleted The deletion information includes a description similar to the following File Zero 2k dmp 2 0 KB from Wed Sep 22 10 09 46 CDT 2010 was explicitly deleted belonged to file CjCr07H63bldFXepO8aE7RGvzHthwHRAuFE7olel If you click a link for a file that was deleted a mes
55. must begin with BEGIN CERTIFICATE and end with END CERTIFICATE The Public Certificate that you must upload is the Public Certificate of the Certificate Authority that signs the Public Certificate for the Active Directory Server to which you are connecting However in most cases the Public Certificate for the Active Directory will be self signed In this case you will just upload the Public Certificate of the AD Server 7 Inthe Authentication mode area specify Simple login or Anonymous For Simple login provide the Pre Auth User DN and Password e Inthe Pre Auth User DN box specify the user Distinguished Name for Simple login authentication The following formats are supported o Distinguished Name e g CN user OU users DC forests DC intranet DC example o User Principal Name UserName DomainName e g joeuser forest intranet example o Down Level Logon Name DOMAIN UserName e g ExampleDomain joeuser e Inthe Pre Auth User Password and Confirm Pre Auth User Password boxes specify the password for Simple login authentication For information about preauthentication refer to Preauthentication in Microsoft TechNet 8 Inthe Search base box provide the base Active Directory container that Mail Express searches to find users that it will try to authenticate e g CN users DC forest DC intranet DC example Mail Express will search the full sub tree starting at this top level container 9
56. of 500 MB on the system drive consumed by SQL Server installation files and initial database e e 10 GB of additional storage on the system drive to accommodate database growth Outlook Add In Requirements Prerequisites The table below lists the system requirements prerequisites on the computer on which the Outlook Add In is installed Outlook Add In Requiremeni Prerequisite Mail Express Server must be installed before installing the Outlook Add In Operating Systems e Windows XP Pro e Windows Vista Business e Windows 7 Professional Outlook versions refer to Microsoft documentation for Outlook requirements o Outlook 2003 o Outlook 2007 o Outlook 2010 32 bit or 64 bit Minimum system requirements o A single 1 GHz x86 based CPU or better o 1 GB of RAM or more o 1024x768 or higher resolution monitor Outlook Add In prerequisites based on Microsoft Office version Due to interdependencies among the following prerequisites they should be installed in the order listed The prerequisites are available at the links listed below in Outlook Add In Prerequisite Resources 17 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Outlook Add In Requiremeni Prerequisite i 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 e Prerequisites when using Office 2003 Microsoft Windows Installer 3 1 or Later Microsoft NET Framework v3 5 SP1 Microsoft Office 2003 Primary Interop Assemblies Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Tools for Office Second Edition Runtim
57. path gt e Description The installation directory Quotes should be used for paths containing spaces e Default C Program Files GlobalSCAPE Mail Express e Example InstallDirectory D Applications Mail Express AttachmentDirectory lt path gt e Description The email attachment directory Quotes should be used for paths containing spaces Supports both local physical drives and UNC style paths Mapped drives should be avoided because they only exist for the logon session of the current user As such they typically will not be available to the Mail Express Server when running as a Windows Service e Default lt Install Directory gt MailExpressAttachments e Example AttachmentDirectory jupiter FileStore MailExpress StartMenuGroup lt Group Name gt e Description The Start Menu folder in which to place the Mail Express Server shortcuts e Default GlobalSCAPE e Example StartMenuGroup MEAdmin AdminUsername lt username gt e Description The username to use for the initial Mail Express Administration account e Default None e Example AdminUsername meadmin AdminPassword lt password gt e Description The password to use for the initial Mail Express Administration account e Default None e Example AdminPassword wkBG2YxgzBpR AdminEmail lt email gt e Description The email address to use for the initial Mail Express Administration accout e Default None e Example AdminEmail meadmin example com D
58. pirena i i cies cece eh 130 PUI QC icc sancti E E AE eve ecti ge ccncieeyaecnagenetel dee 97 PUNQOOS aeneon akan aa a aa cee lees 97 156 DUIQING eent oti i A Wier 95 R rebrand elana erence err er corer reer er cere 117 Recipient soiien iieiea iii 151 Recover EMmail sssseerrserrrssesrresrrrnesrernesrns 171 Recovering a Lost Password c ece 182 Registering DMZ Gateway ceeneeeees 53 Registering Mail Express s es 51 Registration herenaren nai aia 51 remove the Mail Express Server 68 Repa eoii ena E ENAN EENE 37 replace l0gO sssesssssssrresssrrsssrnesrrnnesrenneernnnesrenns 117 Reporting Mail Express Activity 0 ee 151 ROPOMMS onnaa eier ia 151 re est ACCESS aveiro N aoai 174 Request ACCOUM ecceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 70 174 Request Account Page seese 174 Requesting Access to the Drop Off Page 174 Requesting Access to the Internal Portal 175 Require Mail Express to Manage Attachments 165 FOSSNCING i055 state tei tee abia S 171 reset the SSL ola ai aia 134 restart the Mail Express Server 139 Restore a a a ta ae a EE iiA 147 149 Restore Email button ssseesssssssrresrirreserresnns 170 S SsAMAccountName 1 00 eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 74 SOA cc kcdk EA FEET 147 149 188 Search Byrion E ahaa 154 157 SECUN a a a As 139 195 Security POliCy ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeees 98 SENA a A 165 169 175 Send Invitation Email
59. provide a slight boost in performance To specify what to do when Mail Express Server is not available under Behavior when Mail Express is unavailable click one of the following options e Queue emails with attachments until Mail Express Server is available Save the messages in a queue until the connection to Mail Express Server is restored then send the emails e Send emails via Outlook without Mail Express Send the emails through Outlook without Mail Express managing the attachments e Allow sender to specify behavior Display a prompt when the connection to the Mail Express Server is lost and ask the user to specify whether to wait for connectivity to the Mail Express Server or send the email immediately without Mail Express managing the attachments Click Save to save your changes or click Restore to reset the boxes to their previous setting If you navigate away from the page without clicking Save your changes are discarded Overview of Mail Express Invitations Mail Express v3 2 allows Internal users to send an invitation email from the Add in or Internal Portal to invite external parties to create a permanent external account With this account external users are able to use a defined Drop Off Portal account to send files to the sender as an alternative to using the Drop Off Portal anonymously This feature involves more work for recipients because they must initially create an account with the added benefit that the users
60. saved until you click Save e The domain validator looks for an exact match with valid recipient domains OR if the email address is a sub domain of a valid recipient domain For example if the valid recipient domain is scape com valid email addresses are anyuser scape com or anyuser anysubdomain scape com but not anyuser globalscape com Click Save to save your changes or click Restore to reset the boxes to their previous setting If you navigate away from the page without clicking Save your changes are discarded 99 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Overview of the Add in and Internal Web Portal Mail Express 3 1 and later provide an Internal Web portal to access the Mail Express service A web interface avoids the need to install and manage any client software and can be accessed from anywhere via a web browser The Internal Web portal allows non Outlook internal users to access Mail Express The web interface provides file transfer functionality similar to the Outlook Add In and Drop Off portal to allow end users to completely manage their file transfer needs via Mail Express within the bounds set by the account owner or IT administrator Internal users can create and send email attachments packages account invitations and reply links Access to the Internal Portal is protected by username password authentication A lost password link is provided for users to reset their password if forgotten A remember me option is provide
61. sign in page To recover a lost password 1 Open a web browser and navigate to the web address of the login page The login page appears 2 Click Lost Password The Lost Password page appears Lost Password Page Please provide your user name to identify your account and email address Username NY r 4 Please enter the text you see above Reset Captcha Conca 3 Inthe Username box provide the username that you use to log in to Mail Express 4 Inthe Please enter the text you see above box type the CAPTCHA text then click Continue 182 Using Mail Express in a Web Browser 5 A message appears that says To reset your password follow the instructions sent to your email address for this account Click Continue 6 Copy the temporary password from the email and paste it into the Password box on the login page then click Sign In The Change password page appears 8 Inthe New password and Confirm password boxes provide a new password The password must be between 6 and 256 characters contain at least 3 of the following types of characters number uppercase lowercase and non alphanumeric character 9 Click Change A message appears stating that the password has been changed and a confirmation email is sent to the address used when your account was created stating that your password has changed Maximum File Size for Browser Based Uploads When uploading a file using a HTTP PUT method most modern
62. start htm Or print the PDF of the Mail Express user guide approximately 200 pages available at http help globalscape com help guides index html Server Installation 1 Verify that prerequisites are installed and system requirements have been met 2 Ensure that port 443 is available on the IP address designated for Mail Express Server TIP Use the following command to check against any conflicts netstat anop TCP NOTE If there is any other process listening on port 443 including the global 0 0 0 0 interface please refer to Mail Express Knowledgebase article 10636 for more information 3 Mail Relay should be turned on if you do not create an account on the Exchange Server for Mail Express Server to send emails For information refer to http exchangepedia com 2007 01 exchange server 2007 how to allow relaying html Refer to Configuring Anonymous Access to Exchange and Configuring Authenticated Access to Exchange for information about configuring Exchange 4 Create a new service account on your Active Directory network for the Mail Express service This account is required for Mail Express to perform Kerberos authentication for connecting clients and for LDAP queries and it can also be used to allow authenticated relay through Exchange a 5 Ensure you have access to log into a Domain Controller with Domain Admin rights This is required in order to enable Kerberos authentication in Mail Express After installat
63. takes you to the reset password page Once the user changes the password either by this link or by logging in and going to the change password page the Password Changed template is used to format the email to notify the user of the change Account Request The email sent to admin users detailing an account request Download Notification Email The email sent to the original sender when the package has been downloaded by a recipient External User Invitation The email automatically sent to newly created external users inviting them to use the Mail Express system accountrequest htm1 ftl accountrequest subject ftl accountrequest text ftl downloadnotification htm ftl downloadnotification subject ftl downloadnotification text ftl externaluserinvitation htm ftl externaluserinvitation subject ftl externaluserinvitation text ftl name String requestor s name address String requestor s email address message String requestor s message portal String portal from which request was made packageld String the package that was accessed filename String the document title or null if the complete package was downloaded recipient String who accessed the file or null for anonymous access downloadDate Date when the recipient downloaded the file uploadDate Date when the sender sent the package subject String subject line from the sender s email displayName String new accoun
64. the DMZ Gateway Connection The log will be appended during each run of the Mail Express Server The log file will archive itself automatically when it reaches 10 MB and will maintain the last 10 log files in the form MailExpressServerService log lt X gt where X is a number from 1 to 10 with 1 being the most recently archived log file and 10 being the oldest Mail Express Server Event Viewer The Mail Express Server is capable of logging significant events to the Windows Event Log Events originating from the Mail Express Server are logged to the Application Event Log and by default include the following types of events e Mail Express Server Service start e Mail Express Server Service stop e Mail Express Server Service restart e Mail Express Server Service startup failures e All FATAL and ERROR level diagnostic log messages logged to the Mail Express Server Diagnostics Logging Additionally the startup and shutdown activities originating from the Windows Service Control Manager are logged to the System Event Log This is an automatic behavior provided by the Windows Operating System and is not generated by Mail Express Server Customizing Mail Express Pages and Notifications Limited customization is available for the Mail Express web pages and for the various email notifications that Mail Express sends You can modify all interfaces that have GlobalSCAPE or Mail Express branding including Web portal headers footers and logos a
65. the Outbox alter the email and resend it as long as it is resent before the in progress transfer completes When doing this the Add In creates a new package for the email and uploads the files and the original transfer automatically cancels itself Logging Mail Express Outlook Add In Activities The Outlook Add In logs errors warnings fatal errors and informative details to a file to assist with troubleshooting Other available log levels include ALL DEBUG INFO WARN ERROR FATAL and OFF The log entries include the date and time in 24 hour format mm dd yyyy hh mm ss e g 06 25 2010 14 17 46 A log file can grow up to 10 MB at which point a new log file is created up to 10 log files total By default the log files are saved in userprofile Application Data GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin logs You can change this location in the General Configuration dialog box when the Mail Express User Interface is enabled Changing the Message Format Mail Express 3 1 does not support RTF formatted messages To change the format for all messages sent from Outlook please refer to the procedures below Changing the Message Format in Outlook 2010 To change the message format for all messages 1 Click the File tab 2 Click Options 3 Click Mail 4 Under Compose messages in the Compose messages in this format list click HTML or Plain Text To change the format of an individual message 1 With the message open click
66. the prerequisites are already installed you do not need this bundle Instead use the Mail Express Outlook Add In Installer Only above Zipped bundle containing the Mail Express Outlook Add In and prerequisite software for installation on workstations running Microsoft Outlook 2003 This bundle can be used to install the prerequisite items that the Add In requires plus the Add In Typically you will run the bootstrapper installer in this bundle which will install the Add In prerequisites and then afterwards it will run the Add In Installer to install the Add in e Prerequisite Installer Bundle Outlook 2007 lIf the prerequisites are already installed you do not need this bundle Instead use Mail Express Outlook Add In Installer Only above Zipped bundle containing the Mail Express Outlook Add In and prerequisite software for installation on workstations running Microsoft Outlook 2007 This bundle can be used to install the prerequisite items that the Add In requires plus the Add In Typically you will run the bootstrapper installer in this bundle which will install the Add In prerequisites and then afterwards it will run the Add In Installer to install the Add in e Prerequisite Installer Bundle Outlook 2010 If the prerequisites are already installed you do not need this bundle Instead use the Mail Express Outlook Add In Installer Only above Zipped bundle containing the Mail Express Outlook Add In and prerequisite softwar
67. this customized Mail Express lt a href https mesrv dropoff to sender utfText gt Drop Off lt a gt link to return any files to me lt i gt lt span gt lt if gt lt p gt The text in red was added to the existing text in the template Email Templates Mail Express uses a variety of templates to build the various emails that it sends You can customize the text and some text attributes in the template The templates are purposefully very simple The text of the email is editable The email address and link are added with variables Be careful to not change any of the variables in angle brackets lt variable gt as that will prevent the email from functioning properly Powered by GlobalSCAPE is not editable in the templates GlobalISCAPE Professional Services team can provide custom branding services Each of the emails is composed of the following template types e lt ID gt html ftl is the template for the HTML formatted version of the email that will be seen by recipients using HTML mode to view emails in their email client software e lt ID gt subject ftl is the template for the subject line of the email e lt ID gt text ftl is the template for the text formatted version of the email that will be seen by recipients using plain text to view emails in their email client software If you want HTML email recipients and plain text email recipients to view the same message you will have to edit both versi
68. to save or view the report CSV HTML PDF or RTF 6 Click Create Report A File Download dialog box appears Click Open to view the report now or click Save to save it locally or in a network location 159 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Audit Event Types The table below describes the various types of audit events that can appear in Mail Express reports and logs File Removed Manually Informational DMZ Expected Disconnect Occurs when the Mail Express Server successfully and Informational expectedly disconnects from the DMZ Gateway DMZ Unexpected Disconnect Occurs when the Mail Express unexpectedly looses Warning connection to the DMZ Gateway Licensing An issue occurred regarding licensing of the Mail Express Warning server Password Reset Informational Template Customization Warning Undeliverable Message Informational Unverified Drop Off An Unverified User attempted a file upload which resulted in Informational phantom package upload did not occur due to security restrictions User Limit The maximum number of users for a given user type has Warning been reached User Logged Out A user logged out of Mail Express Informational Levels of Severity e Informational The default severity level for most events Denotes an event that is expected under normal operation e Warning Denotes system issues that are recoverable Mail Express Database Tables Refer to the online help for details of the datab
69. transferred select the File type exclusions check box then list up to 50 file extensions in the box Wildcards are not supported e To add file extensions to the list type the file extension in the small box then click Add e To remove a file extension from the list click the file extension in the list then click Remove 8 To limit the domains to which reply users can send files select the Valid recipient domains check box The domain is everything that comes after the symbol in the email address For example if the address is mike example com the domain is example com When a reply user clicks Reply all to an email that includes recipients whose domains are restricted the emails to those recipients are not sent e To add domains to which drop off users can send files type the domain in the small box then click Add Changes are not saved until you click Save e To remove domains to which drop off users can send files click the domain in the list then click Remove Changes are not saved until you click Save e The domain validator looks for an exact match with valid recipient domains OR if the email address is a sub domain of a valid recipient domain For example if the valid recipient domain is scape com valid email addresses are anyuser scape com or anyuser anysubdomain scape com but not anyuser globalscape com 9 Click Save to save your changes or click Restore to reset the boxes to their previous setting If
70. users only purges files sent by external users regardless of which component they used to send the files To configure file storage 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under Configuration click File Store The File Store Configuration page appears 95 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 File Store Configuration File store path C Program Files GlobalSCAPE Mail Express MailExpressAttachments I Purge files Purge files sent by Internal Users older than Purge files sent by Drop off Users older than I Send notifications on File Store status Storage threshold Send notification when File Store is Send notification every See Genera Configuration page for notification recipient list 3 To purge files sent by Internal users select the Purge files check box then specify the frequency with which to Purge files sent my Internal Users This value cannot exceed the database s purging parameters If you attempt to set a less frequent value than the database purging value an error message appears Database purging must be disabled before disabling File Store purging The default is to purge files older than 3 months 4 To purge files sent by external users select the Purge files check box then specify the frequency with which to Purge files sent by Drop Off Users This value cannot exceed the database s purging parameters If you attempt to set a less frequent value t
71. you navigate away from the page without clicking Save your changes are discarded 108 Configuring the DMZ Gateway Connection Configuring the DMZ Gateway Connection This section describes configuring Mail Express for use with DMZ Gateway For information about installing and configuring DMZ Gateway please refer to the DMZ Gateway documentation Version 3 1 and later of Mail Express Server can connect to a network protected by DMZ Gateway v3 0 1 and later Using DMZ Gateway with the Mail Express Server allows administrators to limit access by allowing only outbound connections from the Mail Express Server via the firewall configuration DMZ Gateway is designed to reside in the demilitarized zone and provide secure communication with the Mail Express Server behind intranet firewalls without requiring any inbound firewall holes between the internal network and the DMZ and with no sensitive data stored in the DMZ even temporarily When configured to use DMZ Gateway Mail Express functions normally giving no indication to end users of the system that the additional piece has been added to the network DMZ Gateway is a separate module from Mail Express Server and is installed and licensed separately The connection between Mail Express and DMZ Gateway is configured in the Mail Express administration portal You must enable an outbound port from Mail Express Server to DMZ Gateway over which Mail Express Server is to connect to DMZ Gateway T
72. 169 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 e RTF formatted e mails Mail Express 3 1 does not support RTF formatted messages To change the format for all messages sent in Outlook please refer to Changing the Message Format To send a file 1 Create an email as usual 2 Attach the file to the email using the Mail Express Attach File button 3 Optional Click Include Reply Link if want your recipient s to reply using the Reply Portal to send attachments back to you You can specify that you only want to include the reply link if attachments are managed by Mail Express 4 Optional Configure send options such as requiring a password to download files from and upload files to Mail Express 5 Click Send Viewing Mail Express Add In Status The Mail Express Add In includes a Status pane through which you can view whether you are connected to Mail Express Server and the status of email attachments being sent via Mail Express By default the Mail Express Status pane is hidden The pane appears on the right side of the main Outlook window in Outlook 2007 and 2010 or in a pop up window in Outlook 2003 To view Mail Express status e On the Mail Express toolbar ribbon click Hide Status or Display Status Mail Express Status General Status Connected to Mail Express Server Transfer Status To Bob Hope lt bhope conceptdey com gt Subject test big file send Size 278 36 MB Status Pending UploadAttempts 0
73. 2QOS Plans eieesceceestaceedees tence vate E T EE 37 O2QOOT aTi ELEPO T EFE PTEE A TEE cenecene dee 37 ODJOCICIASS oirean e Aeran e ARAKA RERAN 74 Office2003PIARedist c ccceceeceeeeeeteeteeeeeees 37 Office2007PIARedist ccceceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 37 operating System assssssrresesrresssresrirnesrrnnesrennens 15 Outlook 2003 nsise 37 168 170 Outlook 2007 nsise 37 168 170 Overview of Mail Express Invitations 104 Overview of the Add In and Internal Web Portal E EE ET caayseveess ete ousted 100 P Package ID in minsin iiia 111 151 Package Management 111 Package Store Root cccccesseeeeeseeeeereeeeaes 111 Password 00scceeeeeeeeeees 74 147 149 164 182 Password ReS6t oerien keira niia 156 PaSSwordReset sis itreat 156 passwordreset html ftl ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 117 passwordreset Subject ftl occ 117 passwordreset text ftl ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 117 ole Meer epee rere rere reer cere treme eeepc etree ete 151 PICKUP A E T E ters 106 PICK UP PONA airiran ET EET 115 pickupportalcustomization html ft 117 Portal Configuration cccccccieeseeeeereeees 106 Porral PONCY e eroriren Ane ETAR ER 98 Portal Seting e ccceisercccstesteccedeseececssvectessvens 98 106 203 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Preauthentication 0 ececceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 74 Prerequisite Installer Bundle ccceeeeeeeeees 37 PUDIIC KOY rei
74. 5 To specify when links are to expire select the Link Expiration check box then specify the duration If no link expiration is defined packages will be available for download until purged based on the file retention policy When you modify the file expiration value you are modifying this setting for all future transfers Packages that are active within the system retain the expiration value in place at time that they were created The default is 2 weeks Link expiration can be from 1 minute to 99 years 102 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server 10 11 Select the Allow Internal Users to send account invitations check box of you want to allow Internal users to send invitations to email recipients that are not Internal users If the check box is cleared no one can send invites If the check box is selected only users who have the Allow account invitations check box enabled in their user account have this permission Select the Register Internal Users as account invite enabled if you want to allow registered Internal users to send invitations When the check box is selected any new Internal users that are created will automatically have this permission Selecting the check box does not retroactively allow the permission The administrator has to manually enable the permission for Internal users created before the check box was selected In the Include Mail Express Reply link area specify whether the Mail Express Repl
75. 7 2010 06 22 09 49 42 057 forcePasswordChange false false activeToken imKarla imKarla_2 username imKarla imKarla displayName imKarla imKarla createdDate 2010 06 22 09 47 29 87 2010 06 22 09 47 29 87 Back o The settings that changed are in darker text settings that did not change are grayed In this example the user imKarla was deleted deleted true o Place the cursor over an abbreviated value to view the full text 9 Click Back to return to the report Viewing Invite Activity You can generate a report of invite activity and save it in the following file formats CSV HTML PDF or RTF If the application necessary to view the report is not installed on the Mail Express Server computer you can still save the report in the format you want and then open it on another computer on which the application is installed For example you could save the report as a PDF then email it or transport it toa computer on which Adobe Reader is installed 158 Auditing and Reporting Mail Express Activity Invite Activity Apr 1 2011 00 00 To Apr 30 2011 00 00 Invite Date Inviter Invitee Account Invites Reply Apr 13 2011 09 47 John Doe No account invites Uploads 1 lt johndoe metest com gt Apr 13 2011 09 47 John Doe No account invites Uploads 0 lt johndoe metest com gt Apr 13 2011 09 51 John Doe Pending No reply invites lt johndoe metest com gt Apr 13 2011 09 51 John Doe Pending No reply invites lt johnd
76. 995 If Use Exchange Authentication is not enabled the mailbox monitoring option is not available If you have configured Exchange to relay authentication will be disabled as well as Mailbox Settings and DSN will be forwarded to the sender by Exchange 10 Optional Provide an email address to send a test email to then click Test A message appears stating that a test email was sent If an error occurs during the transmission an error message is displayed instead If the test is successful an email is sent to the address specified stating that the mail server for Mail Express has been configured correctly The Test email box is unavailable if Monitor Mailbox is selected In that case the address specified in the From address box is used for the test Refer to Testing Mail Express Exchange Configuration for more information 80 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server 11 Click Save to save your changes or click Restore to cancel changes If you navigate away from the page without clicking Save your changes are discarded Configuring Anonymous Access to Exchange By default Exchange installs a default SMTP module that listens on port 25 The instructions below describe how to create additional modules that meet the specific needs of Mail Express However it is not necessary to create multiple modules A single module can be configured to meet multiple requirements simultaneously In Exchange 2003 these m
77. Active Inactive or Disabled If the Add In is in a disabled state it cannot be enabled using the steps above initially Instead you must perform the following steps in the Trust Center a Next to the Manage box click Disabled Items then click Go b Inthe Disabled Items dialog box click Mail Express Outlook Add In then click Enable c Close the Disabled Items dialog box If the Add In now appears in the Active list it is enabled If the Add In appears in the Inactive list follow steps 3 4 above In Outlook 2003 1 2 Click Tools gt Other gt Advanced Options gt COM Add Ins Select turn on or clear turn off the Mail Express check box then click OK Sending Files with the Mail Express Outlook Add In If you have ever sent an email with attachments you already know how to use Mail Express Create the email attach one or more files to the email then click Send You will continue to send and receive e mails as always the only difference is that Mail Express works transparently in the background to transfer the e mails that have attachments The sent email is still saved to your Sent Items folder but the attachments if managed by Mail Express are not saved in the Sent Items folder Instead a link to the attachments is added to the body of the email The email saved to your Sent Items folder looks the same as the recipient s received email The attachment if managed by Mail Express is saved on Mail Expre
78. AttachmentDirectory lt path gt StartMenuGroup lt group gt SkipPrereqCheck SkipDBUtilFirewallUpdate SkipDesktopShortcut SkipStartService SkipSQLServerPrereqCheck SkipSQLServerInstall SkipSQLServerSettings SkipSQLServerCreateDB SkipSQLServerCreateDBUser SkipSQLServerCreateSchema 33 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 New Installation Creating a New External Database and Database User This option installs the Mail Express Server and creates a database and database user on an external SQL Server database instance This option is only applicable when the Mail Express Server is not already installed Required Parameters Optional Parameters DatabaseType EXTERNAL ExternalDatabaseMode CREATE AdminUsername lt username gt AdminPassword lt password gt AdminEmail lt email gt DatabaseServerName lt server gt AuthenticationType lt type gt LoginName lt usernames gt if AuthenticationType SQLSERVER LoginPassword lt username gt if AuthenticationType SQLSERVER DBOAuthenticationType lt type gt DBOLoginName lt username gt DBOPassword lt passwords gt if DBOAuthenticationType SQLSERVER IS debug logfile lt file gt nstallDirectory lt path gt AttachmentDirectory lt path gt StartMenuGroup lt group gt SkipPrereqCheck SkipDBUtilFirewallUpdate SkipDesktopShortcut SkipStartService SkipbSQLServerCreateDB SkipSQLServerCreateDBUse
79. Browse to select a file to attach You can only select one file at a time and cannot select entire directories You are limited to 10 attachments per send After 10 attachments have been added the Browse button is unavailable 8 Inthe Message box text appears instructing the recipient to click the link in the email to set up an account You can edit this text as necessary The Message box allows up to 10240 characters You cannot use HTML tags to format the message 9 More options may be available depending on the administrator s settings and the type of account used to log in Select the Show message options check box if you want to specify the following message options specific to this email e Send Reply link When the Mail Express administrator has enabled this option recipients can click a link in the email to reply to your email with an attachment 180 Using Mail Express in a Web Browser e Notify me when files are picked up Select this check box to receive an email when the recipient downloads the files that you sent e Link expiration Select this check box if you want to specify an expiration that is more strict that what is defined on the server e Send Pick Up Page link only Select this check box if you want to send only a link to the Pick Up Page not links to the attachments e Require password for download Select this check box if you want the recipient to provide a password before being able to download th
80. CHA will reset o A message similar to the following appears if the send was successful File s Successfully Sent Thank you for using Mail Express Please see below for a summary of your transfer Send another package Receive a copy of this receipt via email Recipients km globalscape com Files eula 1028 txt 17 3 KB eula 1036 txt 17 3 KB eula 2052 txt 17 3 KB eula 1040 txt 17 3 KB eula 3082 txt 17 3 KB eula 1031 txt 17 3 KB eula 1041 txt 118 0 B eula 1033 txt 9 9 KB eula 1042 txt 17 3 KB Delivery Details Package Identifier QI Y6SZWE4IHWs_8MPFYj3Ilpk7p949MrVt1Ic o To send another package click Send o To receive a copy of the receipt in email click email The email is sent to the address specified in the From box of the email 176 Using Mail Express in a Web Browser Sending Files with the Internal Portal The Mail Express Internal Web Portal is provided for users to send files using Mail Express without Outlook For example if you are working remotely and do have access to Outlook or the Exchange Server The administrator account cannot send files using the Internal Web Portal when only verified users are allowed in that case you must create a separate user account Most browsers do not support transfers of files larger than 2 GB To send larger files use the Outlook Add In To send file using the Internal Web Portal 1 If you do not have an Internal user account refer t
81. CULAR PURPOSE See the LGPL for more details The Jasper Reports library may be found in the lib directory of the Software installation directory in the files named jasper jar jasper el jar and jasper jdt jar and is distributed under the terms of the GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE LGPL Jasper Reports is Copyright 2007 JasperSoft Corporation GlobalSCAPE hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library A copy of the LGPL may be found in the misc licenses directory in a file named jasperreports 3 7 2 LICENSE txt at http www gnu org licenses licenses html LGPL or by writing to the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA GlobalSCAPE will provide a complete machine readable copy of the source code for Jasper Reports library to any third party who contacts us at Attn LGPL Source Code Requests Global SCARE Inc 4500 Lockhill Selma Suite 150 San Antonio TX 78249 SPNEGO allows for HTTP based cross platform authentication SPNEGO is provided to you under the terms of the CDDL v1 0 open source license which is available at https spnego dev java net license html GlobalSCAPE will provide a complete machine readable copy of the source code for SPNEGO library to any third party who contacts us ae Attn LGPL Source Code Requests GlobalSCAPE Inc 4500 Lockhill Selma Suite 150 San Antoni
82. Change RequestAccount LostPassword e Custom template o Account self maintenance pages specialized by Account template customization o Login login page specialized by Portal type o Home portal disambiguation page o Portal landing page specialized by Portal type o Misc miscellaneous every other page specialized by Portal type o Default global catch all customizations e Files custompage template parameter location html_ language _ country ftl custompagelogin admin header html_en_US fl ee eA nals oe Data model e path String path to load image resources e parameter String specialization argument e template String type of customized template e format freemarker template TemplateMethodModel hook into the String format String Object method The default templates are for en_US e For details of country specific codes refer to the ISO 3166 code lists e For details of language specific codes refer to the Codes for the Representation of Names of Languages 127 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Example Suppose someone was trying to sign in to the administrator s portal Mail Express would look for a customized template to render in both the header and footer of that page For the header below is the order the files would be considered the footer is similarly processed Failing to find the first one Mail Express would look for the second one Failing that it would look for th
83. DMZ Gateway refer to the DMZ Gateway in application help or online help Before you can use DMZ Gateway with Mail Express Server you have to provide Mail Express with the DMZ Gateway connection information To configure the DMZ Gateway information 1 Inthe Mail Express left navigation pane or on the Mail Express Status page click DMZ Gateway The DMZ Gateway Configuration page appears DMZ Gateway Configuration I Enable the DMZ Gateway as a proxy 2 Select the Enable the DMZ Gateway as a proxy check box The page expands to display more options 109 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 DMZ Gateway Configuration M Enable the DMZ Gateway as a proxy DMZ Gateway address Server Port Client HTTPS Port Status Last updated December 8 2010 2 30 28 PM CST In the DMZ Gateway address box specify the hostname or IP address of the DMZ Gateway 4 Inthe Server Port box specify the port number used by DMZ Gateway 44500 by default In the Client HTTPS Port box specify the port on which DMZ Gateway listens for incoming client connections In the case of Mail Express client connections will typically include external recipients picking up files via the Pick Up portal and external users dripping off files via the Drop Off portal e While the DMZ Gateway supports use of client ports other than port 443 it is highly recommended to use the default HTTPS port of 443 as this is the industry standard for HTTPS communication
84. E DATABASE USER creates a database user e CHECK checks the version of the database to see if it is up to date e INIT initializes the database objects and default data e PROPS updates the current database settings for use by the Mail Express Server e DISPLAY displays the current database settings in use by the Mail Express Server e CONNECT tests connecting to a database e VALIDATE combines the VALIDATE_DATABASE and VALIDATE_DATABASE_USER actions e VALIDATE_DATABASE performs some minor validation of database settings e VALIDATE_DATABASE_USER performs some minor validation for the current database user Example executions for each of the actions supported by the database utility may be viewed in the command line help for each action Command Line Parameters for the Database Utility Command line parameters for the utility are described below Depending on the action performed only a subset of the parameters will be applicable e help o Description Display help on the command line Refer to the Help section above for additional information e logfile lt file gt o Description When specified logs the output of the execution to the specified file o Default Not set o Example logfile C DBUtil log e errorfile lt file gt o Description When specified logs terminal error messages to the specified file o Default Not set 62 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express o Example errorf
85. Format Text 2 Onthe Format tab click the format you want to use Plain Text or HTML 172 Using Mail Express in a Web Browser Changing the Message Format in Outlook 2007 and 2003 To change the default message format for all messages 1 On the Tools menu click Options and then click the Mail Format tab 2 Inthe Compose in this message format list click HTML or Plain Text To change the format of an individual message 1 With the message open click Options 2 On the Format tab click the format you want to use Plain Text or HTML Mail Profiles with Multiple Accounts Outlook 2003 and 2007 supports a maximum of one Exchange account per mail profile As such the Outlook Add In for these versions of Outlook supports a mail profile with a single Exchange account Other account types non Exchange are currently unsupported Outlook 2010 supports mail profiles with multiple Exchange accounts The Outlook Add In seamlessly works with this new feature and from a user standpoint there is no real difference in how the Add In is used Emails with attachments can be sent from any of the Exchange accounts in the profile and the Add In will manage the emails that meet the policy criteria as usual If an email is sent with the download notification feature turned on the notifications will be sent to the account that the email was sent from The Mail Express Status pane will show an aggregated view of all packages that are being mana
86. HITP meserver mepreauthuser setspn A HTTP meserver globalscape com mepreauthuser These SPNs should work regardless of the account the Mail Express Server Windows Service is running as If duplicate SPNs exist meaning multiple domain accounts with the same HTTP lt SPN gt then Kerberos will not work correctly Once the SPN has been associated with the Kerberos Pre Auth Account used by the Mail Express Server to participate in Kerberos Authentication you can double check for duplicate SPNs on the domain using the command setspn X To view the SPNs to verify that they were created successfully run the following command after substituting lt PreAuthUsername gt auth user account setspn 1 lt PreAuthUsername gt 4 Configure the Outlook Add In When the Outlook Add In is installed end users can choose between Windows or Manual Authentication If Windows Authentication is specified the Service Principal Name created earlier must be specified For instance if a Service Principal Name was created with the command setspn A HTTP meserver mepreauthuser then type HTTP meserver in the Service Principal Name field of the installation wizard Again ensure you use the prefix HTTP and not HTTP e If the Outlook Add In is installed silently then the SPN must be provided as an installation parameter The installation parameter name is SERVICEPRINCIPALNAME e If the Outlook Add In has already been installed us
87. Help topic 1 2 Click Print Topic in the Navigation pane or right click in the topic in the right pane then click Print The Print dialog box for your operating system appears In the Print dialog box click Print The topic is printed to the specified printer Sharing Topic Links In the online HTML help the address bar displays the IP address URL of the help file not the URL of the specific topic If you right click in the topic then click Properties you can copy the URL of the topic The URL displays only the topic without the table of contents which might be sufficient The procedure below describes how to send a topic s URL with the table of contents displayed To copy a topic URL that includes the table of contents Internet Explorer only 1 Open the topic in Internet Explorer 2 Right click within the topic the right frame then click Properties 188 Getting Help 3 Highlight the URL for the topic right click the selection click Copy and then close the Properties dialog box Properties xi Protocol HyperText Transfer Protocol Type HTML Document Connection Not Encrypted Address http help globalscape com help mailexpress Introd URL uctionToMailExpress htm Size 9824 bytes Created 6 22 2010 Modified 6 22 2010 Cancel Apply 4 Right click in the address bar of your browser click Paste and then press ENTER The topic displays but not the table of content
88. ION MAY NOT APPLY MOUs UNLESS APPLICABLE LAW PROVIDES OTHERWISE GLOBALSCAPE S LIABILITY FOR ANY CLAIM ATED LO YOUR PURCHASE Ob ANE ECE NSE HORSOR SUSE Or HE SOFTWARE AND RELATED SUPPORT RVICES WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY WILL NOT EXCEED THE EATER OF U S 5 00 OR THE FEES PAID BY YOU UNDER THIS AGREEMENT 0 D ve T O Ds es eal 10 fea Pea 5 les Gy SI DA a E ha iS gic e E 18 U S GOVERNMENT The Software is commercial computer software developed solely at privat xpense The rights of civilian and non civilian agencies of the U S Government to use disclose and reproduce the Software are governed by the terms of this Agreement Publisher is GlobalSCAPE Inc 4500 Lockhill Selma Road Suite 150 San Antonio Texas TIZas WISN 199 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 19 MISCELLANEOUS The laws of the State of Texas excluding its conflicts laws shall govern this Agreement the rights and obligations of the parties hereto th IME aie rel
89. IP Address User Event Type Severity 01 24 2011 11 03 36 AM 127 0 0 1 Mailexpress1 Informational 01 24 2011 10 51 51 AM 127 0 0 1 Mailexpress1 Informational 01 24 2011 10 35 57 AM 127 0 0 1 Mailexpress1 Informational 01 24 2011 10 12 56 AM 127 0 0 1 Mailexpress1 Informational 7 Click any column header that has an up down arrow to sort the data ascending or descending Viewing User History The User History report provides a history of user account modifications create edit delete within a particular date range You can filter the data from a particular date range by IP address or modifier username You can compare two entries to view details of what was changed For details of generating reports of activity configuration changes or events refer to Generating Reports of Mail Express Activity Viewing Configuration History and Viewing Audit Event History To view the database schema refer to Mail Express Database Tables To view user history 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server administration interface 2 Inthe Start date boxes specify the beginning date and time of the report range Reports default to a minimum start date of the Mail Express Server installation date Click the calendar icon to select a date from a popup calendar 3 Inthe End date boxes specify the end date and time of the report range Click the calendar icon to select a date from a popup calendar 4 Inthe Search By box leave it blank to search by all f
90. If a user is deleted in the AD user database the user is not deleted from the Mail Express internal user list You must delete the account manually on the Internal User Management page When you delete a user account the account is marked as deleted in the database but is no longer visible in the account table in the interface Audit reports can still look up and reference deleted accounts until they have been purged from the system Once a user account has been marked as deleted it is not eligible for purging after the appropriate age has been reached e You cannot create an internal account with the same username as an administrator account e Usernames must be unique across all user accounts Administrators must take care when manually creating Administrator or Internal User Accounts so that the username does not conflict with an Active Directory account If an account is manually created with the same username as an Active Directory user then that user will be unable to connect to the server with the Outlook Add In using Windows Kerberos Authentication To manage user accounts 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under User Management click Internal Users The Internal User Management page appears The account details are displayed in sortable scrollable columns Internal User Management Internal user accounts may be searched based on their email address username and display nam
91. In using the Mail Express Status pane If the Mail Express Add In is not connected to Mail Express Server it will not try to upload packages Depending on the Behavior when Mail Express Server is unavailable Message Option which can be enforced by the administrator the package is e saved to a queue until a connection to Mail Express Server is restored e the email is sent through Exchange without Mail Express managing the attachments or e aprompt is displayed when the connection to the Mail Express Server is lost and asks you to specify whether to wait for connectivity to Mail Express Server or to send the email immediately through Exchange If Mail Express is not managing the attachments Exchange can reject the email if the file size exceeds its file size limit In the Mail Express Configuration dialog box you can specify which Mail Express server to connect to how to authenticate your connection and where to save log files In most cases your Mail Express administrator will configure this for you To configure the Mail Express Outlook Add In 1 On the Mail Express toolbar ribbon click General Configuration The General Configuration dialog box appears Z General Configuration Mail Express x m Communications Configuration Mail Express Server Host Port focalhost 4430S Login type Windows Authentication Service principal name SERVICEPRINCIPALNAME Test Connection r Loggin
92. Installation Type of either New Upgrade or Modify Repair existing e New Upgrade tThe script will run on workstations that do not have the Outlook Add In already installed or the Add In is already installed on these workstations but a newer version of the Add In is being installed e Modify Repair tThe script will run on workstations that already have the Add In installed but the version of the Add In being installed has not changed This method is useful when you want to change some of the Add In s settings like SERVERHOST or LOGINTYPE on workstations that already have this version of the Add In installed 47 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Deployment The Outlook Add In installer is a MSI to help ease deployment to workstations The Add In installer will deploy all files and settings to user specific locations like HKCU and the user s Windows profile area so that the installer does not need to be run with administrative privileges This further eases the deployment for organizations that have users with less privileged accounts Thus the installer could be launched directly from a Windows logon script without any problem The installer msi can be run in various Ul modes No UI Basic Ul Reduced UI or Full UI The bootstrapper installers that install the Add In s prerequisites are not designed to be installed through a deployment tool and do not support installation in quiet silent mode They were intended to be run manua
93. MIICI JANBgkghkiG9w0BAQEFAAOCAg8AMI ICCgKCAgEAsSF vlOfZnssDsqFx IXCGHST1jiTHIGGHiiwc9Qb1INPDbyvcdNxvcfkdyYjd8V1LYyo3 jnj6xx3PxzJhG NmnBGJOI7h RFJaG7nmGfewUHCLsVjGfOeE jC d6zzE3unPOiLVIhv9abD6kISa hLd1ltOBcT1 9mgqglyG404XEx jeYmSYGFiDIdv WwwUssTyPdppaaWcs jNaFcmuopU RfmcfULPFwvFN6LsgvSTYwYe 918421 fA5ctWiR1lJomjGuJT OsITpzQRCenWi0S0 8WGJbVtRg k4Hgf2TGwxcw SS BEGIN CERTIFICATE MIIG4 jCCBMqgAwI BAgLJAJd jguYVnU08GMA0GCSqGS Ib 3DQEBBQUAMIGmMQswCQYD VOQOGEwWJVUzEOMAwGA1UECBMFVGV4YXMxFDASBgNVBAcTC1NhbiBBbnRvbm1lvMRow GAYDVOQOKEXFHbG9iYWxTQOFORSwgSW5 jLjJEUMBIGALUECXMLRW5naW512XJpbmcx FTATBgNVBAMTDG1pa2Utcm9vdC1 j YTEOMCYGCSqGS Ib3DQEJARY ZbWhhbWJpZGd1l QGdsb2JhbHNjYXB1LmNvbTAeFwOxMDEXMTgyMTES5SNDdaFw0xNTExMTcyMTE5NDda MIGmMQswCOYDVOQQGEWJVUzEOMAWGA1UECBMFVGV4YXMxFDASBgNVBAcTCINhbiBB bnRvbm1vMRowGAYDVOQQKEXFHbG9i YWxTQOFORSwgSW5 j Lj EUMBIGA1UECxMLRW5n aW51ZXJpbmcxF TATBgNVBAMTDG1pa2Ut cm9vdC1 Jj YTEOMCYGCSqGS Ib3DQEJARYZ bWhhbWJpZGd10Gdsb2JhbHNjYXB1LmNvbTCCAi IwDQYJKoZIhvcNAQEBBOADggIP How do I know that it is working Verify that the chain is functioning properly by navigating to the Mail Express Server using your preferred browser Prior to testing you will want to ensure you haven t previously permanently granted an exception for the server s SSL Certificate warning within the browser 137 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 You may optionally test from a computer known to have never visited the server before or you m
94. Mail Express Pages and Notifications To upgrade Mail Express Server 1 Onthe Internal Settings page in version 3 0 and 3 0 1 the page is called Add In Settings of the Mail Express Server s web administration site clear the Add In services enabled check box then click Save This will cause any Add Ins to gracefully use the Behavior when Mail Express Server is unavailable preference The Add In services enabled check box should only be re selected after both the Mail Express Server and the Add Ins have been upgraded The Mail Express Server and the Add Ins must have the same version number otherwise they may not be compatible with each other If the Add In detects that its version is incompatible with the Mail Express Server version the Add In will display a Version Mismatch General Status on the Mail Express Status task pane the Mail Express Attach File and Send Options buttons will be disabled and the Add In will be disabled until it is upgraded Users with disabled Add Ins can still send emails with Outlook but their emails will be ignored and not processed by the Add In 2 Execute the installer on the Mail Express Server computer The Welcome page appears Click Next The License Agreement appears 4 Click I agree The installer detects that an older version of Mail Express Server is installed 48 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express Z GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup lol xi Existing Installation Detected Choose
95. None o Example database MAILEXPRESS e application lt application name gt o Description The application name to present to the database for use when identifying connections o Default Mail Express Server o Example application ME Server A e auth lt authentication type gt o Description The type of authentication to use when connecting to the database SQL Server authentication and Windows authentication are supported o Valid values SQLSERVER SQL Server authentication WINDOWS Windows authentication o Default None 64 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express o Example auth SQLSERVER e user lt user gt o Description The login name to use when connecting to the database when auth is set to SQLSERVER o Default None o Example user medatabase e pass lt password gt o Description The password to use when connecting to the database when auth is set to SQLSERVER o Default None o Example pass 3qym9NCebHDu e newauth lt authentication type gt o Description The type of authentication to be used by the new database user account Specified when creating database users SQL Server authentication and Windows authentication are supported o Valid values SQLSERVER SQL Server authentication WINDOWS Windows authentication o Default None o Example newauth SQLSERVER e newuser lt new username gt o Description The username for the new database user acco
96. Pick Up Portal is https lt server URL gt pickup The Pick Up Portal must be enabled for recipients to download attachments You may want to disable the Pick Up Portal for things like troubleshooting security issues or maintenance You enable or disable the Pick Up portal on the Pick Up Portal Configuration page To enable the Pick Up Portal 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under Portal Settings click Pick up Settings The Pick up Portal Configuration page appears The URL for the Pick Up Portal appears under General Settings Pick Up Portal Settings General Settings M Portal enabled URL https localhost pickup 3 Click Save to save your changes or click Restore to reset the boxes to their previous setting If you navigate away from the page without clicking Save your changes are discarded 106 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server Enabling and Configuring the Reply Portal Mail Express allows users to send large email file attachments to recipients inside or outside of their organization The email may contain a link to the Reply Portal In the Reply Portal recipients can respond to the email to return files to the sender You must attach at least one file it is not used simply for an email response To configure the Reply Portal 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under Portal Setting
97. Portal Send Invites Send Files Email Send Invites From To Add CC Add BCC Subject You have been invited to create a Mail Express Drop Off account Attachments Attachments Message Please follow the enclosed link to set up an account for the Mail Express Drop Off Portal It will just take a few moments and then you can securely send me files any time you need Options T Show message options Delivery _Send To send invitations with the Internal portal 1 Do one of the following e Open a web browser and navigate to the web address of the Internal web portal e g https mymailexpress org internal e Open a web browser and navigate to the web address of the default landing page e g https mymailespress org If a welcome page appears and displays icons with which to connect to the Drop Off portal or Internal Portal click Internal Portal Log in The Send Files page appears The From box displays the sender s email address In the To box provide the recipient s email address Multiple email addresses can be separated by commas Any other delimiters such as semicolons will result in errors 5 Click Add CC and Add BCC to add courtesy copy or blind courtesy copy recipients 6 Inthe Subject box the text You have been invited to create a Mail Express Drop Off account appears You can change this text if necessary You are allowed up to 256 characters 7 Inthe Attachments area click
98. RED USING THE SOFTWARE AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY COST OR DAMAGE ARISING EITHER DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY FROM ANY LOSS OF DATA SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THESE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT ARRIM KO NOW Ax EJ EJ OUH E gt E AON WE ey es T D A OMETAO O TAB ING 5 COBRAT CARR ETSAN ONTA B TPE TORY OURE OR RAN ERON EE SEQUENTIAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF THE LIVERY PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR Ss OF PROFITS HOSS OF OR DAMAGE TO DATA GOODWILL WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER PATLURE OR LFUNCTION SECURITY BREACHES RESULTING IN DISCLOSURE OF CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OR ANY 14 OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES EVEN IF GLOBALSCAPE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY SUCH DAMAGES SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITAT
99. SERVER User Mail Express ExtendedRights ms xch S gt Accept Rut horitat ive Donmain erited Right sa Exc h SMTP Recept fhuthor er Mail Express ExtendedRight identity ADSERVER Client A DEV mail expre False False xc he SMI P Accept Any Sender The first command in the image above is Add ADPermission Client ADSERVER User Mail Express ExtendedRights ms Exch SMTP Accept Authoritative Domain Sender The second command is Add ADPermission Client ADSERVER User Mail Express ExtendedRights ms Exch SMTP Accept Any Sender The format of the commands shown in the image above is Add ADPermission SMTP_MODULE User S MAIL_EXPRESS_USER ExtendedRights REQUIRED_PERMISSION Where SMTP_MODULE is the name of the module S MATL_EXPRESS_USER is the account created for Mail Express REQUIRED_PERMISSION is one of the permissions ms Exch SMTP Accept Authoritative Domain Sender Of ms Exch SMTP Accept Any Sender Alternatively use ADSI Edit to graphically add the required permissions The ADSI Edit application can usually be found at SystemRoot system32 adsiedit msc Locate SMTP Receive Connectors which are under Configuration Services Microsoft Exchange Parts of the path will be specific to your installation o Right click the Client receive connector Client ADSERVER then click Propert
100. Software The Software and all derivatives thereof are protected by United States copyright patent and trademark law and rights granted by international treaties related to intellectual property rights The Software is copyright 2008 2010 GlobalSCAPE Inc All rights reserved You will keep confidential and refrain from disclosing any and all technical information know how and inventions disclosed by GlobalSCAPE in relation to this Agreement and the license granted hereunder except when after and to the extent that the information know how and inventions are generally known to the public 14 OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS The Software utilizes third party software from various sources Portions of this software are copyrighted by their respective owners as indicated in the copyright notices below Notwithstanding anything else contained herein the terms with respect to this software is as follows The JasperReports Engine is utilized to generate reports from the Software and is distributed with the Software This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License LGPL as published by the Free Software Foundation version 3 0 Notwithstanding anything else contained herein this library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTI
101. Stuff 2 At the top center of the page to the right of Search Homepage Content click Add by URL The Add by URL form appears 3 Inthe text box provide the URL of the RSS feed http kb globalscape com rssfeed aspx then click Add 4 In the upper left corner click Back to Homepage The GlobalSCAPE RSS feed appears on your home page GlobalSCAPE s Knowledge Base gt eles How does EFT apply wildcards and the MGET command to download files ASP Error Occurs with Send Mail Using ABE with Secure Server and EFT Server To add the RSS feed to Microsoft Outlook 2007 1 On the Tools menu click Account Settings 2 Onthe RSS Feeds tab click New 3 Inthe New RSS Feed dialog box type or paste the URL of the RSS Feed For example http kb globalscape com rssfeed aspx 4 Click Add Microsoft Office Online provides a tutorial on RSS feeds 5 Click OK Using the Knowledgebase The Knowledgebase provides various types of articles such as HOW TO FAQ ERRMSG FIX and so on Many of the articles are created as a result of assisting customers with their specific configuration and troubleshooting issues e The Resources link provides links to online help and PDFs e The Search link opens a search utility e The Tags link list all tags defined on all articles in the KB You can click a tag to view articles that have been tagged with that keyword If there is a keyword that you think should be added
102. The name of the database e Default MAILEXPRESS e Example DatabaseName MEDB1 AuthenticationType lt type gt e Description The type of authentication to use when connecting to the database in the installer The installer can use SQL Server authentication or Windows authentication When using Windows authentication the installer will attempt to connect to the database as the user account currently running the installer e Valid values e SQLSERVER The installer should use SQL Server authentication e WINDOWS The installer should use Windows authentication e Default SQLSERVER e Example AuthenticationType WINDOWS LoginName lt username gt e Description The login name to use when connecting to the database when AuthenticationT ype SQLSERVER 58 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express Default sa Example LoginName sa LoginPassword lt password gt Description The password to use when connecting to the database when AuthenticationT ype SQLSERVER Default None Example LoginPassword 3qym9NCebHDJ DBOAuthenticationType lt type gt Description The type of authentication that the Mail Express Server should use when connecting to the database Valid values e SQLSERVER The installer should use SQL Server authentication e WINDOWS The installer should use Windows authentication Default SQLSERVER Example DBOAuthenticationT ype WINDOWS DBOLoginName lt username gt
103. Untitled Message HTML o B z File Message Insert Options Format Text Review A 7 y X 24 a i Attach File Follow Up as D 8 l ae ores li Q B Z U lt t L attach Item gt High Importance Paste b EEE cael IsPe Address Check eae z Attach Send Include 7 Book Names g amp Signaturey Low Importance File Options Reply Link Clipboard Basic Text Names Include Tags Zoom Mail Express 163 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Connecting to Mail Express Server Typically the Mail Express Outlook Add In server connection information is configured by the Mail Express administrator You should not edit these settings unless directed to do so by your Mail Express administrator Reasons why you might want to edit the Mail Express settings are if your username password has changed if Mail Express Server is moved to another host if your login type was changed or if you need to change the log file location If a Client Access License CAL is not available a message appears in the Status pane a log entry is created and the system administrator is notified in the log of the license shortage You can still send email with Outlook but the email is not processed by the Mail Express Outlook Add In until a license is available You do not need to edit your configuration When the Add In does not have a license the Message buttons will be disabled with tooltips asking you to verify the status of the Add
104. Zz Status Bar Refresh J Date Older Standard Advanced Web Customize To view the Mail Express Add In s status click Display Status on the Mail Express toolbar General Configuration Message Options Help gt About Mail Express In Outlook 2010 the Add In uses a ribbon tab instead of a toolbar To display the ribbon tab click File gt Add Ins gt Display Mail Express User Interface 45 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Home Send Receive Folde E Save As Account oS Save Attachments VIHCrOSO dP Add Accot Open Print Help gto Account Eg Add Ins Settings Home Send Receive Folder View Mail Express s JA Help Guide CE gamy EE Knowledgebase General Message Configuration Options A About Mail Express Settings Status Help r The Mail Express Add In s status is useful for determining whether or not the Add In is connected to the Mail Express Server and includes information regarding attachments that are currently being managed by the Add In Silent Installation of the Outlook Add In The bootstrapper installers are not designed to be deployed through a deployment tool or in silent mode Each prerequisite that the bootstrapper installs can be downloaded from Microsoft s website and deployed installed silently The MailExpressOutlookAddinInstaller msi can be deployed installed silently Refer to Outlook Add In prerequ
105. a new module Click SMTP gt New gt SMTP Virtual Server then follow the prompts in the New SMTP Virtual Server wizard You can name it anything Restricted Relay is used in the example below 2 Right click the new module then click Properties The Properties dialog box appears Restricted Relay Properties ral xj Genaral Access Messager De very J Restricted Relay IP addesr a Lime number of commactions tor Connection time gut mines fo 3 On the General tab next to IP address click Advanced The Advanced dialog box appears 83 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Advanced 4 Click Add or Edit to add or change the port on which Mail Express communicates The actual port is not important as long as it is noted so that Mail Express can be configured to use the same port number 5 Click OK then click the Access tab Restricted Relay Properties Click Authentication Ensure that the Anonymous access check box is selected and the other check boxes are cleared then click OK 84 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server authentication 686 Select acceptable authentication methods for this resouce Aroeymous access No uset manne of patoword requeed I Besotve anonymous emai I fatic authentication password is sert in claar teod i Delak domar pasen I irtegated Windows Authentication The chent and server negotiate the Windows Securty Support
106. aa a aaa iiaa 41 Viewing the Mail Express Outlook Add In User Interface ccccccscceeeseeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeeaas 44 Silent Installation of the Outlook Add In cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaaeceeeeesaeeesaaeseeneeseeeesaeeseaeseeeeeseas 46 Installatiom ArQUuiment i aeara ra aE AE A AARSE AE ELTETE EE KESE ADIERA AASR E ESTARAN a CAA PAEAIGA bitin 47 Generating the Installation Seript ms ssiae isineun iar nanesie aiaa na aaa a na eaa taa aaa a aa aah 47 Deployment arii erii enaa aniei e TEE AEA EA EE AEE VORE cine EEEE KEETA ined 48 Upgrading Mail Express Servet ssssssssssssessnesssesssssssssssssrsssrsssresssessttsstrnstinstenstenstenntinsetnnotnnosnneennoenneon 48 Upgrading the Outlook Add In ssssossseeenesnnesensennsssnsssnsstnsstnsstesstenstesstenstenstnnstnnstnnstnnntnntennnennoenneenneenneenn 50 Finalizing the Upgrader ae e icin tide A R cea trany 51 Determining the Version of Mail Express Server ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeesaaeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeeeaeseeneeseaees 51 Registering Mail Express c c c acii indeed died dane ideale TAN EEN 51 Licensing the Outlook Add In c ccccceeeececeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeneeseeeeesaaeeeeaaeedeaeeseaeeeceaesesaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeseeaeseneeeeaes 53 Registering DMZ Gateway ccccccccceesseceeececeeeeecaeeeeaaeeeneeceaeeecaaesseaaesaeeeceaeeesaaesgeaeeseeeeesaesseaaesseneesenees 53 Installation Logging xsivscehieesechteretcehuetagitesehcabiers
107. afts folder You can then try resending the email perhaps after the administrator has had a chance to resolve the issue If the problem cannot be resolved in a timely fashion but you need to send the email promptly you can stop the Add In from managing emails by turning it off via the Outlook Trust Center or by clicking Mail Express use not required in the Message Options dialog box Then you will need to remove any attachments that were attached with the Mail Express Attach File button those attachments will have the mailexpress suffix and reattach them with Outlook s Attach File button Note that if you are sending an email with big attachments with the Mail Express Add In turned off the attachment may be blocked by the Exchange Server e To turn off the Outlook Add In refer to Turning On or Off the Outlook Add In e To edit Mail Express Message Options refer to Configuring Message Options Cancelling Packages It is possible to stop Mail Express from uploading an email s attachments or sending the email by moving the email out of the Outbox either by deleting it or by moving it into another folder such as the Drafts folder If the attachments of an email are currently being uploaded it may take up to ten seconds for the Add In to realize that you have moved the email out of the Outbox and for it to cancel the transfer It is also possible that while attachments are being uploaded for an email that you can open the email while it is in
108. age allows you to view and manage individual files that were sent e Enhanced package management allowing you to expire packages and view package details including download information invitation status and reply link usage e Invitation Activity report allows you to view when an invitation was sent to whom it was sent and so on e Specify initial administrator email address during installation e Create up to 25 000 accounts of each type of user Admin Internal and Drop Off Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express Installing Mail Express includes installing Mail Express Server and then installing the Mail Express Outlook Add In on users workstations These topics provide the system requirements installation procedures and activation instructions System Requirements and Prerequisites GlobalSCAPE Quality Assurance QA tested and approved Mail Express for use with the programs and hardware described below The minimum system requirements below are organized by Mail Express Server SQL Server 2008 R2 Express and Outlook Add In requirements The installer must be run by a user with administrative privileges on the computer The installer uninstaller will check for this at the beginning of execution While it is possible for the Mail Express Server and Add In to work on system configurations other than those listed below programs and hardware not listed below were not tested and are not supported Please review each of the re
109. ail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under Reports click Detailed Activity The Detailed Activity Report form appears Detailed Activity Report Date Range Start date 08 09 2010 E j2 oo AM gt End date 08710 2010 fiz j2 oo AM gt Options File type csv Filter By Filename gt T Exact Match Create Report Reset 3 Inthe Start date boxes specify the beginning date and time of the report range Reports default to a minimum start date of the Mail Express Server installation date Click the calendar icon to select a date from a popup calendar 4 Inthe End date boxes specify the end date and time of the report range Click the calendar icon to select a date from a popup calendar 12 00 00 AM is midnight of the previous day For example for a report of activity from June 1 through the end of the day on June 30 set the Start date to 06 01 2010 at 12 00 00 AM and the End date to 07 01 2010 at 12 00 00 AM 153 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 In the File type box specify the format in which to save or view the report csv html pdf or rtf Filter results by Filename Recipient or Sender or leave it blank to view all activity Click Create Report A File Download dialog box appears Click Open to view the report now or click Save to save it locally or in a network location e If the application necessary to view the report is not installed on the Mail
110. aintenance e Queue e mails until Mail Express Server is available e Send email via Outlook without Mail Express e Prompt me for desired behavior 6 Click OK to save your changes or click Cancel if you do not want to save your changes To configure Send Options for a specific email In each email that you send you can specify message options that pertain to that email only overriding the default send options specified by the Mail Express administrator You can make these settings stricter but not less strict For example if the server is configured to always use Mail Express you cannot set message options to not require Mail Express To set email options for all e mails refer to the procedure above 1 Create the email as you normally do 2 Inthe toolbar ribbon click Mail Express Send Options The Send Options dialog box appears 7 send Options HailExpress Send Options Manage embedded attachments IV Notify me when files are picked up J Send pick up page link only IV Link expiration 2 4 Week s z J Require password to download and upload files Password Confirm password L ox f cancet_ 3 Inthe Send Options dialog box you can specify the following options 167 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 e Manage embedded attachments Embedded attachments are files that are inserted into the body of the email rather than attached to the email such as a company logo in an email signature or a pict
111. allation does not function therefore the prerequisite must be manually installed e Download Page http www microsoft com downloads en details aspx e Direct Download Link o For 32 bit editions of Microsoft Windows OS http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 158917 o For 64 bit editions of Microsoft Windows OS http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 158918 Authentication Options for Connections to SQL Server 2008 R2 The Mail Express Server installer and the Mail Express Server support the SQL Server Authentication and Windows Authentication options for connecting to the SQL Server 2008 R2 instance e When using SQL Server Authentication both a username and a password must be provided e When using Windows Authentication the current user account for the process will be used when connecting o When the installer performs tasks that require connecting to the instance such as creating the database database user and database schema or when upgrading the schema it will use the credentials for the user account that launched the installer o When the Mail Express Server connects to the database it will use the credentials of the Log on account that is configured to run the Mail Express Server Windows service To specify the account that Mail Express Server service is to log on as 1 Click Start click in the Start Search box type the following text then press ENTER services msc 2 Inthe details pane right click the Mail Express
112. ape an actual or e To edit an account next to the account you want to edit click Edit then edit the account as necessary e To delete an account next to the account that you want to delete click Delete When an account is deleted it is marked deleted in the database and is no longer visible in the user management page however audit reports can look for and reference deleted accounts e Tocreate a new user a Click Add User The Drop Off User Details page appears Drop off User Details User Information Email Display name Password Confirm password Account Options M Enabled M Force password change M Send invitation email Restore Cancel Save b Inthe Email box provide the email address associated with the account This will be the username that the Drop Off user will use to log in 150 Auditing and Reporting Mail Express Activity c Optional In the Display name box provide the name for the account user The Display name appears in the From box with the sender s email address for example d Inthe Password and Confirm Password boxes provide a password for the account The password must be between 6 and 256 characters and adhere to at least 3 of the following requirements contain at least 1 number 1 upper case 1 lower case and 1 non alphanumeric character e The Enabled check box is selected by default To disable the account clear the check box f If you want th
113. arching for the following text protocol com globalscape protocolhandler DMZProtocolHandler 7 Restart Mail Express Server You should now be able to log in to the Mail Express administration interface and specify a proper SSL certificate key pair Refer to Mail Express Security for more information about SSL SSL Certificate Authority Certificate Chain Support This topic describes configuring an TLS SSL Certificate Authority Certificate Chain for use with the Mail Express Server s Web Server public certificate private key pair What is the Mail Express Server Public Certificate Private Key Pair In Mail Express 3 0 an administrator may configure the TLS SSL public certificate and private key pair via the General Configuration page of the Mail Express Server administration interface This key pair is required to provide TLS SSL communications when a client connects to the Mail Express Server s HTTPS port port 443 As part of the TLS SSL protocol the key pair is used to authenticate the Mail Express Server to the connecting client The client such as a browser performs a number of checks to ensure it is talking to the correct trusted server One of these checks compares the Common Name attribute of the Mail Express Server s public certificate to the hostname portion of the URL to which the browser is connecting If they do not match the browser will issue a warning to the user that the certificate doesn t match the serve
114. as the Mail Express Server Typically you will not run Outlook on the same computer as Mail Express Server however if you are testing using a local web browser it will not work This is a limitation of client s attempting to connect using NTLM when local to the server rather than using Kerberos The benefits of using Windows Authentication with Mail Express include e The Add In does not need to store any credentials for authenticating e Aside from ensuring that each user has a domain account an organization does not need to manually create and maintain additional credentials for each Mail Express user e The credentials are not passed between the Add In and the Mail Express Server Configuring the Add In and Internal Web Portal For details of the Add In and Internal portal refer to Overview of the Add In and Internal Web Portal For details of authentication of Outlook users refer to Authenticating Outlook Users To configure Internal Settings 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under Portal Settings click Internal Settings The Internal Settings page appears 101 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 General Settings V Add In services enabled V Internal Portal enabled Global Internal Settings V Link expiration Week s E Allow Internal Users to send account invitations E Register Internal Users as account invite enabled Include Mail Express Reply linkt 5 Neve
115. ase WITH PASSWORD Hv2rKQ8n2NVM DEFAULT_DATABASE MAILEXPRESS CHECK _EXPIRATION OFF CHECK _POLICY OFF USE MATLEXPRESS CREATE USER medatabase FOR LOGIN medatabase WITH DEFAULT_SCHEMA dbo USE MATLEXPRESS EXEC sp_addrolemember db_owner medatabase 22 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express Installing Mail Express Server This topic provides information about installing Mail Express Server For information about installing the Outlook Add In refer to Installing the Outlook Add In Before beginning installation please review the following important information Mail Express version 3 0 and later do not support upgrading from Mail Express v2 2 The installer will abort the installation if it finds Mail Express 2 2 installed You must uninstall Mail Express version 2 2 before continuing with installation of version 3 0 Separate installers are provided for 32 bit and 64 bit installations Please use the proper installer for your operating system e mail express windows x86 32 exe is the installer for use on 32 bit systems e mail express windows x86 64 exe is the installer for use on 64 bit systems You must run the installer with administrative privileges When the installer is executed it checks for permission and aborts the installation if you do not have the proper permission The installer installs Mail
116. ase tables 160 Using Mail Express in Outlook Using Mail Express in Outlook These topics describe using and configuring the Outlook Add In on the desktop For details of using Mail Express on the web refer to Using Mail Express in a Web Browser For details of configuring Mail Express administration refer to Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server For details of installing and configuring the Outlook Add In and system requirements refer to Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express Mail Express Outlook Add In Mail Express allows you to send and receive email file attachments to recipients inside and outside of your organization quickly reliably and securely while reducing the load on your mail server and without manually creating or maintaining FTP accounts Mail Express can send files as an Add In to Microsoft Outlook with secure authentication and auditing capabilities When you send an attachment the attachment is uploaded to Mail Express Server over HTTPS When Mail Express manages the email it uploads the attachments to the Mail Express Server removes the attachments from email and inserts a link that the recipient can click to download the attachments When the recipient clicks the hyperlink in the email notification a Web page appears that allows the recipient to download the attachment This process helps you to stay within your organization s mailbox quota since the email itself is normally quite small
117. atabaseType lt type gt e Description Specifies if the installer will install an internal database or use an external database e Valid values e INTERNAL specifies that the installer should install and use the internal SQL Server 2008 R2 Express database instance e EXTERNAL specifies that the installer should use an external pre existing database e Default EXTERNAL e Example DatabaseT ype INTERNAL 57 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 ExternalDatabaseMode lt modes gt e Description When DatabaseT ype EXTERNAL specifies if the installer should create a new external database and user or use an existing database and user e Valid values e CREATE specifies that the installer should create a new database and user e EXISTING specifies that the installer should use an existing database and user e Default CREATE e Example DatabaseMode EXISTING DatabaseServerName lt server gt e Description The database server host or IP address e Default The local computer name e Example DatabaseServerName jupiter DatabasePort lt port gt e Description The listener port for the database on the database server host e Default 1433 e Example DatabaseServerPort 55000 DatabaselnstanceName lt instance name gt e Description The database server instance name e Default MSSQLSERVER e Example DatabaselnstanceName SQLSRV_3 DatabaseName lt database name gt e Description
118. ate 04 08 2011 fz 3 Search By Sender x jo C Exact Match Include packages with V Account Invites V Reply Invites W Files Select all deselect all Expire selected packages Showing 1 to 20 of 103 lt lt lt 1 2 3 4 5 6 gt gt gt Package ID Expiration Sender Recipient s 04 15 2011 02 56 18 PM jo globalscape com pluggy lt jo globalscape com gt pluggy lt jo globalscape com gt pocketed jo globalscape com e To search for packages o Specify the date range to filter data in the Upload Time column 12 00 AM equals midnight of the previous day 113 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 o To search for data in a particular column provide the search criteria in the Search by box click the down arrow to specify which column to search Package Sender Recipients or Source then click Search For example to search for packages sent by a specify user in the Search by box click Sender then in the text box type the user s email address or name Wildcards are supported use to match a single character and to match 0 or more characters Leave the Search by box blank to include all packages within a date range o Select the Exact Match check box to control how the value in the Search box is used If the Exact Match check box is selected the column data must match the search value exactly o To clear the search and display all packages click Reset e To sort the table o Click the column heading by whi
119. ate chain should be contained in a single file and consist of the list of public certificates starting with the certificate of the CA that signed the web server s public certificate and range up to the final root trusted CA certificate the public certificate known to be in the browser s list of trusted certificate authorities Note that it isn t strictly necessary to include the final trusted certificate authority s public certificate in the chain However it is recommended to include this certificate when available for the sake of completeness Each certificate within the file should be in the PEM encoded format Each certificate should start with the text BEGIN CERTIFICATE and end with the text END CERTIFICATE An example of a certificate chain file s contents for a chain consisting of a single intermediate CA and the root CA is as follows truncated for space MI I1GzDCCBLSgAw1IBAgIBATANBgkqhk iG9w0BAQUFADCBp jELMAkGA1UEBhMCVVMx DjAMBgNVBAgTBVR1LeGF zMRQWEGYDVQQHEwt TYW4gQW50b2 5pbzEaMBgGA1UEChMR R2xVYmF SUONBUEUsIE1uYy4xFDASBgNVBASTC0VuZ21uZWVyaW5nMRUwEWwYDVOQQD Ewxt aWt LLXJvb3Qt Y2ExKDAmBgkqhkiG9w0BCQEWGW1oYW1iaWRnZUBnbG9i YWxz Y2FwZS5 jb2 0wHhcNMTAXMTE 4M jEyMzA4WhcNMTUXxMTE3M jEyMzA4W jCBmDELMAkG A1UEBhMCVVMxD j AMBgNVBAgTBVR1eGF zMRowGAYDVQQKEXFHbG9i YWxTQOFORSwg SW5 jLjJEUMBIGALUECXMLRW5naW51ZXJpbmcxHTAbBgNVBAMTFG1pa2Ut aW50ZXJt ZWRpYXR1LWNHMSgwJgYJKoZIhvcNAQkBFh1taGFt Ym1kZ2VAZ2xvYmF sc2NhcGUu Y29t
120. ationship between the parties hereto and all matters arising out of or relating to this Agreement You may bring any action under this Agreement for any cause whatsoever more than one 1 year after the occurrence giving rise to such cause of action GlobalSCAPE may seek injunctive relief in court to prevent imminent harm This Agreement is not governed by the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods You agree that this Agreement shall be fully performable in Bexar County Texas and submit to the non exclusive jurisdiction of and agree that venue is proper in state or federal courts in Bexar County Texas in any legal action or proceeding relating to this Agreement This Agreement constitutes the complete and exclusive agreement between us notwithstanding any provision in any purchase order or other written document except for i the definition of any evaluation period limited license term and fees and terms for maintenance or support services or additional software components that may appear on the applicable invoice or sales receipt as issued by GlobalSCAPE or in the absence of an invoice or sales receipt the GlobalSCAPE Website and ii the statement of the number of separate computers or concurrent users for which you have paid a license f as described in Section 2 above In the case of a conflict between this Agreement and the invoice or sales receipt and any fees set forth on the GlobalSCAPE Website the
121. ay clear the exceptions from the browser The exact details on clearing the exception is browser dependent but typically involves locating the list of trusted certificate authorities in the browser and checking if a certificate is present for the Mail Express Server s URL see below for the proper URL If present the certificate should be removed from the list When navigating to the Mail Express Server you must use the URL that corresponds to the Common Name attribute used in the server s public certificate For example if the server s public certificate Common Name is set to mailexpress example com you would navigate your browser to https mailexpress example com If the chain has been correctly configured and the root trusted CA certificate is known to the browser then the browser should navigate directly to the page If something is wrong then the browser will typically display an SSL Certificate warning page In Firefox such a warning would be similar to This Connection is Untrusted You have asked Firefox to connect securely to 127 0 0 1 but we can t confirm that your connection is secure Normally when you try to connect securely sites will present trusted identification to prove that you are going to the right place However this site s identity can t be verified What Should I Do If you usually connect to this site without problems this error could mean that someone is trying to impersonate the site and
122. browsers have a maximum file size limit of around 2 GB This limitation is typically due to how the content length attribute is stored and handled in the browser code in which they often use a data type whose size can only represent a number up to 2 147 483 648 bytes 2GB Internal testing has shown all supported browsers have a max file upload size within 5 KB of the 2 GB limit However the size of other metadata such as the file s name affects the browser s max upload Viewing Unicode Filenames Filenames of attachments managed by Mail Express Server appear on some of the pages in the administration interface and in reports If the computer on which you are launching the Web browser to configure Mail Express Server does not have the proper language packs installed filenames made up of Unicode characters will not display correctly The same is true if you send or pick up attachments on a computer that does not have the proper language packs installed To view Unicode characters you must have the correct fonts installed on the operating system Most modern browsers can use these fonts to display the Unicode characters On newer operating systems such as Vista and Windows 7 the fonts are preinstalled To install them on other computers you must install the East Asian Languages Pack On Windows 2003 you must have SP2 installed To install East Asian language support 1 Click Start gt Run type control then press ENTER The Control Pa
123. c key rather than their root certificate then provides you with the appropriate intermediate public certificates and often also their root certificate when sending back your signed public certificate The public certificates for the intermediate CAs often are not in the client application s list of trusted CAs Rather the client application will only know the root certificate for the commercial certificate authority However the client needs access to these public certificates so that it can verify the signature hierarchy of the server s key It needs these intermediate public keys so that it can walk the chain from the server s public certificate up to a trusted certificate authority The TLS SSL protocol provides a mechanism whereby the web server can provide the list of intermediate certificate authorities to the connecting client The client can then verify the signature chain up to a trusted certificate authority For this functionality to work in Mail Express Server you must properly configure the certificate chain When do I need to specify an SSL Certificate Authority Certificate Chain In theory you only need to specify a chain if the commercial CA signed the server s public certificate with an intermediate certificate that is not included in the industry standard set of trusted CA public keys shipped by default within the more popular browsers However there are many types and versions of browsers in use making it difficult to
124. cal drives and UNC style paths Mapped drives should be avoided because they only exist for the logon session of the current user As such they typically will not be available to the Mail Express Server when running as a Windows Service All D style parameters must come last when specified on the command line o Default None o Example Dme filesystem root jupiter FileStore MailExpress Modifying Mail Express Database Configuration If the external database information has changed for example you have installed SQL Server on a more powerful computer with a larger hard drive you will have to reconfigure Mail Express with the new information You can run the Mail Express Setup wizard installer on the Mail Express computer and provide the new database server host and so on The database login name specified below must have permission on the database to connect to the database server read data and write data To modify Mail Express database configuration 1 Execute the installer on the Mail Express Server computer The Welcome page appears 2 Click Next The License Agreement appears 3 Click I agree The installer detects that Mail Express Server is already installed ZJ GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup lol xj Existing Installation Detected Choose the maintenance operation to perform A GlobalSCAPE Mail Express is already installed Select the operation you want to perform Modify database configuration Reinstall Mail
125. can it on access unless it has been changed For example the first time a file is read by an application the AV application will scan it If it is subsequently read the AV applications will not rescan because the file has not changed One of the problems AV applications have with Mail Express is that it writes to the file many times during the transfer process AV applications see every write as a change which triggers a re scan Performance can be affected dramatically especially if the file has attributes that cause the AV applications to give it special attention Mail Express version 3 1 applies an extension to files that are in progress to provide a signal to AV applications to not scan them When Mail Express writes to a file it adds a gsb extension When Mail Express finishes transferring the file it removes the extension and then triggers the AV application by tweaking the first byte of the file Mail Express reads and then re writes the first byte Therefore the network administrator should add an exclusion to the AV application to skip files with a gsb extension The network administrator should also add an exclusion for temporary files uploaded from Mail Express s web portals For example if Mail Express were installed in C Program Files Globalscape Mail Express then the folder for temporary files is C Program Files Globalscape Mail Express temp Temporary upload files to this folder will have the pattern upload_ tmp wh
126. can more efficiently exchange files Invitations sent from the Add in can be sent with or without attachments Each recipient will receive their own private invitation link even when an invitation is sent to multiple addresses 104 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server After an external user creates an account via an invitation the user can access the Mail Express system to send files via the Drop Off portal and will be subject to all restrictions and limitations put on the portal by the Mail Express administrator The Mail Express administrator controls which Internal users have permission to send invitations to external users The administrator can allow or deny the permission globally to all Internal users via the Internal Settings page or only for specific Internal users via the user account details page The global setting overrides the individual setting that is if the global setting is disabled no one can send invitations even if the check box was selected for a specific account The Mail Express administrator can run an activity report to view which users have sent invitations and to whom they were sent Also when the global setting is enabled Outlook users can send invitations from Outlook If the recipient s email is already defined in Mail Express the invitation email provides a reminder link to the user s account Custom URLs for the Drop Off and Internal Portal Mail Express v3 1 incorporates a new optional
127. ceaeeeeaaeceeneesaeeecaaeedeneeseaeeesaeeseaaeseeeeeseas 72 Specifying the System Notification Email AGCreSS ccccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeneeseeeesaeeeeaeeeeeeeeaas 73 Configuring Active Directory Authentication cccceceeeceeseceeeeeceeeeeeeaeceeeeeceaeeecaaesseneeseeeescaeeseaeseeneeeaas 74 Configuring Mail Express for Windows Kerberos Authentication cceccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeeeaes 77 1 Configure Active Directory 0 ccccccecseeceseeceeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeceaeeeeaaesdaeecaaeeecaaeseeaaesgeeeeseaeeeeaaesseaeeeeeeeess 77 2 Configure KefbehOs is e settee at ariel el heat eet ete asl he ld atca ea aa he Heel ace 77 3 Configure the Service Principal NAMES ccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeesaaeeeeaeesceeeesaeseeaeeseneeeaas 77 4 Configure the Outlook Add In cecccecececeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeseceeeseaeeeseaeedeaeeseeeesaeeeeneeeeeeeeeaas 78 Configuring Mail Express for Microsoft Exchange Server COMMUNICATION cc ccceeesteeeseeteeeseeeeees 78 Configuring Anonymous Access to Exchange cccccceeeseeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeeeecaeeeceaeedeneeseaeeesaeeesaeseeeeeeaas 81 In Exchange 2007 and 2010 erie a A EA E AE AA A A 81 MExchange c00 nicte ae Mi epee a e eee od eg 83 Configuring Mail Express with the New Module cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeseeneesnaeeesaeeeeneeenaees 85 Configuring Authenticated Access to Exchange
128. cel Request account 4 Provide your Name Email address and reason for the request complete the CAPTCHA then click Request account An email is sent to the Mail Express administrator Sending Files Using the Drop Off Portal The Mail Express Drop Off Portal is provided for external non Outlook users to send files using Mail Express From this web page any individual who knows the URL of the page can attach files to an email to send to one or more recipients You can also log in to the Drop Off portal using your Internal user credentials If the administrator has configured the Drop Off page to allow only verified users you have to log in no anonymous access is allowed Internal users require the Drop Off access enabled permission to access to the Drop Off page Most browsers do not support transfers of files larger than 2 GB To send larger files use the Outlook Add In To send file using the Drop Off portal 1 Do one of the following e Open a web browser and navigate to the web address of the drop off page e g https mymailexpress org dropoff e Open a web browser and navigate to the web address of the default landing page e g https mymailespress org If a welcome page appears and displays icons with which to connect to the Drop Off portal or Internal Portal click Drop Off Portal 175 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 The Welcome page and email form appear The options that appear depend on the administrato
129. ch you want to sort e To view package details o Click an icon in the Detail column to view the package details The package details page displays information about the sender recipients attachments downloads and replies Sender Details Package Identifier 49Zr7K0b0ic721HD3X4dSZRPGQcRPBQCCggYRij Created 7 20 11 10 25 AM Expiration 8 3 11 10 25 AM Sender Karla lt krsh scape com gt Account Karla Origin Internal Portal Subject sending package Attachments 1 Reply Invitations Yes jo globalscape com Attachments Filename WindowsUpdate log Downloads Filename Recipient Date IP Address Notify Via DMZ User Agent 7 20 11 Mozilla 5 0 WindowsUpdate log lt jo globalscape com gt 10 34 AM 127 0 0 1 No No Package Replies Recipient For All Subject No records found e To expire packages o Select the check box next to the package s you want to expire then click Expire selected packages You can select all or clear all check boxes using the Select all deselect all check box 114 Configuring the DMZ Gateway Connection e Tomove to other pages of the table o Click the navigation controls that appear above the column headers when more than one page of results is available e g Showing 1 to 20 of 103 lt lt lt 123456 gt gt gt Viewing Mail Express Status The Windows Event Viewer displays significant events related to Mail Express such as server start server stop ERROR log message
130. cheapiacensty E EE AATE a ATRE 55 Debug Logging ceira eiai E ie es iA VOR E A ER 55 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Installation Command Line Parameters ccccccccceeseeceeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeecaeeesaaeeseaeeseeeesaeeesaeeeeneeseaees 56 Mail Express Server Database Utility 00 2 2 cccecceceeeeeeneeceeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeceaeeesaaeseneeeseaeeeseaeseeaaeseeeeeeaas 61 Command Line Parameters for the Database Utility cecccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeneaeeenaees 62 Modifying Mail Express Database Configuration cccccceceeceesneeeeeeeceneeeceaeeeeaaeseeneeseaeeesaeeesaaeseeneeeaas 66 Repairing the Mail Express Installation ce eeccceeeseneceeeenneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeseaeeeeeenaeeeeneaas 67 Wninstalling MailiExpress Servet ronan anaa aeaa a aaaea Eiaa aAa aa S aaaea aSa 68 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server cccccccssseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneees 69 Initial Configuration of Mail Express Server ccccceeeeeeececeeeeeceaeeeeaeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeseaeeseeeeesaeeesaeseeneeseaees 69 Logging in to Mail Express Servel ccsccceesceceeeceeeeeeeseeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeeeeceaeeeceaeseeaaeseeneeseaeeesaeseeaaeseeneesaas 70 Specifying the Mail Express Server Host Name 0 cccccccsceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeescaeeseaeeneaeeeeaes 71 Configuring the Default Landing Page ccscceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeceeeee
131. count type InviteSummary Represents an account invitation who sent sender EmailAddress who sent it what was it called and when it was sent the invitation title String subject line of the invitation createDate java util Date the date the invitation was sent 119 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Structure Description Propenes Cid EmailAddress Represents an RFC822 email address e g address String the address Joe Bloggs lt joe bloggs example com gt portion In the example Joe Bloggs is the personal name portion of the email address and joe bloggs example com is the address portion of the email address ascciQuotedPersonal String the personal name portion encoded as ASCII so that it is suitable for exchange with SMTP servers utfQuotedPersonal String the personal name portion quoted so that UTF characters are preserved if they exists in the name asciiText String the personal name and address portions together containing only ASCII so that it is mail safe personal String the personal name portion utfText String the personal name and address portions together with Unicode characters preserved FormatMethod A wrapper around the Example execution format s java lang String format String format S Hello world Object args method for execution within a template Server Email Templates Template Name Template Files Data Model Account accountactivationno
132. ctory are automatically backed up during reinstall or upgrade However if any of the html or property files beneath lt Installation Directory gt webapps ROOT classes directory have been modified these will not be backed up automatically Backup your customizations outside of the Mail Express installation directory If you have to reinstall Mail Express or install a new version your customizations will be overwritten in the Mail Express installation directory 117 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Mail Express uses the Freemarker Template Engine to handle processing the template files Refer to the Freemarker website for more information about editing Freemarker templates For example if you wanted to include a custom URL that recipients could click in the email that Mail Express sends to them so that they can access your custom Drop Off portal to return files you would edit the addinsendtemplate html ftl template to include the custom link lt p gt lt if packageLinkOnly gt lt a href packageLink gt Download lt if attachments size 1 gt attachment lt else gt attachments lt if gt lt a gt Please use this customized Mail Express lt a href https mesrv dropoff to sender utfText gt Drop Off lt a gt link to return any files to me lt else gt lt span style font size 1llpx gt lt i gt Additional download options are available at the lt a href packageLink gt Pick Up Portal lt a gt Please use
133. d Port appear If necessary click Add or Edit to add or change the port number that Mail Express is to use The actual port is not important as long as it is noted so that you can configure Mail Express to use the same port number Click the Permission Groups tab 81 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Restricted Relay Properties General Netwok Authentication Pemason Groups boxes 6 Secure the module by locking down the IP address that clients can use to connect On the Network tab under Receive mail from remote servers that have these IP addresses click Add or Edit to add or change the IP address that Mail Express Server is using With its IP address listed here Exchange is not acting as an open relay 82 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server 7 Optionally you can further secure the module by enabling encryption On the Authentication tab select the Transport Layer Security TLS check box then configure Mail Express to also use encryption to protect communication between Mail Express and Exchange Restricted Relay Properties xy Speciy which seourty mechanisms are avaladie for incoming commections I Transport Layer Seourty TLS I Enable Domain Securty Mutual Ath TLS M Gage i y T Exchange Server authentication I kjegated Windows autherscation I Etemally Secured for example wth IPsec Cox J oe a _ Hee In Exchange 2003 1 In the Exchange System Manager create
134. d its version is the same as the installer Required Parameters Optional Parameters e InstallerOperations REINSTALL S debug logfile lt file gt SkipPrereqCheck SkipDBUtilFirewallUpdate SkipDesktopShortcut SkipStartService Upgrade This option upgrades an existing installation of the Mail Express Server software and associated database This option is only applicable when an older version of the Mail Express Server is currently installed Required Parameters Optional Parameters e InstallerOperations UPGRADE IS debug logfile lt file gt AuthenticationType lt type gt LoginName lt username gt if AuthenticationType SQLSERVER LoginPassword lt username gt if AuthenticationType SQLSERVER SkipPrereqCheck SkipDBUtilFirewallUpdate SkipDesktopShortcut SkipStartService SkipSQLServerCreateSchema Uninstall This option removes an existing installation of the Mail Express Server software This option is only applicable when the Mail Express Server is already installed Required Parameters Optional Parameters e InstallerOperationsUNINSTALL e S e debug e logfile lt file gt e SkipSQLServerUninstall 35 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Modify the Database Configuration This option modifies the database settings currently in use by the Mail Express Server This path is only applicable when the Mail Express Server is already installed and its version is
135. d like to retain Mail Express data If the threshold is exceeded Mail Express will still function as long as there is sufficient disk storage available A disk full or space unavailable message indicates that the disk available to Mail Express no longer has any free space 6 Click Save to save your changes or click Restore to cancel changes If you navigate away from the page without clicking Save your changes are discarded 96 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server Configuring Database Purging and Notifications On the Database Configuration page you can manage the retention policy for all change and transaction logs that are created by Mail Express Server and configure database notifications regarding capacity The date and time of the purge is noted in the audit log as well as which files were purged The purge information includes a description that Automated purging successfully removed lt number gt log entries from database If you want to send notifications to one or more recipients you will first have to define the Exchange Server For details of the Mail Express database refer to Mail Express Database Tables To configure database purging and notification options 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under Configuration click Database The Database Configuration page appears Database Configuration Purge audit and transaction logs Pu
136. d the Add In services before upgrading the server This will allow the Add Ins to detect that the Mail Express Server is available Any Add Ins that were not upgraded will remain disabled with a Version Mismatch General Status on the Mail Express Status pane until they are upgraded Users with Add Ins in this state can still send emails with Outlook they just will not be processed by the Add In Refer to Deploying the Outlook Add In for details of how to deploy the Add In in general Determining the Version of Mail Express Server If you need to determine which version number of Mail Express Server is installed you can do so on the General Configuration page of the Mail Express Server administration portal The version is also displayed on the Mail Express Status page If the Mail Express Server is not running the version number can be viewed in the file lt Installation Directory gt Version txt To configure general settings 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under Configuration click General The General Settings page appears 3 The Software version area displays the installed version To go to the Mail Express Support Center Web page to see what the latest available version is click Check Version Registering Mail Express Register Mail Express using the web administration interface In the web administration interface you can view the current activation status of the product
137. d to remember the last username saved on the local computer for 30 days from time of login but the end user can enable or disable this option disabled by default A request account link is provided for un registered users to request access to the Internal Portal Unlike the Drop Off page used by external senders the Internal Portal does not have the same security restrictions such as CAPTCHA The Internal Portal can also be customized On the Internal Settings page you define the requirements for Internal Users use of the Mail Express Outlook Add In and the Internal Portal These settings are passed to each instance of the Add In being used Internal Users can configure Message Options to be more strict through the Add In but cannot make the settings less strict or set to a way that Mail Express is not used in situations in which the administrator expects Mail Express to be used This control allows the administrator to enforce a set of corporate usage standards Authenticating Outlook Users The Outlook Add In OAI communicates with the Mail Express Server The OAI can authenticate with the Mail Express Server using Manual Authentication Basic or Single Sign On using Kerberos Windows Authentication These methods are configured in the OAI user interface and the Mail Express Server administration interface For information about Kerberos refer to http technet microsoft com en us library bb742516 aspx Manual Authentication Wh
138. desktop personal computers for which you have paid a separate license f as indicated on your invoice or sales receipt for access and use solely by one person on such computer For example if you purchase a license to the Add In for 75 clients you can only install the Add In on 75 desktops and only 75 individuals in aggregate may access and use the Add In If you wish to increase the number of clients after your initial license purchase upon payment of the additional license fee you will be issued a new registration serial number which will be utilized to activate the additional Add In licenses purchased and to re activate the Add Ins previously purchased C STANDBY LICENSE If you have purchased a license to use the Server Program and or the Add In on a non production basis then you may use the Server Program and or Add In so licensed only as follows 195 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 i On a standby computer that is not processing inbound traffic or doing work of any kind except in the event that and only for so long as the primary production server upon which the Server Program license is associated is offline or ii On a server and associated desktop personal computers used solely for testing or evaluation that does not process actual inbound traffic D ACTIVATION You must activate the evaluation or standard license for the Software by entering the properly issued evaluation or registrat
139. displays the following information o Text based description of current status including information on what prevented package from being uploaded in error cases o Subject of the package o Recipients of the package o Total size of package o Number of upload retry attempts for package o Recover Email button for failures that were the result of an unrecoverable error Clicking Recover Email moves the email to the Outlook Drafts folder Recovering an Email from Unrecoverable Error The Add In will try to automatically recover from problems such as loss of connectivity with the Mail Express Server during a transfer If the Mail Express Add In experiences an Unrecoverable Error while managing a package the Recover Email button appears An unrecoverable error is a more serious error that the Add In cannot resolve on its own such as a File System error caused by the Mail Express Server running out of disk space These types of errors will usually require an administrator to resolve the issue Mail Express Status General Status Connected to Mail Express Server Transfer Status To Mark lt m globalscape com gt Subject Test Message 6 Size 1 41 MB Status Unrecoverable Error Fault Exception UploadAttempts 1 Recover Email what is this 171 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 If you click Recover Email the Mail Express Add In will move the email corresponding to the package from Outlook s Outbox to the Dr
140. dle Outlook 2010 installation on workstations running Microsoft Outlook 2010 ainiin Outlook Add in Installation Script Use the following options to create an end user workstation installation script for use with the Mail Express Outlook Add In Installer Installation type New Upgrade Modify Repair existing Internal Mail Express a oak 192 168 122 158 Internal Mail Express m o o server port 443 Login type Manual Single sign on Kerberos Service Principal C Name SPN Installation script 4 Download the applicable installation file s from the Outlook Add In Installer page using the Download links in the top section of the page or copy the installation files from the Mail Express Server installation directory by default C Program Files GlobalSCAPE Mail Express 38 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express o Mail Express Outlook Add In Installer Only If the prerequisites are not yet installed use one of the Prerequisite Installer bundles below instead of this installer Installs the Mail Express Outlook Add In on workstations running Microsoft Office 2003 2007 or 2010 when the prerequisite software has been pre installed This installer will simply install the Add In it will not install the prerequisite items that it requires This installer supports silent installation mode and does not require administrative privileges to install e Prerequisite Installer Bundle Outlook 2003 If
141. e may be used to match a single character and may be used to match 0 or more characters Search Reset Search criteria Add User Email Username Display Name Drop Off Account Invite bbkley nbc com Bbkly Bob v kmsh globalscape com Karla Karla lt s mW The table displays the Internal users sorted by email address A green check mark in a column indicates that the feature is enabled for the user a red X indicates that the feature is not enabled for the user 147 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 3 Do one of the following e To sort by a column click the column header except the Email column e To search for a user in the Search criteria box type the email address or display name that you want to search for then click Search Wildcards are supported matches 1 character matches 0 or more characters can be used to escape an actual or e To edit an account next to the account you want to edit click the Edit icon then edit the account as necessary The username password and email address for users that are created using AD cannot be edited in Mail Express e To delete an account next to the account that you want to delete click the Delete icon When an account is deleted it is marked as deleted in the database and is no longer visible in the Internal User Management page however audit reports can look for and reference deleted accounts e To create an account a Click Add User
142. e Reply Portal e Outlook Add In Install and configure the Outlook Add In e General Configuration o Specify the host domain name for the Mail Express Server o Specify the default landing page Drop Off Internal or user choice o Specify the system notification email address es to which Mail Express will send information such as file store or database status The email address supplied during installation is used by default o Register Mail Express o Specify the SSL certificate if used e Exchange Mail Server Specify the Microsoft Exchange Server that the Mail Express Server communicates with and the type of connection Also specify the From and Reply to addresses for notifications sent from Mail Express e DMZ Gateway Configure the DMZ Gateway connection if used 4 Configure Active Directory if used including mailbox monitoring for forwarding system messages Active Directory configuration status does not appear on the Mail Express Status page Add an internal user for testing configuration After you have enabled and configured each of the components the Mail Express Status page should have green flags and detailed status for those items that you have enabled configured That is if you do not plan to use DMZ Gateway its status will continue to be Disabled Verify that you can send an email with an attachment using the Outlook Add In and can use the portals that you have configured Logging in to Mail Expr
143. e build 8 0 50727 940 Prerequisites when using Office 2007 Microsoft Windows Installer 3 1 or Later Microsoft NET Framework v3 5 SP1 Microsoft Office 2007 Primary Interop Assemblies Microsoft Visual Studio Tools for the Microsoft Office System version 3 0 Runtime and Service Pack 1 Prerequisites when using Office 2010 Microsoft Windows Installer 3 1 or Later Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 SP1 Microsoft Office 2010 Primary Interop Assemblies Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Tools for Office Runtime Outlook Add In Prerequisite Resources The Outlook Add in prerequisites noted in the table above can be obtained from the links listed below Microsoft Windows Installer 3 1 or later e Installation of the Mail Express Outlook Add In and its other prerequisites requires Microsoft Windows Installer 3 1 or later As of this writing the current version of the Microsoft Windows Installer is 4 5 Information for both resources is included below e Microsoft Windows Installer 3 1 ie ie O Installer Name Windows Installer 3 1 Redistributable v2 Installer File Windowslnstaller KB893803 v2 x86 exe Download Page http www microsoft com downloads en details aspx FamilyID 889482fc 5f56 4a38 b838 de776fd4138c Direct Download Link http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 49256 e Microsoft Windows Installer 4 5 O O O Installer Name Windows Installer 4 5 Redistributable Installer File lt Operating System D
144. e 117 undeliverablenotification subject ftl 117 undeliverablenotification text ftl 0 ee 117 UNICONE 6 ezine tiated a el aaa tle 183 Uninstall eis e tea eee ae 68 UNINStAN GN isc eiteiteeeeetel a Mavieietaten 68 Uninstalling Mail Express Server s s s 68 Unrecoverable Error cccccccceesseeeeeenteeeeenaes 171 Upra ANG ia A a needa E 23 Upgrading Mail Express sssini 48 Upgrading the Outlook Add IN ccseeeeees 50 Upload ii nite Si ie AS ci eee 130 Upload Key cocer e e 130 Upload Limit i aon see deen E 183 Upload Time sss cise iets eee nde ele ceehe 151 WREatead sen ae ated 98 106 188 190 URL of Mail Express Servet 0 cseeeeeees 70 USEIMNAME sith raaa aioe 147 164 Userprofil s aeiae ren i tienes 37 169 US CRS ea a E E E 147 149 Using Anti Virus with Mail Express 0 142 Using Mail Express in Outlook 0 cceeee 161 Using the Knowledgebase eeceeeeees 191 V VESO eea a a a aa ae iai 71 Viewing and Managing Packages 0 113 Viewing Audit Event History eseese 156 Viewing Configuration History 0 cceee 154 Viewing Invite Activity 0 eeeeeeeeenteeeeeeaee 158 Viewing Mail Express Add In Status 170 Viewing Mail Express System Status and Logging ea aa aa a aa aea aiaa anidan ea ii a eas 115 Viewing Unicode Filenames censes 183 Viewing User History ssssseceeeseeseeeeereenn 157 VITUS aini naaa a eta aa aaeain daa 15
145. e Options dialog box to specify whether Mail Express should manage email attachments manage embedded attachments such as images notify you when files are picked up send attachment links or only a pickup page link expire links when to include reply links what to do when Mail Express Server is not available Internal senders can make these settings stricter but not less strict For example if the server is configured to always use Mail Express you cannot set message options to not require Mail Express However if link expiration is not configured on the server you can freely configure link expiration options in the Outlook Add In If link expiration was enabled on Mail Express server you can set the expiration to occur sooner but cannot set it to a longer expiration or turn off link expiration Other settings on this dialog behave similarly If a file is attached via the Mail Express Attach File button the email will be managed by Mail Express regardless of these policy settings It is assumed that since you are using the Mail Express button instead of the Outlook Attach File button you want to use Mail Express to manage the email You can configure message options for all e mails or for a specific email To configure message options for all e mails 1 On the Mail Express toolbar ribbon click Message Options The Message Options dialog box appears 165 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 J Message Options Mail Expr
146. e allows for customization of this attached html file krb5 conf ftl kerberosRealm String the upper case version of the Mainly for debugging purposes Allows Authentication Settings Domain name field configured customization of the Kerberos configuration file via the Mail Express Server Administration Portal used for Kerberos authentication Internal Settings page kdcHost String the hostname or IP Address of the Kerberos Key Distribution Center e g the Active Directory Server as configured in the Authentication Settings KDC host field of the Mail Express Server Administration Portal Internal Settings page kdcPort Integer the listener port of the Kerberos Key Distribution Center e g the Active Directory Server as configured in the Authentication Settings KDC port field of the Mail Express Server Administration Portal Internal Settings page domain String the Windows domain name managed by the Kerberos Key Distribution Center e g the Active Directory Server as configured in the Authentication Settings Domain name field of the Mail Express Server Administration Portal Internal Settings page 128 Mail Express Security and SSL Date Format You can specify the date and time format within the templates that use dates For example in the variable expiration datetime string long you would change long to short medium or full e short e g 11 20 10 12 45 PM e medium Nov 20 2010 e long Nov
147. e attachments The sender must provide the password to recipients in a separate email over the phone IM etc 12 Click Send e lf the To Subject or Message boxes are empty the send will fail e Amessage similar to the following example appears if the send was successful If invitations were sent the page also displays that information File s Successfully Sent Thank you for using Mail Express Please see below for a summary of your transfer Send another package Receive a copy of this receipt via email Recipients km globalscape com Files eula 1028 txt 17 3 KB eula 1036 txt 17 3 KB eula 2052 txt 17 3 KB eula 1040 txt 17 3 KB eula 3082 txt 17 3 KB eula 1031 txt 17 3 KB eula 1041 txt 118 0 B eula 1033 txt 9 9 KB eula 1042 txt 17 3 KB Delivery Details Package Identifier QI Y6SZWE4IHWs_8MPfYj3llpk7p9f9MrYt1lc e Tosend another package click Send e To receive a copy of the receipt in email click email The email is sent to the address specified in the From box of the email Picking Up Files When a Mail Express user sends an email with an attachment the attachment if managed by Mail Express is sent to the Mail Express Server and the recipient receives an email that contains the body of the original sent email plus a table of one or more hyperlinks from which the recipient can download the attachment The attachment s are not processed by the SMTP server nor sent to the recipient s
148. e available click Lost Serial Number to request that GlobalSCAPE email your serial number You must send the request using the email address provided when the serial number was purchased or the previous serial number was registered Serial numbers are version specific 4 Inthe Registered by box provide your name In the Personal Information area provide information that can be used by GlobalSCAPE Customer Support to search for your account information including lost serial number requests The personal information should be automatically completed if you have already registered Mail Express 6 Inthe Proxy Details area click the applicable option e Use system proxy settings The system proxy settings are obtained for the user account under which the Mail Express Server Windows service is running By default the Mail Express Server Windows service runs under the Local System account This account may not have the appropriate proxy settings configured You should run the Mail Express Server under a named account and ensure that the proxy settings have been properly configured for that account e No proxy No proxy is in use e Manually configure proxy Provide connection details in Proxy Configuration settings The proxy configuration with the exception of the authentication username and password is persisted in the database in the GeneralSettings table 7 Click Register Mail Express connects to the GlobalSCAPE registra
149. e for installation on workstations running Microsoft Outlook 2010 This bundle can be used to install the prerequisite items that the Add In requires plus the Add In Typically you will run the bootstrapper installer in this bundle which will install the Add In prerequisites and then afterwards it will run the Add In Installer to install the Add in 5 Inthe Outlook Add In Installation Script area a For the Installation type options specify whether the script is for a New Upgrade or to Modify Repair existing installation Use the New Upgrade option when installing the Add In for the first time or when installing a new version of the Add In for the first time i e an upgrade Use the Modify Repair existing option when reinstalling the same version of the Add In that is already on the computer either to repair it or to provide different values for the installation parameters i If you choose the wrong option the Add In may not install at all b Inthe Internal Mail Express server host box specify the Mail Express Server hostname as recognized by internal workstations This may be different from the setting on the General Configuration page which may be the host name of the fronting web server c Inthe Internal Mail Express server port box specify the port through which the Mail Express Server connects if different than the default It will default to 443 d For the Login type options specify Manual or Single sign on
150. e next one and so on If no custom header file is found Mail Express uses the default 1 custompagelogin admin header html_en_US ftl custompagelogin admin header html_en ftl custompagelogin admin header htm ftl custompagelogin header html_en_US ftl custompagelogin header html_en ftl custompagelogin header html ftl custompagedefault header html_en_US ftl Oo NOAR WD custompagedefault header html_en ftl 9 custompagedefault header htm ftl The same data model is used for any template that is found Administrators are free to choose any number of files at the appropriate level to meet their specific needs Footers are processed similarly to headers the only notable difference is that the footer s data model only contains specialization parameters of portal type Localization depends on the templates available and the language setting on the client computer Misc Templates Template Files Data Model sendattachmenttemplate htmI ftl e attachments list of attachments properties of interest The Package Recipient Notification emails that title String the document title are sent to recipients after a package is sent via length Double the document size either the Outlook Plug in or the Package unit String the document unit Kb MB etc Upload Portal will contain a small attached html he saat ag 9 crane N file By default this file will contain the list of links link String document access URL to download the files This templat
151. e that the Use Exchange authentication check box under Authentication Settings is not selected With this configuration the From address and Reply to address will only be used in messages generated by the Mail Express system and so can be set to whomever the administrator wants to monitor those messages Exchange Configuration Host Settings Host dev globalscape com Port 24 M Connect using SSL I Always trust certificates from Exchange server Trusted Certificate Authority CA Certificate version v3 Subject CN smtp gmail com O Google Inc L Mountain View sT California C uUS Signature Algorithm SHALwIithRSA OID 1 2 840 113549 1 1 5 Key Sun RSA public key 1024 bits modulus 9345710834174 517959174107497510743 107491751734 01734975971 034 71294 7190651907429167 9012 7412 07491274129074124308934 5710834174 517959174107497510743 107491751734 0173497 ha Upload X 509 a ar certificate _Browse Authentication Settings I Use Exchange authentication Username mail expre Password eceeee Confirm password eceece Mailbox Settings Mailbox monitoring for forwarding system messages T Monitor mailbox Mailbox Type IMAP4 Mailbox Port 143 Email Settings Email addresses used for notifications sent by Mail Express From address mail express dev globalscape com Reply to address mail express dev globalscape com Test Configuration Test email send Tea See also Testing Mail Express
152. e user to change the account password upon signing in select the Force password change check box selected by default Because the password is sent in clear text it is a good idea to force the user to change their password when they log in for the first time g If you want to send an email inviting the new user to use the Drop Off page select the Send invitation email check box If the Send invitation Email check box is selected an invitation email is sent to the user after you click Save The invitation email includes both the username and the password for signing in to the Drop Off page h Click Save to create the account or click Cancel if you do not want to create the account Click Restore to restore the settings in the boxes to their last saved state 4 After you click Save the user account appears on the Drop Off User Management page and an email invitation is sent to the new user For details of customizing the Drop Off user email invitation refer to Customizing Mail Express Pages and Notifications Auditing and Reporting Mail Express Activity Mail Express audits all transfer activities and all Mail Express configuration activities This section provides the procedures for generating reports of attachment activity configuration history audit event history invite activity and user history A detailed description of the database schema is also provided Generating Reports of Attachment Activity Mail Express provides a se
153. ect or clear the check boxes as needed e Create a desktop shortcut for the Administration Interface This check box is selected by default The shortcut allows you to connect to the administration interface in your default browser e Show version history This check box is cleared by default If you select the check box when you click Finish a text file of the version history appears in your default text reader typically Notepad e Start the Mail Express Server service This check box is selected by default If you do not want the service to start yet clear the check box You will not be able to open the administration interface if the service is stopped 32 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express The Mail Express Server service Log On Account is set to use the Local System account by default If you want to run the service under a true user account rather than the Local System account clear the Start the Mail Express Server service check box and change the Logon Account prior to starting the service e Start the Administration Interface This check box is selected by default If you have opted to start the Mail Express Server service this option will launch your default web browser and open the Mail Express Administration Portal 16 After you click Finish if you chose to start the administration interface the Welcome to Mail Express Administration page appears in your default web browser Refer to Initial Configurati
154. eeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeaaeseneeeeeas 116 Mail Express Server Event Viewer ccccccceceeeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeecaaeeeeaeeseaeeecaaeeesaaeseeeeescaeeesaeeesaaeeeneeeeaas 117 Customizing Mail Express Pages and Notifications c cccccsececeesseceeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeecaeeeseeaeeessenaeeeeseaas 117 Email Templates eee eran See ice det Lee ea eee Led 118 Common Template Data Structures ccccccccceeseeceeeeeceneeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeseaeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeseneeeeaas 118 Server Email Templates 0 cccsceceecceceeeceeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaesaaeeseeeeecaaeeseaaesgeceeseaeeesaaeseeaaesseneeeaes 120 Outlook Add In Email Templates cccccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeaaeseeeeeeaas 125 Web Portal Tempesta or e TEE A TRE EEE SAA EE a ETE 127 Mise Template Sioro taina a oe ee a A VOE VOEE EE AE ce ae 128 Replacing the Mail Express Logo with Your OWN ccccceceeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeaeeseeeeseaeessaeeeeeeeseaees 129 Mail Express Security and SSL ccccccsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseseseeeneeeeeeees 129 Configuring the Default HTTPS Listener Port 448 o oo eee eee eene eee eeee eter eter eseeeseeeetaeesaeeeeeenaeenaee 130 DOE IPIOLOCONS 3ectancatgee tera ETE E E A A E E trees tates stesed 130 SSL Algorithms EE A eee ek vet ei ene heed eee teenie Mah ea teed 131 SOL Certificates mrina i Ned en ee on Wn es ee I ed 131 Specifying an SSL
155. eeeeeeee cesses eeeeeeeeaeeeeaae cease ceaeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeess 177 Sending Invites with the Internal Portal cccceceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaee seats ceaeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeseaeeseneeess 179 PICKING UP FoS n EA a ets E A dain TT 181 Recovering a Lost PaSSWOMK ccccescccceceeecceeeeeeceeeeneeceeesaseceeeeaseaeaesaseaaaesaseceeesasaeaeesaeaeeeseseaeeeeneeaeeneaed 182 Maximum File Size for Browser Based Uploads cccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeecaaeeeeaeeseneeeseaeeesaeseeeeseeneess 183 Viewing Unicode Filenames ecccccccescccceeeeeceeeeneeceeeeneeceeeeneeceeesaeceeesneceeesnaeeeeesneeaecesnneaeeesneeaeeeenaes 183 Configuring the Web BrowSet ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeneeceaeeecaaesdeaaeseaeeeceaeeeeaaeseeneeseeeessaeseeeeeeeeeeees 184 Sending Files with the Reply Portal c ccccceceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeseaeeseeeeess 185 Using the Account Activation Portalera a S R A AA EA 186 Getting Help ea enen a nen ie een cei eee 187 Finding Information in the Help eesse ie E EE E E T E AAA E TAD 188 Searching the Help File or globalSCape COM ccccccceecceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeetaesteeeseneee 188 Printingra Help TOpic eners irie uate ie A De ete Au ten ate Nab eee lariat tants 188 Sharing Topic LINKS ni nannaa inde ei inn anaa aa ea aiaa 188 GlobalSCAPE Support Center cccccccesceceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeee
156. eeeees 171 Audit Details rnr aa 154 157 Audit Event History 0 cceceecseeceeeeeees 117 156 Audit Event Types eese 156 160 Auditing einate nn aiea 151 154 156 Auth User DN riian aa aa a eaaa 74 Auth User Password ceceeeeeteceeeeeeeeeeseeaeees 74 Authenticating Outlook Use rs cseeeeee 100 Authentication i aisia cemiieeca aie 74 Authentication Settings 0 ccceecceeseeeeeeeeeeeees 78 B Behav nadaa oneei ead ani aaae daie 165 DrOWS E iedo nanena dd daenna nindin paidia ainiaan 15 BUN eea cceenen an seedeceevvanaheehids baevar aus bidcceeereteass 37 C CAL 2s oa a eh ee 51 53 164 CAPTCHA 15 98 101 174 175 177 182 Certificate fle icccisdeecueessecedeeh certiardeeeeaededecteaedents 130 Changing the Message Format c0cccee 172 CHECK VOrSlON sensi aeccctdateedelacetidiuastnscandereaedactea 51 CESE na AA A E A 183 Client Access License cceeeeeeeeereees 51 53 GON EEE T E A E E A T E E tends 74 command line eee ceeceeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteteeeeees 33 COMDAT in eaaa N 154 157 Configuration 51 71 73 74 78 130 154 Configuration History eesseesseesseeseeeeesereeee nees 154 configure the Mail Express Outlook 164 Configuring Active Directory Authentication 74 Configuring Anonymous Access to Exchange 81 Configuring Authenticated Access to Exchange 87 Configuring Database Purging s
157. ees 154 Viewing Audit Event History sessir iat anA E E EEN E AA T RAAE O 156 Viewing User HISO sosea a e a a 157 Viewing Invite ACV aa s a a AAE A AE A a a SA 158 Audit Event TYPES risoria ai A N aN EA A A N A 160 Mail Express Database Tables arriere nE AAE EEEE ER EER A E AEE EEEE 160 Using Mail Express in Outlook oiisiecccccsics sted ccc sscecnees cage cixescecsecestacsiesascesnacdeecceeniesatecnanecsdeneevace 161 Mail Express Outlook Add INi erii ani aana ataa aa aaant aiaa raii aiiai 161 The Mail Express User Interface enisinia eene Aa AAEREN EAIA RARE KEAR 161 Emal Message Buttons sonken eA T E EA 163 Connecting to Mail Express Server cccccccceceeceeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeaae cease ceaeeseaaeeeeeeeseaeeesaesseeeseeeeess 164 Configuring Message Options aienatu tane esaa a aa aaa a aaaea Aaaa eaaa 165 Turning On or Off the Outlook Add In ccceccceeeeececeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeeeesaeeesaaeseeaaeseeeeseaeeesaeeneaeeseaees 168 Sending Files with the Mail Express Outlook Add In oo cece een eens eene seer eter eeeeeeeeeeeeeneesaeeeneeenaeenaee 169 Viewing Mail Express Add In Status cccceccceceeeeeeceeeeeseeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeaeeseeeescaeeesaeeseaeeseaees 170 Recovering an Email from Unrecoverable Error ccceeeeeseeeeeeeneceeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeene 171 Gancelling Packages dsaccai nihil aelieis a a a a ai den aie dade 172 Logging Mail Express Outlook Add In Activ
158. email client The links to the attachments are embedded in the email 181 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 The following attachments have been securely sent to you and can be downloaded until February 8 2011 3 05 59 PM CST KB2115168 log 19 1 KB KB950762 log 15 0 KB KB979309 log 22 0 KB Download all attachments The log files you requested are attached Please let me know if there is anything else you need Thanks Kimmie Powered by GlobalSCAPE Mail Express If you attempt to download files after they have expired an expired message appears on the Pick up page To pick up a file 1 Click the link in the email to open or save the attachment s e If the files are password protected a password entry page appears in your default web browser Provide the password then click Submit The Pick up Page appears Passwords are defined by the sender under Options in the Internal Portal 2 On the Pick Up page click the link next to the file that you want to view or download or click Download all files to download a zipped file that contains the file s 3 The download behavior depends on the browser you are using and your settings Click Open to view the file if the necessary program is installed or click Save to save the file If you choose Open the file is opened as read only Recovering a Lost Password If you have forgotten your password to log in to Mail Express you can request a password reset on the
159. ember 20 2010 e full Wednesday November 20 2010 Replacing the Mail Express Logo with Your Own The images subdirectory by default C Program Files GlobalSCAPE Mail Express webapps ROOT WEB INF template images contains the Mail Express logo and others You can brand Mail Express with your own graphics by overwriting the existing file HeaderBar header_logo png is the header image for all Mail Express pages To replace the Mail Express logo with your own 1 Make a copy of HeaderBar header_logo png and then paste it in the same directory It will be saved as Copy of HeaderBar header_logo png 2 Create copy edit your own logo making sure it has the same dimensions 310 x 32 pixels by cropping or resizing it or use the HeaderBar header_logo png as a template and paste create your logo on top of it in your graphic editor 3 Save the new logo in the image subdirectory named HeaderBar header_logo png overwriting the existing logo You will still have Copy of HeaderBar header_logo png if you decide to revert to the original Mail Express Server will display your new logo in place of the Mail Express logo 4 If you need to go back to the original logo just rename or delete your logo from the images directory then rename the original back to HeaderBar header_logo png It is not necessary to reboot the server to see your changes Mail Express Security and SSL The Mail Express Server provides security for email attachments with
160. en the manual authentication option is selected the user must supply a username and password in the OAI Manual authentication is useful in the following scenarios e Trial use of the software e User is not logged in to the domain e g using a laptop at the airport e Only asmall number of users will be using the system e A Kerberos infrastructure is not available e Active Directory is not available Manual authentication is performed between the OAI and the Mail Express Server using basic access authentication over HTTPS If the OAI functionality is enabled on the Mail Express Server i e the Add In enabled setting then the basic authentication option will be provided instead of the SSO functionality which may be independently disabled The user account will first be authenticated against the manually created internal user list If the user account cannot be authenticated against the internal user list the user will be authenticated against Active Directory if the Active Directory functionality is enabled 100 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server Single Sign On The Single Sign On SSO functionality depends on the Active Directory functionality being enabled and configured properly It will not function without it Single Sign On uses Kerberos to authenticate the OAI to the Mail Express Server without users having to provide credentials Single Sign On will not function for clients that are on the same machine
161. endencies During installation the installer will automatically create service dependencies for the Mail Express Server Windows service on Afd The Ancillary Function Driver for WinSock and Tcpip The TCP IP service These service dependencies are created to ensure the Mail Express Server is not started until the networking layer or the operating system is operational An installer wizard guides you through the installation process You will need to provide the following information Installation directory default Program Files GlobalSCAPE Mail Express File store directory default lt Installation_Directory gt MailExpressAttachments This directory will be used to store attachments frequently very large attachments Ensure this location can provide adequate disk storage for uploaded attachments 23 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 e Initial Mail Express administrator account username 1 128 characters and password 6 128 characters The password must contain at least three of the following types of characters uppercase letters lowercase letters numbers special characters e g This account will be used for the initial log in to the Mail Express Administration Portal and finalize the initial system configuration A e Do not use an Active Directory AD username as the Mail Express administrator account as this may cause later collisions between internal Mail Express accounts and AD accounts e Choose
162. ense in connection with the sale of all or substantially all of the assets for that line of business b you do not retain any copies of the Software full or partial including copies stored on a computer or other storage device c the person to whom you transfer the Software agrees to be bound by the terms of this license and d you provide notice to GlobalSCAPE at least 10 days prior to such transfer of the identity and contact information for the transferee and such transferee is not a competitor of GlobalSCAPE as determined by GlobalSCAPE in its sole discretion If you purchased the license for the Software on a multi computer basis that is one registration serial number valid for the number of computers indicated on your invoice you may permanently assign your rights under this license to only a single person or entity who receives all associated rights Notwithstanding anything else in this Agreement to the contrary an Evaluation License for the Software may be used only for testing demonstration or evaluation and may not be sold or transferred to another person in any manner Transfer in violation of this Agreement in whole or in part will be void ab initio 6 INFORMATION COLLECTION AND PRIVACY The Software includes a feature that assigns a unique identifier to your computer based on system information The Software reports this identifier to GlobalSCAPE when you install the Software or enter your registration serial n
163. ependent gt Download Page http www microsoft com downloads en details aspx FamilylD 5a58b56f 60b6 4412 95b9 54d056d6f9f4 amp displaylang en Microsoft NET Framework v3 5 SP1 e Installer Name Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 Service Pack 1 e Installer File dotnetfx35setup exe e Download Page http www microsoft com downloads en details aspx Familyld AB99342F 5D1A 413D 8319 81DA479AB0D7 amp displaylang en e Direct Download Link http go microsoft com fwlink linkid 1 18076 Note Installation may require reboot Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express Microsoft Office 2003 Primary Interop Assemblies e Installer Name Office 2003 Update Redistributable Primary Interop Assemblies e Installer File O2003PIA MSI e Download Page http Awww microsoft com downloads en details aspx familyid 3C9A983A AC14 4125 8BA0 D36D67E0F4AD amp displaylang en Note The download file is named O2003PIA EXE The O2003PIA MSI installer file will be extracted from this executable when run Microsoft Office 2007 Primary Interop Assemblies e Installer Name 2007 Microsoft Office System Update Redistributable Primary Interop Assemblies e Installer File o2007PIA msi e Download Page http www microsoft com downloads en details aspx FamilyID 59daebaa bed4 4282 a28c b864d8bfa5138 amp DisplayLang en Note The download file is named PrimarylnteropAssembly exe The o2007PIA msi installer file will be extracted from this executable when
164. er Active 50 Fri January 7 2011 at 5 47 00 PM CST Trial Register Active Fri January 7 2011 at 5 47 00 PM CST The Registration page appears Mail Express Registration Registration Details Serial number Lost Serial Number Registered by Personal Information Any information provided will be used only for account verification locating lost serial numbers and similar account activities Email address Company name Street address City State province Postal zip code Country United States Proxy Details C Use system proxy settings C No proxy ej Proxy Configuration HTTP Proxy Address Port I Use Authentication Username Password Confirm password 4 Inthe Serial number box provide the serial number from your invoice If you do not have your invoice available click Lost Serial Number to request that GlobalSCAPE email your serial number You must send the request using the email address provided when the serial number was purchased or the previous serial number was registered Serial numbers are version specific 5 Inthe Registered by box provide your name 52 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express 6 Inthe Personal Information area provide information that can be used by GlobalSCAPE Customer Support to search for your account information including lost serial number requests 7 Inthe Proxy Details area click the applicable option e Use system proxy settings
165. er computer you can still save the report in the format you want and then open it on another computer on which the application is installed For example you could save the report as a PDF then email it or transport it to a computer on which Adobe Reader is installed Detailed Activity Report The Detailed Activity report provides a report of all packages by Package ID File s Sender Recipient and Upload Time Up to 10 attachments can be in one package sent using the Drop Off Portal The reports are displayed in order from newest to oldest activity Detailed Activity Jul 1 2010 00 00 To Jan 31 2011 00 00 Outlook Add In Package ID File s Sender Upload Time AzOQoafhBhzVGSOPdf1Xd_YXIoMH It9gValoX78 image002 gif Jo Oen lt joen escape com gt Dec 6 2010 14 02 Recipient s An Fer lt afer escape com gt Jo Oen lt joen escape com gt AzOQoafhBhzVGSOPdf1Xd_YXIoMH It9gValoX78 image001 jpg Jo Oen lt joen escape com gt Dec 6 2010 14 02 Recipient s An Fer lt afer escape com gt Jo Oen lt joen escape com gt AaK4rX7NTB4hNKRBOcUN1qR_Ps8GUUHk nP3Ax9d image001 gif Jo Oen lt joen escape com gt Dec 3 2010 14 55 Recipient s Joard Freer lt jfreer escape com gt Jan Word lt jw escape com gt Jo Cn lt joen escape com gt Cork Mabum lt Cmabum escape com gt Midge Hamike lt mhamike escape com gt Tron Minnon lt tminnon escape com gt To generate a Detailed Activity report 1 Log in to the M
166. er will be prompted to choose the Internal Portal or the Drop Off Portal If you enable DMZ Gateway you must configure the Pick Up portal and Drop Off page so that the URLs go through DMZ Gateway You can either change the Hostname in the General Configuration page or route the URL properly in the network 4 Click Save to save your changes or click Restore to reset the boxes to their previous setting If you navigate away from the page without clicking Save your changes are discarded Configuring the Default Landing Page In version 3 1 and later of Mail Express you can specify whether the default landing page https lt hostname gt is the Internal portal the Drop Off portal or user choice which allows the user to choose which portal to use The portals must be enabled before you can select them on this page To configure the default landing page 1 Inthe left navigation pane under Configuration click General The General Configuration page appears General Settings Software version 3 2 0 build 1 Check version Hostname HTTPS kmarsh globalscape com System notification email address es Default landing page Internal portal Drop Off portal User choice TThe user will be prompted to choose the Internal Portal or the Drop Off Portal 2 Under General Settings specify the default landing page e Internal portal The Internal Web portal allows non Outlook internal users to access Mail Expr
167. ere is a unique identifier this folder is generally used by all components of Mail Express when a temporary file is created These files will still be scanned by AV applications but only after they have arrived at the Mail Express data folder For larger files uploaded from the drop off page they will be temporarily staged in the tmpdir without this exclusion the AV application will delete the file from the tmpdir and the upload will fail with an error message which will be routed back to the client s browser 142 Mail Express Security and SSL The DMZ Protocol Handler This topic provides SSL related information pertaining to the HTTPS communications with the Mail Express Server conducted via the DMZ Gateway The DMZ Gateway Protocol Handler uses Java based SSL and as such is configured separately from the default HTTPS listener on port 443 The DMZ Protocol Handler is configured within a Connector element in the lt Installation Directory gt conf server xml file The appropriate Connector element can be located in the file by searching for the text protocol com globalscape protocolhandler DMZProtocolHandler The supported SSL algorithms have been configured for strong security by default SSL Protocols To maintain a wider range of compatibility with end user browsers the Server will allow a client to initially connect using all supported SSL Protocols However the list of allowed SSL Algorithms is limited to a set of
168. erver service The SPN will be associated with the Active Directory domain account used in the KDC pre auth username field of the Mail Express Server Kerberos Configuration The setspn utility is typically installed by default on Active Directory server computers The command must be run using an account with Active Directory administration rights Typically it is easiest to perform these steps on the domain s primary Active Directory server To create the SPNs execute the following at a command prompt setspn A HTTP lt MailExpressServerHostName gt lt PreAuthUsername gt setspn A HTTP lt MailExpressServerFullyQualifiedHostName gt lt PreAuthUsername gt Where 77 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 e lt MailExpressServerHostName gt is the host name of the machine running the Mail Express Server This is the host name that workstations would use internally to communicate with the Mail Express Server machine e lt MailExpressServerFullyQualifiedHostNames is the fully qualified host name of the machine running the Mail Express Server This is the full host name that workstations would use internally to communicate with the Mail Express Server machine e lt PreAuthUsername gt with the username of Active Directory domain account used in the KDC pre auth username field of the Mail Express Server Kerberos Configuration Do not type HTTP the proper prefix is HTTP For example type setspn A
169. ervice Dependency When the internal evaluation database is used the Mail Express Server installer will automatically create an additional service dependency for the Mail Express Server Windows service on the SQL Server Database instance Windows Service SQL Server MAILEXPRESS 21 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 External SQL Server 2008 R2 Instance The installer allows you to configure the Mail Express Server to use a pre existing external SQL Server 2008 R2 Instance You can instruct the installer to either create a new database and user on an existing external instance or to use an existing database and database user In this case the installer will simple create the necessary database object and default data within the existing database This option is provided for users that prefer more manual control over the database creation Required Settings For proper operation the Mail Express Server requires the following attributes of the instance database and database user account used by the Mail Express Server e The TCP IP Protocol must be enabled for connections to the SQL Server instance e The database must use a case sensitive collation e The database ALLOW_SNAPSHOT_ISOLATION setting must be ON e The database READ COMMITTED SNAPSHOT setting must be ON e The database user s default schema should be set to dbo e By default the database user s Database role membership will be set to dbowner however because t
170. es recipients list of recipient EmailAddress es restricted list of restricted recipient EmailAddressles links are removed from notification email recipientAddressSize Integer number of characters in the longest recipient email address recipientPersonalSize Integer number of characters in the longest recipient personal name recipientUtfTextSize Integer attachments list of Attachment s attachmentLengthSize Integer number of characters in the longest attachment length and unit attachmenttTitleSize Integer number of characters in the longest attachment title attachmentLinkSize Integer number of characters in the longest attachment link 123 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Template Name Template Files Data Model Package Upload URL The email sent via the Administration portal s General Settings page Used to notify recipients of the Mail Express Server s Package Upload Page URL Password Changed The email sent to users whose password has been changed via the change password link in the web portal Refer to Account Password Reset for more information Store Quota Notification The email sent to admin users when the file store quota or database size quota has been reached Test Email The test email send when using the test functionality on the Administration portal s SMTP configuration page senddropoffurlinvitation htmI ftl senddropoffurlinvita
171. es the attachments from the email and inserts links into the email from which the recipient s can download the attachment s This process has the added benefit of end users not exceeding their email server s mailbox quota or attachment size limits since the resulting email itself is normally quite small The Mail Express workflow 1 The Outlook user creates an email with attachments and clicks Send 2 Mail Express e Inserts links in the email in place of the attachments e Stores the attachments on the Mail Express Server e Sends the email 3 The recipient opens the email 4 The recipient clicks the links to download the attachments from the Mail Express Server Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Mail Express Architecture The Mail Express ME application is composed of the following components Server Applications The Server applications of Mail Express are the brains of the system Using settings and configuration defined by the Mail Express administrator web server applications transfer store and manage all of the files processed by the system A database application stores and provides data regarding all of the file transfers that pass through the system and the configuration changes that are requested by the administrator Administration Portal As with any enterprise level software Mail Express provides an interface that allows the owner of the application access to system configuration and management sender
172. esaaeeeeaaeseeeeeceaeeeseaeeeeseeseeeeseaeeeeeeseneeess 190 Using the Knowledgebase rapidira arin anar ein AAK Hier ARAKEA Tin R kadanda ida Ar EAEN a E SEARRE AAEE Eora Riaki deia fiia 191 Using Advanced Searen itrio a aran a a anaa a Arae aa aa E a eaa TN REEE ea dees AR aE lease 193 Mail Express End User License Agreement EULA eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 195 PYRO aes diszecs nec bcaieandasredicecsuctead caved seeds ce sesteesvataedeszedeaet vs eane svecuaetsyasnrgsstedsaetivassteste aresenesowevhene 201 vii Mail Express User Guide v3 2 viii Introduction to Mail Express Mail Express allows you to send large email file attachments to recipients inside or outside of your organization quickly reliably and securely while reducing the load on your mail server Mail Express also allows your recipients to send large email file attachments to you through a Web portal You can send files using a Microsoft Outlook Add In a Web portal or both using secure authentication and auditing capabilities The Mail Express system will offload file attachments to an independent server and can notify recipients that the files are available for pickup You can configure the authentication scheme to change the way recipients authenticate against Mail Express Server to download their files One authentication scheme allows users to access their files without providing any credentials the other requires the recipie
173. ess e Drop Off portal Available to internal users external users or anonymous users e User choice A page appears on which the user clicks an icon to select either the Drop Off Portal or the Internal Portal for that session 72 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server Welcome to Mail Express 4 P Internal Porta 3 Click Save to save the settings Specifying the System Notification Email Address The Mail Express Server system notification email address is defined during initial configuration This is the email address is used to send notifications regarding file storage status and database purging operations If you need to change or add email addresses you can do so on the Mail Express Server Configuration page of the Mail Express Server administration portal To configure general settings 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under Configuration click General The General Configuration page appears General Settings Software version 3 2 0 build 1 Check version Hostname HTTPS kmarsh globalscape com System notification email address es Default landing page Internal portal Drop Off portal User choice TThe user will be prompted to choose the Internal Portal or the Drop Off Portal 3 Inthe System notification email address es box provide at least one email address of a Mail Express administrator contact You can p
174. ess x m Require Mail Express to Manage Attachments Always use Mail Express Mail Express use not required Use Mail Express based on following policy Total file size 5 fue z Number of attachments fo Sj F Filetype Add m Default Send Options Manage embedded attachments IV Notify me when files are picked up Send pick up page link only IV Link expiration 2 Week s x m Default Reply Options C Always include reply link Include reply link when attachments are managed Do not include reply link M Behavior when Mail Express Server is Unavailable Queue emails until Mail Express Server is available Send emails via Outlook without Mail Express Prompt me for desired behavior Lok cea In the Require Mail Express to Manage Attachments area specify whether to use Mail Express to manage attachments The availability of the options depends on the Mail Express Server configuration in the Administration portal e Always use Mail Express Use Mail Express to manage all email attachments e Mail Express use not required Do not use Mail Express to manage email attachments unless at least one was attached using the Mail Express Attach File button e Use Mail Express based on following policy Specify criteria that determine whether Mail Express should manage email attachments o Total file size To manage attachments only if the total file size of
175. ess Server Mail Express administrators can log in to Mail Express Server on the log in page e g https lt hostname gt admin When you log in to the administration page your credentials are validated against the list of administrators stored in the Mail Express database To log in to the Mail Express Server 1 Click the shortcut on Mail Express Server or type the URL of Mail Express Server in your web browser The Mail Express Server Log in page appears 70 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server Welcome to the Mail Express Administration Login Page Username Password Remember me Sign in Reset 2 Inthe Username box provide the username you created when you installed Mail Express Server The username is case sensitive 3 Inthe Password box provide the password you created when you installed Mail Express Server The password is case sensitive If you have forgotten your password click the Lost Password link and follow the prompts After you click Continue your account password will be reset and a new random password with Change password at next log in enabled will be emailed to you If you click Cancel your password is not reset Password reset actions are logged to the database Be sure to verify your account s email address during configuration so that if you lose your password Mail Express can email the reset to you 4 If you want Mail Express to remember your user
176. ess User Guide v3 2 e f an encrypted private key is specified it must be in traditional PEM encoded format PKCS 8 formatted encrypted private keys are not currently supported e Both RSA and DSA key types are supported e For information on more advanced certificate handling options such as specifying revocation lists refer to o Apache Tomcat 6 0 APR Native HTTPS Configuration http tomcat apache org tomcat 6 0 doc apr html HTTPS o Apache Web Server mod_ssl documentation http httpd apache org docs 2 2 mod mod_ssl htm e The default public certificate file is MailExpress crt o The default public certificate is an X 509 PEM encoded 2048 bit RSA certificate with a SHA1 digest e The default private key file is MailExpress key o The default private key is a PEM encoded 3DES encrypted 2048 bit RSA private key When you upload your own certificate key pair those files are overwritten however copies of the default files are saved as MailExpressDefault crt and MailExpressDefault key in case you need to go back to the defaults Specifying an SSL Certificate A self signed certificate contains a public key information about the owner of the certificate and the owner s signature It has an associated private key but it does not verify the origin of the certificate through a third party certificate authority To achieve the highest level of authentication between critical software components do not use self signed certi
177. ess and host name and is authenticated to the server Each time the Add In connects the server provides it with a new lease Once connected the Add In periodically refreshes its lease After one hour of inactivity or when Outlook is closed the lease is freed so that another Add In can use it If Outlook is exits ungracefully e g crashes or is forcibly terminated or if the computer loses its connection to the network the lease remains unavailable until it expires If a CAL is not available a message informs you that a license is unavailable and a log entry is created You can still send email with Outlook but the email is not processed by the Mail Express Outlook Add In until a license is available Registering DMZ Gateway DMZ Gateway is licensed as a module separate from Mail Express A 30 day trial is available starting on the first day the service is started When the trial expires a warning message is written to the Windows Event Viewer and connections attempted via the DMZ Gateway are not accepted The DMZ Gateway licensing status appears on the General Configuration page If you have licensed DMZ Gateway for use with EFT Server you will need a multi Site license to also use it with Mail Express The Mail Express Server is considered one of those multiple Sites for licensing purposes You will still need to register DMZ Gateway in the Mail Express Administration portal For details of installing and configuring DMZ Gateway
178. ficates or use them selectively The files associated with an SSL certificate key pair are Private key file key The private key should never be distributed to anyone It is used to decrypt the session which is encrypted by the public key A message encrypted with a recipient s public key cannot be decrypted by anyone except the recipient possessing the corresponding private key Certificate file crt This is a signed certificate whether self signed or signed by an intermediate certificate authority You can specify an SSL certificate and key on the General Configuration page in the administration interface or paste the certificate and key files into the Mail Express configuration directory To Specify an SSL Certificate in the Mail Express administration interface 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe left navigation pane under Configuration click General 3 Inthe SSL Certificate section provide the SSL certification information 132 Mail Express Security and SSL SSL Certificate Upload Certificate Authority certificate chain Upload public certificate Upload private key I Private key is password protected Private key password Confirm private key password In the Upload certificate box click Browse to find the signed certificate file crt In the Upload key box click Browse to find the key file for the certificate key c Ifa password is required for thi
179. figuring and Administering Mail Express Server 10 11 12 To email the Drop Off portal URL address to a list of users in the Send Drop off URL box type the email addresses separated by commas then click Send To allow access to the Drop Off portal only to verified users select the Require Verified User check box e Select the Register Internal Users as verified check box to allow Internal Users to use the Drop Off portal When the Register Internal Users as verified check box is selected any new Internal users that are created will automatically have Drop Off permission Selecting the check box does not retroactively allow all Internal users to use the Drop Off page The administrator has to manually enable the Drop Off permission for Internal users created before the check box was selected To require drop off users to use CAPTCHA select the Require CAPTCHA to send check box iJ CAPTCHA Completely Automated Public Turing Test To Tell Computers and Humans Apart is a program that displays a test that humans can pass but a computer is not likely to such as reading a series of distorted letters and typing the same letters into a box thus limiting the amount of spam emails To limit the number of recipients the sender can specify select the Recipient limit check box then specify the number in the box from 1 to 25 10 is the default To limit the total file size of one transfer select the File size limit check box
180. ft Internet Explorer provided by GlobalSCAPE go ele kb globalscape com Knowledgebase X fa 4 K PG cooo P Ble Ede wew Favorites Tools Heb x Google Asdo D gt er Brae Be sents Osmin x convert p selt ci Favortes ge MYnor Pay 120 Ado st E Gst E GWK E Hel Ba grea Boo Boe eac Q aw Goba SCAPE Knowledge Base g mb gt Bager Safety Toos gic balscare Secure Information Exchange products amp services solutions downloads support blog company GlobalSCAPE Knowledge Base Home Search Tags Glossary Members Welcome Guest Login Register Latest Additions Most Popular Knowledgebase amp Resources Home Knowledgebase Q Knowledgebase Latest Articles B activation amp Registration a a Title Last Modified v E CuteFTP for Windows E CuteFTP Mac amp EFT Serve terpris TA cp EFT Server Enterprise Yesterday 4 52 AM EFT Server amp EFT Server esterday 4 52 IN Done but with errors on page 3 To view the latest articles just for Mail Express click the Mail Express node The articles are sorted by Last Modified date you can sort the list by Title or Last Modified date by clicking the column header 4 To search the KB click the Search link at the top of the page or use the search box at the bottom of the page When searching try several different words for the same concept If the keyword you are using for your search does not find the article you
181. fy an invalid certificate key pair or wrong password If you upload an invalid certificate or key or provide an incorrect password when you restart the server the server will not be able to create the HTTPS listener and you will not be able to connect to Mail Express Server To get back to a working state you need to manually swap out the bad certificate key pair with the defaults and change the password For the procedure for manually swapping out the bad certificate key pair with the defaults and changing the password refer to Resetting the Configuration of the SSL Certificate and Key Resetting the Configuration of the SSL Certificate and Key Mail Express Server stores the configured SSL certificate key pair in the lt Installation Directory gt conf directory as MailExpress crt and MailExpress key When configuring the SSL certificate key pair in the Mail Express Administration Interface these files will be overwritten by the new certificate key pair If you accidentally specify an invalid certificate or key file or specify an inappropriate password you must revert to a valid state To facilitate reverting to a valid state Mail Express Server ships with backup copies of the default SSL certificate key pair in the lt Installation Directory gt conf directory as MailExpressDefault crt and MailExpressDefault key Using the procedure below you will revert to the default files and configuration To reset the SSL certificate key configuratio
182. g Configuration Log file location C Users Administrator App Data Roaming Global SC Browse Lok coa 2 Inthe Mail Express Server Host box provide the host name of Mail Express Server 3 Inthe Port box provide the port used by Mail Express Server 164 Using Mail Express in Outlook 4 In the Login type box specify either manual or Windows authentication e Manual You must provide the username and password that you use to connect to Mail Express or your AD credentials a Inthe Username box provide the username that you use to connect to Mail Express Server or your AD username b Inthe Password box provide the password that you use to connect to Mail Express Server or your AD password e Windows Authentication You connect to Mail Express Server via Single Sign On Kerberos In this case you do not need to provide a username and password Your Windows credentials are used to connect to Mail Express The Username and Password boxes are replaced with a Service principal name box If you want to test your connection to Mail Express Server click Test Connection In the Log file location box specify the path at which the log file is saved By default the log files are saved in userprofile Application Data GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin logs Click OK to save your changes or click Cancel if you do not want to save your changes Configuring Message Options Use the Messag
183. ge Cancel 7 The folder defaults to userprofile Application Data GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin To install to a different folder click Change and specify the location Back 42 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express 8 Click Next The File Store Configuration appears i Mail Express Outlook Addin Setup Bi E3 File Store Configuration Please specify the file store path used by the Add in A The Addin will temporarily copy attachments here tings kmarshiLocal Settings Application Data GlobalSC4PE Mail Express 9 The File Store location defaults to userprofile Local Settings Application Data GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin The Add In will temporarily store attachments for emails that it is processing in this folder To specify a different location click Change and specify the location 10 Click Next The Ready to Install page appears fe GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin Setup i i x Ready to install GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin A Click Install to begin the installation Click Back to review or change any of your installation settings Click Cancel to exit the wizard Cancel 11 Click Install to begin the installation The Setup Wizard installs the application and the Completed page appears 43 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 ie GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin Setup lel Completed the GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outloo
184. ge appears ZD GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup ioj x Choose Start Menu Folder Choose a Start Menu folder for the GlobalSCAPE Mail Express shortcuts A Select the Start Menu folder in which you would like to create the program s shortcuts You can also enter a name to create a new folder Eobascare Accessories Administrative Tools Microsoft Silverlight Startup Nullsoft Install System v2 46 10 Click Next The Mail Express Server Administration Account page appears 26 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express ZJ GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup lol xj Configure Global SCAPE Mail Express Server Administration Account Specify the GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Server administrator account credentials A GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Server uses a web interface for administering and monitoring the system Please enter the username and password you would like to use for the initial administrator account Click Next to continue The password must be at least 6 characters in length and adhere to at least 3 of the following contain at least 1 digit 1 lower case 1 upper case and 1 non alphanumeric character e g or Username PC i O Password Po Confirm Password Po Email Address Doo Nullsoft Install System v2 46 lt Back Next gt Cancel e Inthe Username box provide a username 1 128 characters to use when administering and monitoring Mail Express Server The username is case sen
185. ged by the Add In for all accounts If an account is disconnected from its Exchange Server the Add In will wait until connectivity is re established for that account before uploading commences Download Notifications When the download notification feature is enabled the Add In will send a private copy of the message to each recipient with their own private links so that the Mail Express Server can discern who is downloading a particular file Due to limitations in Outlook it is not possible to send these private messages while retaining the original recipient list To account for this limitation Mail Express will update the message body to include the original recipient list for these private emails The updated message body will only occur when the download notification or invitation features are enabled and for emails that are being sent to more than one recipient The text that is added to emails to support this feature can be customized through a template that resides on the Mail Express Server Refer to Customizing Mail Express Pages and Notifications for more information Using Mail Express in a Web Browser These topics describe how to send or pick up files using Mail Express in a web browser For details of using Mail Express in Microsoft Outlook refer to Using and Configuring Mail Express in Outlook For details of configuring Mail Express administration refer to Administering Mail Express Connecting to the Web Portal The Mail Ex
186. h SSL The Mail Express Server includes a pre generated self signed Public Certificate Private Key pair These are used by the Mail Express Server to provide secure HTTPS communications for the various web interfaces and web services e The Mail Express Server is configured to use the Apache Portable Runtime APR based native library for Tomcat http tomcat apache org tomcat 6 0 doc apr html to provide increased performance Internally the native library uses OpenSSL to handle SSL based communications e Mail Express Server uses Tomcat 6 0 20 internally which in turn uses the Tomcat Native library version 1 1 16 This version of the library is built against OpenSSL 0 9 8i e The Default HTTPS Listener is configured within a Connector element in the lt Installation Directory gt conf server xml file The appropriate Connector element may be located in the file by searching for the text port 443 e For detailed information on the configuration options for the Connector refer to the following links o Apache Tomcat 6 0 APR Native HTTPS Configuration http tomcat apache org tomcat 6 0 doc apr html HTTPS o Apache Web Server mod_ssl documentation http httpd apache org docs 2 2 mod mod_ssl htm e The supported SSL algorithms have been configured for strong security by default SSL Protocols To maintain a wider range of compatibility with end user browsers Mail Express Server allows clients to initially connect using all sup
187. han the database purging value an error message appears Database purging must be disabled before disabling File Store purging The default is to purge files older than 3 months Purging is actor based that is Purge files sent by Internal Users only purges files sent by internally defined users and Purge files sent by Drop Off Users only purges files sent by external users regardless of which component they used to send the files 5 Notifications regarding file store status are sent by default to the Mail Express administrator email address defined on the General Settings page a To turn off notifications clear the Send notifications on File Store status check box not recommended b Inthe Storage threshold box specify the number of GB TB PB EB of maximum storage threshold allowed before notifications are sent The default threshold is 1 TB c Inthe Send notification when File Store is box specify at what threshold notifications are to be sent The default is 90 full d Inthe Send notification every box specify the number of minutes hours days months or years between notifications from 5 minutes to 99 years By default notifications are sent every 30 minutes Because the file store could be on a very large shared storage system SAN EMC Mail Express is limited to an allocation or threshold of that storage The threshold is not a hard limit that the Mail Express Server enforces it is a level at which you woul
188. he Mail Express Server does not modify the database DDL during the course of operation the Database role membership may be optionally locked down to dbdatareader and dbdatawriter after initial installation Note however that during subsequent upgrades the database user used during the upgrade must have permission to modify the database DDL As such provision is provided in the upgrade sequence of the installer to specify an alternate user to use for performing the actual upgrade Alternatively you may temporarily grant the normal Mail Express Server database user the right to modify the database DDL for the course of the upgrade Database Creation Example The following sample SQL statements will create the database The collation name should be adjusted depending on the desired database language Case sensitive collation is required Case sensitive collations typically include _ BIN for Binary or _CS for Case Sensitive in the collation identifier You should avoid using collations whose identifier contains _Cl for Case Insensitive CREATE DATABASE MAILEXPRESS COLLATE SQL _Latinl_General_CP1_CS_AS ALTER DATABASE MATLEXPRESS SET ALLOW_SNAPSHOT_ISOLATION ON ALTER DATABASE MATLEXPRESS SET READ_COMMITTED_SNAPSHOT ON Database User Creation Example The following sample statements will create the database user CREATE LOGIN medatab
189. he default port is 44500 Mail Express only communicates over HTTPS which uses port 443 by default By default only the Pick up Drop off and Reply portals are accessible via DMZ Gateway The Administration portal Internal portal and Outlook Add In web service interface interfaces normally accessed from within the network are not accessible via DMZ Gateway In the DMZ Gateway interface the Mail Express Server is considered a Server and the Mail Express DMZ Protocol Handler is considered a Site e g in the DMZ Gateway Status pane In the DMZ Gateway version 3 1 0 when communicating with Mail Express Server Mail Express Server appears in the Server Type column In earlier releases of DMZ Gateway Unknown appears in the Server Type column GlobalSCAPE DMZ Gateway ersion 3 1 0 build 1 a lol xj Profile Server Help Delete Profile abl Rename Profile Stop Restart New Profile Server Type Listener IP Address Listener Port Status Message Profile 192 168 122 139 44500 192 168 122 130 mhamServer Mail Express Server Mail Express DMZ Protocol Handler 192 168 122 139 443 Active Listening For incoming connectior Profile 192 168 122 139 44500 192 168 122 130 mhamServer Mail Express Server Mail Express DMZ Protocol Handler 127 0 0 1 443 Active Listening for incoming connectior DMZ Gateway events are logged in the Mail Express Event log For details of installing and configuring
190. i 156 Fil Syste METON iieii aaae aeara kees i i anipe 169 Filtet 2 neee onea eis 154 156 157 Finding Information in the Help 188 ENEN EEES E EET E 188 ftl 117 G General Configuration 51 71 130 164 General Configuration dialog cceeeee 164 General Settings ccccceeeeseeeeeeseeceseeeeeeeeeees 51 General Status 0 cccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeseneeeeeeeees 170 generate a Mail EXpreSS eessen 151 Generating Reports cccceeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeees 151 Generating Reports of Mail Express Activity 151 Generating the Installation Script 00 46 Getting Help ccceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeees 187 globalsa penia aieeaii 188 H Hide Stat Suen iinternet aas anian 170 higher security settings ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 139 Highlight the URL cececeeseeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 188 RLE NEE TEETE EE EO AGI eee 78 NOStNAME EEE TEE E eee 23 PURINA cee oendaa netadi tga aa tia 151 AIDSia aedini radaas 69 130 134 161 175 I lnstall aaan OS 23 37 Install the PIA nurcan 37 install the Prerequisite Installer Bundle 37 PMO a a E E 37 Installation LOQQING ccsceceeeeeeeeeetnteeeeteee 116 Installation Script 0 cccccsseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneteneees 37 Installed Software Version 115 Installing Mail Express Server s es 15 23 installing the Mail Express Outlook 20 15 Installing the Outlook Add In cceee
191. idget discussion is more descriptive and easier to identify in a search You are allowed up to 256 characters In the Attachments area click Browse to select a file to attach You can only select one file at a time and cannot select entire directories You are limited to 10 attachments per send After 10 attachments have been added the Browse button is unavailable In the Message box further describe the purpose of the email The Message box allows up to 10240 characters You cannot use HTML tags to format the message More options may be available depending on the administrator s settings and the type of account used to log in Select the Show message options check box if you want to specify the following message options specific to this email e Send Reply link When the Mail Express administrator has enabled this option recipients can click a link in the email to reply to your email e Notify me when files are picked up Select this check box to receive an email when the recipient downloads the files that you sent e Link expiration Select this check box if you want to specify an expiration that is more strict that what is defined on the server e Send Pick Up Page link only Select this check box if you want to send only a link to the Pick Up Page not links to the attachments e Require password for download Select this check box and specify a password if you want the recipient to provide a password before being able to dow
192. ields or click the list to search by IP Address or Modifier then provide the IP address or modifier username 5 Select the Exact Match check box to control how the value in the Search box is used If the Exact Match check box is selected the column data must match the search value exactly 6 Click Filter The report updates with your search and filter selections Click Reset to clear the filter criteria 157 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 User History Start Date 08709 2010 mahz foo AM gt End Date 08709 2010 mf 27 PM gt Search By fip Address x I Exact Match Filter Reset Date IP Address Modifier User Affected 08 09 2010 01 42 00 PM 127 0 0 1 mailexpress km globalscape com 08 09 2010 01 41 32 PM 127 0 0 1 mailexpress kmarsh 08 09 2010 01 41 02 PM 127 0 0 1 mailexpress mailexpress Click any column header that has an up down arrow to sort the data ascending or descending To compare two items select their check boxes and then click Compare You can only compare changes to the same user The Compare button is not available if the selections are invalid The Audit Details of the selected items appears Audit Details Setting Source Value Target Value enabled true true km globalscape com km globalscape com dropoffCapable true true passwordHash HgPSkF2Yn 2BL3QPJZLNqoxWoWTOi HgPSkF2Yn 2BL3QPJZLNqgoxWoWTOi deleted false true kind InternalManaged InternalManaged modifiedDate 2010 06 22 09 47 29 8
193. ies o Click the Security tab then click Add to specify the user account with which the Mail Express Server will authenticate o Ensure that the Accept any Sender and Accept Authoritative Domain Sender permission s Allow check boxes for that user are selected and that every other permission s Allow check box is cleared 89 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 C Chent ADSERVER Properties Exchange 2003 Exchange 2003 does not install an alternative client submission virtual server so you must create one In this example it is called Alternative Submission 1 Inthe Exchange console click Servers gt ADSERVER2003 gt Protocols gt SMTP gt Alternative Submission then right click Alternative Submission and click Properties Alternative Submission Properties 2 On the General tab click Advanced 90 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server So pe Configure the virtual server to listen on port 587 The actual port number is not significant so long as it is noted so that the Mail Express server can be configured to use the some port Click OK Click the Access tab then click Authentication 91 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 5 Select the following check boxes then click OK e Basic Authentication The most important requirement of this module is that it allows basic authentication e T
194. ificate address mismatch C Warn if changing between secure and not secure mode Warn if POST submittal is redirected to a zone that doesn vM w lt gt Takes effect after you restart Internet Explorer Restore advanced settings Reset Internet Explorer settings Resets Internet Explorer s settings to their default condition You should only use this if your browser is in an unusable state 3 Clear the Use SSL 2 0 check box 4 Select the Use TLS 1 0 check box 5 Click Apply to save the changes then attempt to connect to the server Alternative 2 Modify Server Configuration If you do not want to modify each user s Internet Explorer settings you can modify the Mail Express Server configuration to enable the SSLv2 protocol This is considered less secure but provides greater compatibility with browsers Note that with this solution the SSLv2 SSLv3 and TLSv1 protocols will be enabled rather than only TLSv1 However the supported cipher algorithms will be locked down to SSLv3 and TLSv1 algorithms only This allows browsers to connect using the SSLv2 protocol but then negotiate the use of the SSLv3 or TLSv1 protocols and ciphers only To enable the SSLv2 protocol 1 Ina text editor such as Notepad edit the following settings in server xml e g C Program Files GlobalSCAPE Mail Express conf server xml 2 Update the HTTPS Port 443 configuration a Locate the Connector that defines the default port 443 listene
195. il Express Server is removed You can also run the installer and click Uninstall Mail Express 68 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server This section provides the procedures for configuring Mail Express Server Initial Configuration of Mail Express Server Mail Express Server is administered in a web browser You can access the administration page with a shortcut on Mail Express Server or by typing the URL https lt hostname gt admin into your web browser where lt hostname gt is the hostname of the computer running the Mail Express Server The administrator home page is also the Mail Express Status page Before you can send attachments with Mail Express Server the status of each component should either display a green flag or no longer indicate that it is disabled For example when Exchange Mail Server is enabled the hostname of the mail server appears Initial configuration of Mail Express Server 1 Launch the Mail Express Server administration interface e g click Start gt Programs gt GlobalSCAPE gt Mail Express gt Mail Express Admin or double click the desktop shortcut 2 Log in using the Mail Express Server administrator username and password that you specified during installation of the server The Mail Express Status page appears The items with red flags and Disabled status are items that you need to configure before you can manage attachments with Mail Express Welcome to the Mail Exp
196. il Express is full 5 Click Save to save your changes or click Restore to cancel changes If you navigate away from the page without clicking Save your changes are discarded 97 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Configuring the Drop Off Portal On the Drop Off Portal Settings page you define limitations for senders use of the package Drop Off Portal These settings will restrict file transfers that can be made and the type of user access that is available for the portal The Drop Off Portal is disabled by default When the portal is disabled visitors to the page receive the standard HTTP 404 Not Found error When the portal is enabled additional configuration settings appear If you want to send the Drop off URL to one or more recipients you will first have to define the Exchange Server To manage the Drop Off portal policy 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under Portal Settings click Drop Off Settings The Drop Off Portal Settings page appears Drop Off Portal Settings General Settings Vv Portal enabled URL URL https localhost dropoff Email Drop off URL to Security Policy Vv Require verified user I Register Internal Users as verified Require CAPTCHA to send Recipient limit File size limit Link expiration File type exclusions Valid recipient domains 3 To enable the Drop Off portal select the Portal enabled check box 98 Con
197. ile C DBUtil err optionsfile lt file gt o Description When specified loads command line parameters from the file The file should specify parameters in a parameter value pair with one pair per line Parameters specified on the command line override parameters specified in the file o Default Not set o Example optionsfile C DBUtil ini ui o Description When specified enabled the utility to display graphical interface components when necessary This is mainly for use by external applications such as the Mail Express Server installer that call the utility internally Currently the ui option is only applicable to the INIT action for displaying upgrade progress graphically o Default Not set verbose o Description When specified enabled debug level logging o Default Not set useprops o Description When specified the current Mail Express Server database configuration values will be used rather than requiring them to be provided on the command line o Default Not set propfile lt property file gt o Description If useprops is set and this value is specified the database connection information will be loaded from this file rather than the default Mail Express Server database configuration file o Default None o Example useprops propfile C jdbc properties action lt action id gt o Description Specifies the overall action the utility should perform o Value values CREATE DATABASE creates a
198. in a particular column provide the search criteria in the Search By box click the down arrow to specify which column to search Package Filename Sender Recipient or Source then click Search For example to search for files sent by a specify user in the Search By box click Sender then in the text box type the user s email address or name Wildcards are supported use to match a single character and to match 0 or more characters Leave the Search by box blank to include all files within a date range o Select the Exact Match check box to control how the value in the Search box is used If the Exact Match check box is selected the column data must match the search value exactly o To clear the search and display all files click Reset e To sort the table o Click the column heading by which you want to sort e To delete files o Select the check box next to the file s you want to delete then click Delete selected files You can select all or clear all files using the Select all deselect all check box e To move to other pages of the table o Click the navigation controls that appear above the column headers when more than one page of results is available 112 Configuring the DMZ Gateway Connection Viewing and Managing Packages When files are attached to emails managed by Mail Express the emails and their attachments are called packages Occasionally you might want to prevent users from picking up a package tha
199. ing alternate authentication settings then the settings can be changed after installation either by doing one of the following o Updating the Service Principal Name SPN in the Add In s General Configuration o Re running the installation in silent mode and specifying a different value for the SERVICEPRINCIPALNAME installation parameter o Changing the ServicePrincipalName registry setting directly and then restarting Outlook This registry setting resides under the following registry key HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin Settings Configuring Mail Express for Microsoft Exchange Server Communication On the Exchange Configuration page you specify the Microsoft Exchange Server that the Mail Express Server communicates with and the type of connection You also specify the From and Reply to addresses that all Mail Express notifications are to use See also Configuring Anonymous Access to Exchange Configuring Authenticated Access to Exchange and Testing Mail Express Exchange Configuration 78 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server To configure Microsoft Exchange Server communication 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under Configuration click Exchange The Exchange Configuration page appears Exchange Configuration Host Settings Host mail escape com Port 25 I Connect using SSL Authentication Settings M Use
200. inks to pick up attachments typically in the DMZ behind a firewall such as Microsoft ISA Server Using GlobalSCAPE s DMZ Gateway server the Mail Express Server does not have to remain in the DMZ and can reside within the internal network When deploying the Mail Express Server in a virtualized cluster environment setting a static MAC address for the server is required Ensure that port 443 is available to the Mail Express IP address and that no port conflicts exist on that IP address This port can be assigned to a specific IP address placed on the system for Mail Express expressly If the firewall is enabled on the computer on which Mail Express Server is installed you must create an exception for TCP port 443 Supports both 32 bit and 64 bit editions of the following operating systems e Microsoft Windows Server 2008 with SP1 or later e Microsoft Windows Server 2003 with SP2 or later The Active Directory Domain Controller on Windows 2003 Systems require the Windows 2003 SP2 32 bit Support Tools to be installed download from Microsoft Download Center Microprocessors e 1 GHz x86 based processor or higher for 32 bit operating systems e 1 4 GHz x86 based processor or higher for 64 bit operating systems 1 GB RAM or more e Installation temporarily requires up to 125 MB free disk space on the system drive to accommodate temporary installation files e Up to 500 MB of additional storage on the selected installation drive to acc
201. ion and initial configuration have been completed it is no longer required 8 Install all available Windows Updates required for security and compatibility 9 Reboot the server computer required before the Mail Express installation can begin 10 Download a copy of the Mail Express installer onto the Mail Express computer s local hard drive 11 Install Mail Express Server run the executable 32 bit or 64 bit depending on operating system You will need the following information Installation directory Where to write installation files Attachment storage directory Any storage that can be accessed from server Mail Express administrator username password and email address If using an external database database server connection parameters Server Configuration 12 Specify the domain of Mail Express Server This is the system name that will be used for portal and package URL information For example if the domain is set to me globalscape com the package links that recipients receive will look like https me globalscape com pickup lt unique identifier gt a 13 Specify System Notification addresses Email address to which system notifications are sent the email address provided at installation is used by default 14 Configure the Exchange connection 15 Enable attachment pickup 16 Create new Internal user for testing purposes 13 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Outlook Installation and Configuration
202. ion serial number as prompted by the Software and as otherwise instructed by GlobalSCAPE Your failure to correctly follow the activation procedures is a material breach of this Agreement E TERM The term of the license for any component of the Software is as indicated on your invoice or sales receipt or if not otherwise specified perpetual 3 RIGHT TO COPY FOR BACKUP You may make one copy of the Software or the installation media for the Software solely for back up or archival purposes at no additional charge 4 UPGRADES To use Software identified by GlobalSCAPE as an upgrade or new version you must first be licensed for the Software identified by GlobalSCAPE as eligible for the upgrade and must be current on all applicable payments of licensing or support fees After upgrading you may no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility and the license for that Software shall be deemed immediately terminated upon your installation of the upgrade 5 TRANSFER You may not rent lease lend or sublicense the Software You may however make a one time permanent assignment of all of your license rights to the Software to another party provided that a the transfer must include all of the Software including all component parts programs media printed materials all registration serial numbers all modules you purchase in conjunction with the Software and this lic
203. isites based on Microsoft Office Version for prerequisite details and download links Instructions for creating the silent install script are provided below Deployment details are not provided here it is assumed that a Windows administrator already knows how to install and deploy applications in silent mode 46 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express Installation Arguments The following are the installation arguments that can be provided to the installer when it is running in non full user interface mode This provides a way for the Add In installation to be configured and run without requiring any user interaction for instance if the Add In is deployed in silent install mode The Add In Installer page of the web administration site assists administrators in generating a script with the appropriate arguments Argument Name Description SERVERHOST The IP Address or Host Name of the Mail Express Server SERVERPORT Optional allows you to specify a port other than 443 LOGINTYPE The type of authentication that the Outlook Add In will use to authenticate with the Mail Express Server MANUAL for Manual Authentication WINDOWS for Windows Authentication The default value is WINDOWS SERVICEPRINCIPALNAME The service principal name defined for the Mail Express Server if the login type is Windows authentication Refer to To create the SPN in the topic nstalling the Outlook Add In MEUSERNAME The Mail Express u
204. it You can edit the Subject line you are allowed up to 256 characters In the Attachments area click Browse to select a file to attach You can only select one file at a time and cannot select entire directories You are limited to 10 attachments per send After 10 attachments have been added the Browse button is unavailable In the Message box further describe the purpose of the email The Message box allows up to 10240 characters You cannot use HTML tags to format the message In the Options area select the Send me a copy check box if you want to be copied on the email Not available for authenticated Internal users Click Send A Files Successfully Sent message appears e If the Subject or Message boxes are empty the send will fail e To send another package click Send e To receive a copy of the receipt in email click email The email is sent to the address specified in the From box of the email 185 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 e f you leave the page open too long without clicking Send the page expires You will have to close the browser clear the cache and then click or paste the link again Using the Account Activation Portal Mail Express Internal users can send invitations to users outside of their organizations with whom they frequently share files After external users create an account they are able to use the Mail Express Drop Off Portal to send files The invitation below was sent to a Gmail account
205. ith an instance name of MailExpress and a database name of MAILEXPRESS The initial Mail Express Server administrator password specified during installation will be used for the sa account password Additionally the installer will create a database user account for use by the Mail Express Server The username and password for this account will match the initial Mail Express administrator password Only the Database Engine and limited configuration tools are installed The tools include the SQL Server Configuration Manager The following services are installed e SQL Server MAILEXPRESS The Mail Express Database Instance e SQL Server Agent MAILEXPRESS This service is disabled by default and not used by Mail Express e SQL Server Browser the browser service used to locate the MAILEXPRESS database instance when using dynamic TCP IP ports e SQL Server VSS Writer TCP IP Settings The Mail Express Server uses Java Database Connectivity JDBC and the SQL Server JDBC driver to communicate with the database This driver uses TCP IP to connect to the database so the MAILEXPRESS SQL Server database instance is installed with TCP IP support enabled For enhanced security the TCP IP settings are configured to only listen for connections from the local machine using the localhost interface 127 0 0 1 To allow remote connections or to modify the communications settings use the SQL Server Configuration Manager Additional S
206. ities 0 ccccceeceecceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaeeseneeeseaeeesaeeeeeeseeeess 172 Changing the Message Format c cccccceeeseeceeseeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeeeaaeeeeaaeseeeeseaeeesaaeedeeeeseaeeesaeseeeeseeeeess 172 Changing the Message Format in Outlook 2010 0 ceeeecececeeeeeeneeceeeee eee eeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeaeeeeeeee 172 Changing the Message Format in Outlook 2007 and 2008 ccccccceesteceeessneeeeeenneeeeesneeeeesseeeenss 173 Mail Profiles with Multiple ACCOUNTS 0 eeccceeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeseeaaeeeeneaas 173 Download NotitiCatloms seses raoa A snabedaazaccdechanancedag dantucessabedaadadobeGavdoeazazsadouuensneed 173 vi Table of Contents Using Mail Express in a Web BrowSel cccccccsseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneees 173 Connecting to the Web Portal ccccccccceeeseeceeseeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeedeaaeseeeeseaeeeeaaeeseaeeseaeeesaeeeeaeeseeeeees 173 Requesting Access to the Drop Off Portal cccccccceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeaaeseeeeeseeeeesaeessaeeseeeeesaas 174 Requesting Access to the Internal Portal ecceceecceeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeneaeeeene 175 Sending Files Using the Drop Off Portal cccccceccceseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaee scenes seaeeeseaeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeess 175 Sending Files with the Internal Portal cccccccec
207. k Addin Setup Wizard eX balscaPe M 7 Click the Finish button to exit the Setup Wizard Note IF Outlook is already running you will need to restart it before the Add in can be used Launch Outlook T Show version history gC balscaPe Back Gancel 12 The Launch Outlook check box is selected by default Clear it if you do not want to open Outlook If Outlook is already open you need to close it and then reopen it for the changes to take effect If the computer has not yet been rebooted since the NET Framework was installed it is highly recommended that the computer is rebooted before trying to use the Add In 13 If you want to view the version history select the Show version history check box 14 Click Finish to close the wizard Viewing the Mail Express Outlook Add In User Interface When you open Outlook the Add In user interface is not visible by default because it is designed to initially run transparent to the user Use the procedure below depending on your version of Outlook to display the Mail Express Outlook Add in user interface In Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 To display the toolbar click View gt Toolbars gt Mail Express 44 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express k Inbox Microsoft Outlook Arrange By Current View AutoPreview Expand Collapse Groups gt Navigation Pane To Do Bar Reading Pane gt gt Reminders Window S amp 5
208. kipSQLServerUninstall Mail Express Server Database Utility In Mail Express Version 3 2 0 and later a command line utility included with the Mail Express Server is provided for performing various database related tasks Most common database tasks are handled by the Mail Express Server installer however on occasion it may be useful to use the command line utility to verify status or to provision additional databases You can use the database utility to perform the following tasks e Create a database with settings appropriate for use by the Mail Express Server This action only creates the database and does not create a database user nor does it create the database objects e Create a database user for use by the Mail Express Server and associates it with an existing database The user will be created with the settings appropriate for use by the Mail Express Server e Check the version of the database to see if it is current This action may be used to see if an upgrade must be performed on a database before it is ready to be used by the local version of the Mail Express Server e Initialize the database for use by the Mail Express Server This action can be used to either initialize a new database or upgrade an existing database When initializing a new database this action will create the database objects and appropriate default data e Update the database configuration used by the local Mail Express Server This action may be used to p
209. lation Complete Setup was completed successfully A Completed _ _ Create folder C ProgramData Microsoft Windows Start Menu Programs GlobalSCAP Create shortcut C ProgramData Microsoft Windows Start Menu Programs GlobalSC Create shortcut C ProgramData Microsoft Windows Start Menu Programs GlobalSC Create shortcut C ProgramData Microsoft Windows Start Menu Programs GlobalSC Delete file C Users ADMINI 1 AppData Local Temp Mail Express DBUti ini Output folder C Users ADMINI 1 AppData Local Temp nsg2B47 tmp dbutil Delete file C Users ADMINI 1 AppData Local Temp Mail Express DBUtil log Output folder C Program Files GlobalSCAPE Mail Express bin Created uninstaller C Program Files GlobalSCAPE Mail Express bin MailExpressUnins Completed E Nullsoft Install System v2 46 14 Click Next The Finish page appears os Completing the GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup Wizard GlobalSCAPE Mail Express has been installed on your computer giCbalscare il d Z Click Finish to close this wizard Create a desktop shortcut for the Administration Iv Interface T Show version history V Start the Mail Express Server service I Start the Administration Interface The Mail Express Server Service service Log On Account has been set to use the Local System account by default g CbalscaPe lt Back Finish Gancel 15 Before clicking Finish sel
210. lear the check box g Click Save to create the account or click Cancel if you do not want to create the account Click Restore to restore the settings in the boxes to their last saved state After you click Save the user account appears on the Administrator User Management page 146 Managing Administrator and User Accounts Managing Internal User Accounts The Internal User Management page provides status and configuration options for all internal senders that are defined in the Mail Express system On this page you can view modify add and delete internal user accounts You can have up to 25 000 active accounts When you are connected to an Active Directory AD user database the set of Internal senders page is automatically populated Active Directory users are created as Internal users upon their first login to Mail Express Only Internal accounts are valid for connecting to the Mail Express Server with the Outlook Add In Thus administrators should avoid creating Administrator or External User accounts whose username conflicts with a user wishing to connect using the Add In That is if users are going to connect to Mail Express through the Outlook Add In with their AD account do not manually create an account for them in Mail Express with the same username however you can create a separate Internal user account for them in Mail Express for manual authentication as long as the username is different from their AD account
211. led before you install the Add In you should reboot after completing the NET installation If you do not reboot after installing NET the Mail Express Add In may not load properly in Outlook e You should install and configure Mail Express Server before you install the Outlook Add In e f you will be using Kerberos authentication you must create a domain account for the Mail Express Server for authenticating with the Kerberos Key Distribution Center typically Active Directory and to allow a Service Principal Name SPN to be associated with the account Refer to To create the SPN below 37 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Installers are provided in the Mail Express Server installation directory and for access convenience on the Outlook Add In Installer page These installers are for proof of concept non silent installations and are not intended to be deployed across the enterprise Refer to Deploying the Outlook Add In for more information The bootstrapper installers in the Prerequisite Installer Bundles require Internet connectivity in order to download the Add In prerequisites and must be run by an account that has administrative privileges on the computer on which the Add In is being installed Also the bootstrapper installers are not designed to be deployed through a deployment tool They do not support installation in quiet silent mode Alternatively each prerequisite item that the Add In requires can be downloaded from
212. lently on workstations since the Add In MSI does not require administrative privileges to install 40 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express File Configuration Locations e The log files for the Add In are by default stored in userprofile Application Data GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin Logs e The default installation directory of the Add In is userprofile Application Data GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin e Connection based settings and settings configured by the installer are stored in the registry under the following key HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin Settings e General settings are saved in an XML file named settings config which will reside under the installation folder of the Add In Running the MSI Installer To run the Outlook Add In installer msi manually 1 Double click the msi file The Welcome page appears i GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin Setup p x Welcome to the GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin Setup Wizard g a Ma mai S The Setup Wizard will install GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin on your computer Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit the Setup Wizard gC balscaPE Cancel 2 Click Next The Connection Settings page appears e f prerequisites required to install the Add In are not found on the system an error message appears Click OK to abort the installation and install the prerequisites usi
213. lick each sub heading represented by a page icon to display the corresponding topic in the right pane Search Allows you to locate words or phrases within the content of the topics Type the word or phrase in the text box press ENTER then click the topic you want from the list of topics that appears In the application s help you can search using Boolean OR AND and NOT and wildcard expressions Wildcard searches are not available in Web Help You can sort the search results by Rank Title or the Location column The Location column displays the name of the helpset Print Opens your computer s Print dialog box from which you can specify a printer to print the topic that is displayed in the right pane In the application help you have the option of printing the topic only or the main heading topic and all subtopics in that heading Alternatively see the procedure below Searching the Help File or globalscape com When searching try several different words for the same concept For example if you want help with creating a user account search for user account and so on Also we have attempted to provide intuitive names for the topic titles The Table of Contents and the Index contain the topic titles of every topic in the user guide So in this example if you are looking for a procedure on how to create a drop off user look for the topic Creating and Managing Drop Off User Accounts Printing a Help Topic To print a
214. lity should only be performed under the direction of GlobalSCAPE Customer Support Installation Logging Refer to Installation Logging Mail Express Server Diagnostics Logging The Mail Express Server Diagnostics Logging functionality provides diagnostic level messages for the operation of the Mail Express Server This diagnostic information may be used to identify errors warnings and other information of interest that occur during the operation of the Mail Express Server By default this functionality logs to the file lt Installation Directory gt logs MailExpressServer log The log will be appended during each run of the Mail Express Server The log file will archive itself automatically when it reaches 10 MB and will maintain the last 10 log files in the form MailExpressServer log lt X gt where X is a number from 1 to 10 with 1 being the most recently archived log file and 10 being the oldest Mail Express Server Service Diagnostics Logging This logging records diagnostic information generated by the Mail Express Server service The Mail Express Server service is responsible for starting the Java Virtual Machine and launching and subsequently monitoring the Mail Express Server The diagnostic information may be used to identify errors or warnings that occur during startup of the Mail Express Server By default this functionality logs to the file lt Installation Directory gt logs MailExpressServerService log 116 Configuring
215. lly by users who have administrative rights on their computer to set up the Add In quickly without using a corporate deployment tool However each prerequisite item that the Add In requires can be downloaded from Microsoft s website and each can be deployed and installed silently This is the preferred method for deploying the Add In s prerequisites Upgrading Mail Express Server Mail Express version 3 0 and later do not support upgrading from Mail Express v2 2 The installer will abort the installation if it finds Mail Express 2 2 installed You must uninstall Mail Express version 2 2 before continuing with installation of version 3 0 or later During the Mail Express Server upgrade the Mail Express Server Service will be stopped When the Add In tries to contact the Mail Express Server the server will be unavailable and the Add In will be disconnected Because of this you should perform the upgrade during a normal maintenance window or when email activity is at a minimum Refer to Connecting to Mail Express Server for details of what happens when Mail Express Server is unavailable In addition to updating program files and the CRT and XML files the upgrade also installs new templates Any customized templates are backed up Because the template format and variables have changed for version 3 1 you must migrate your customizations to the new templates rather than simply copying your old templates into the directory Refer to Customizing
216. login credentials for a privileged database account such as the sa account that may connect to the database server create databases and create or alter users Click Test to connect to the database using the supplied settings Click Next to continue WIN YJSVEE4JS4K J Database server port 1433 JV Database instance name MSSQLSERVER SQL Server authentication Windows authentication CR Z GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup Configure Database Server Connection Settings Specify the database server name and privileged user account login credentials Database server host Authentication mode Privileged username Privileged user password Nullsoft Install System v2 46 3 On the Configure Database Server Connection Settings page provide the database instance connection information Database server host name 255 characters is the maximum length for a SQL Server hostname Database server port This option is disabled by default and the value defaults to 1433 the default SQL Server listener port When enabled the port value is required and must be between 1 and 65535 If you are not running the SQL Server Browser Service and not using the default port then you need to specify the port Database instance name This option is enabled by default and the value defaults to MSSQLSERVER When enabled the instance name is required and must be between 1 and 128 characters If you have not specified a por
217. m Service Pack 1 o Installer Name Microsoft Visual Studio Tools for the Microsoft Office System version 3 0 Runtime Service Pack 1 x86 o Installer File vstor30sp1 KB949258 x86 exe 19 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 o Download Page http www microsoft com downloads en details aspx FamilyID D8EB4921 891 A 4B5E 973F OB96E6CCF376 o Direct Download Link http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 120187 Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Tools for Office Runtime e Installer Name Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Tools for Office Runtime VSTOR 2010 Redistributable e Installer File o For 32 bit editions of Microsoft Windows OS vstor40_x86 exe Note On 32 bit editions of Microsoft Windows OS it is not strictly required to install this prerequisite prior to installing the Mail Express Outlook Add In because Outlook 2010 will automatically install the Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Tools for Office Runtime if it is not already installed This occurs the first time that Outlook loads the Add In and does not require the user to have administrative privileges on the computer However this will cause a slight delay the first time end users start Outlook after the Add In has been installed Administrators wishing to provide a more streamlined end user experience may want to go ahead and pre install this prerequisite o For 64 bit editions of Microsoft Windows OS vstor40_x64 exe Note On 64 bit editions of Microsoft Windows OS this automatic inst
218. n 1 Log in with administrator privileges to the computer on which Mail Express Server is installed 2 Navigate to the Mail Express configuration directory e g C Program Files GlobalSCAPE Mail Express conf 3 Delete the files MailExpress crt and MailExpress key These are the invalid files that you will create new versions of in step 5 4 Make backup copies of MailExpressDefault crt and MailExpressDefault key the default SSL certificate and key files in the same folder The copies will be named Copy of MailExpressDefault crt and Copy of MailExpressDefault key 5 Rename the copies to MailExpress crt and MailExpress key You now have clean version of these files 6 Modify the configuration to use the default password a Using a text editor edit the lt Installation Directory gt conf server xml configuration file 134 Mail Express Security and SSL b Locate the Connector that defines the default port 443 listener This Connector may typically be found by searching for the following text port 443 c Change the SSLPassword setting for the Connector to the password used to encrypt the private key SSLPassword mailexpress d Alternatively if password protected was not used on the private key then it should read SSLPassword e If you are using the DMZ Gateway the SSLPassword setting must also be modified for the DMZ Gateway Protocol Handler connector This Connector may be found by se
219. n Pre auth user DN Pre auth user password Confirm pre auth user password Search Definition Search base Search filter Test Configuration Test username Test user password Confirm test user password Restore Save Select the Enable Active Directory authentication check box cleared by default The page expands to display the AD options In the Active Directory host box provide the host name or IP address e g 10 1 1 1 of the Active Directory server If users from child domains need access to the Mail Express portals use the domain name or domain IP address in the Active Directory host box and use the global catalog port 3268 in the Active Directory port box In the Active Directory port box provide the port on which Active Directory listens for LDAP communication The default port is 389 with SSL the default is typically 636 Select the Connect using SSL check box if you are using SSL for AD When SSL is enabled the Trusted Certificate Authority CA Certificate box appears 75 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Host Settings Active Directory host Active Directory port V Connect using SSL Trusted Certificate Authority CA Certificate Ea Upload X 509 SS ST ES certificate Browse e Inthe Upload X 509 certificate box browse to the location of the Base 64 encoded X 509 signed certificate that is to be used to validate the certificate chain A certificate in this format
220. n Refer to Upgrading the Outlook Add In for details Upgrading the Outlook Add In Upgrading the Add In is similar to installing the Add In for the first time except that because the Add In s prerequisites Office PIA VSTO Runtime and NET Framework 3 5 SP1 are already installed only the new Add In MSI MailExpressOutlookAddinInstaller msi needs to be run to upgrade an Add In When running the Add In MSI silently the same installation parameters used to install the Add In initially can be provided but is not required The Outlook Add In Installer page of the web administration site can be used to generate the appropriate installation script if needed If the user will perform the upgrade manually via the installation wizard they will be guided quickly through the upgrade process When the upgraded Mail Express Server service is started the previous version s Outlook Add In will not connect The Add In will indicate a version mismatch in the Mail Express Status pane and display an exclamation point on the toolbar ribbon After you upgrade the Add In it will then connect successtully 50 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express Finalizing the Upgrade After upgrading the Mail Express Server and the Outlook Add Ins in your organization launch the Mail Express Server s web administration site navigate to the Internal Settings page select the Add In services enabled check box and then click Save You should have disable
221. name select the Remember Me check box The username will be remembered for the next 30 days If you want to clear the boxes and start over click Reset Click Sign in e If login was successful the Mail Express Status page appears e If login failed you have the option to reset your password If you click Reset a temporary password is emailed to the address specified when you created the account All attempted logins are audited Information captured includes the event time and date username successful or unsuccessful login and IP address from which the login attempt was made Specifying the Mail Express Server Host Name The Mail Express Server host name is defined during initial configuration The Mail Express Server hostname is used when creating the hyperlinks in recipient emails If the server is moved or redefined for some reason you can specify the new hostname as described below To configure general settings 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under Configuration click General The General Configuration page appears 3 Inthe Hostname box provide the hostname of the Mail Express Server 71 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 General Settings Software version 3 2 0 build 1 Check version Hostname HTTPS kmarsh globalscape com System notification email address es Default landing paget Internal portal Drop Off portal User choice TThe us
222. nd Mail Express added email content All customizations are file based that is you can create customized text and image files and place them ina specified location If any customization contains invalid variables or formatting the default notifications are used and an error is displayed in the Audit Event History report to inform you of the issue The Audit Event History report will display a Template Customization error Customizations are performed by editing the templates located in lt Installation Directory gt webapps ROOT WEB INF template e Each template includes minimal GlobalSCAPE branding as a footer on each web page and email The Powered by GlobalSCAPE Mail Express email footer is not editable or removable GlobalSCAPE Professional Services team provides custom branding services e Attachment email headers read The following attachments have been securely sent to you and can be downloaded until lt expiration_date gt e The time and date format for all notifications is Month Day Year HH mi ss AM PM The time is the local server time e The default welcome text on any portal page is Welcome to the Mail Express lt name gt Portal where lt name gt is one of File Dropoff Internal or Pickup e The default welcome text on any login page is Welcome to the Mail Express lt name gt Login Page where lt name gt is one of Administration File Dropoff or Internal e Customized files in the template dire
223. nd allows you to send large attachments regardless of the Exchange Server s attachment limits The default Exchange setting is 10 MB total attachments per email 161 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 To display the Mail Express user interface In Outlook 2003 and 2007 e Right click a blank area of the Outlook toolbar ribbon then click Mail Express Or e Onthe Outlook main menu click View gt Toolbars gt Mail Express General Configuration Message Options im Hide Status Help About Mail Express In Outlook 2010 e Onthe Outlook main menu click File gt Add Ins gt Display Mail Express User Interface Home Send Receive Folde F Save As Uy Save Attachments ta Microso dP Add Accor Account Open Print Account Eg Add Ins Settings e Once the user interface is enabled the ribbon tab will be available Home Send Receive Folder View Mail Express a m mS Help Guide NS Knowledgebase General Message Display Configuration Options Status F About Mail Express Settings Status Help 162 Using Mail Express in Outlook Email Message Buttons When you create a new email the Message buttons allow you to specify the file s to attach and configure Send Options or Reply Link preferences that are specific to that email Refer to Configuring Message Options for details The Mail Express Outlook Add In interface is hidden by default transparent m
224. nd configure Add In services refer to Configuring the Add In and Internal Portal e General Configuration Domain Name The Mail Express Server host name To specify the Mail Express Server domain refer to Specifying the Mail Express Server Host Name e Exchange Mail Server The Exchange host name To configure the Exchange host name and other settings refer to Configuring Mail Express for Exchange The status flag alternates between green and red or green orange and red depending on how exchange is configured If you re only sending mail with no box monitoring the flag will either be green or red depending on whether Mail Express can connect to the mail server If box monitoring is also enabled a green flag indicates that send and monitor are both working a red flag indicates that send and monitor are not working an orange flag indicates that one is working and the other is not e DMZ Gateway When enabled shows the state of the connection to the DMZ Gateway Connected Connecting Disconnected and the configured DMZ Gateway address and server port To enable and configure DMZ Gateway refer to Configuring the DMZ Gateway Connection To register DMZ Gateway refer to Registering DMZ Gateway e Installed Software Version Server software version Logging Mail Express Server Activities All logging functionality in Mail Express is preconfigured with the optimal settings Typically modifying the configuration for the logging functiona
225. nel appears 2 Double click Regional and Language Options The Regional and Language Options dialog box appears 3 Click the Language tab 183 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Regional and Language Options 21x Regional Options Languages advanced M Text services and input languages To view or change the languages and methods you can use to enter text click Details Supplemental language support Most languages are installed by default To install additional lanquages select the appropriate check box below Install files for complex script and right to left languages including Thai M in OK Cancel Apply 4 Inthe Supplemental Language Support area select the Install files for East Asian Languages check box then click OK 5 Restart the computer The interfaces should now display the characters correctly Configuring the Web Browser Before connecting to Mail Express in a web browser a few browser settings may need to be adjusted For example for Ajax to work JavaScript has to be enabled in your browser because Ajax uses JavaScript To configure the web browser to work with Mail Express Internet Explorer 7 8 9 e For IE to allow Ajax to run the following settings must be set under Tools gt Internet Options gt Security tab gt Custom level Under ActiveX controls and plug ins e Run ActiveX controls and plug ins Enable e Script ActiveX controls marked safe f
226. nformation or seek help from the global community of GlobalSCAPE customers and product experts The GlobalSCAPE Knowledgebase KB is a dynamic compendium of information on our products Subscribe to the RSS feed to keep abreast of the latest KB articles Copy and paste this URL http kb globalscape com rssfeed aspx into your RSS feed reader See below for examples Subscribe to GlobalSCAPE email Announcements Sign up for the GlobalSCAPE Newsletter press releases product announcements and other GlobalSCAPE news Recover a Lost Serial Number If you know the email address you used when you activated the software we can send it to you at your new address Contact Customer Service by phone or email Contact Sales by calling 1 800 290 5054 or 1 210 308 8267 or use the online submission form Sales representatives are available 8 00 a m to 6 00 p m US Central Time Monday through Friday excluding major US holidays Order Status Complete the online email form to request information about your order 190 Getting Help e Mail Express support pages provide downloads documentation activation instructions and the latest news regarding Mail Express To add the GlobalSCAPE Knowledge Base RSS feed to your Google home page The procedures below are provided as an example see your feed reader s online help for specific instructions 1 Sign in to your Google home page then in the upper right area of the page click Add
227. ng the appropriate bootstrapper installer or download them from Microsoft s website and installing them separately Afterwards restart the Add In installation 41 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 i Mail Express Outlook Addin Setup 0 xj Connection Settings Please specify settings the Add in will use to connect to the Mail Express Server A Mail Express Server Host Port j3 Login Type windows Authentication bs Mail Express Server Service Principal Name 3 Inthe Mail Express Server Host box provide the Host name or IP address of the Mail Express Server 4 Inthe Port box provide the port number used by Mail Express Server 443 is the default In the Login Type box click the down arrow to specify Windows authentication the default or Manual authentication e f you chose Windows Authentication in the Mail Express Server Service Principal Name box provide the SPN of the Mail Express Server service Refer to To create the SPN above e f you chose Manual Authentication provide a valid username and password for an Internal Mail Express user 6 Click Next The Destination Folder page appears j GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin Setup Eile xi Destination Folder Click Next to install to the default Folder or click Change to choose another A Install GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin to C Documents and Settings kmarsh Application Data GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Chan
228. ng the subject line of the failed message errors list of Problem s Template Name Template Files Data Model Outlook Add in e addininvitationtemplate html f Invitation tl Message e addininvitationtemplate text ftl The invitation message customized per recipient included in the account invitation email from the Outlook Add In Outlook Add in addinrecipienttemplate html ft Recipient Header The recipient header customized per recipient included in the email from the Outlook Add In addinrecipienttemplate text ftl sender EmailAddress the sender s email address accountLink String InvitePageLink this is a fixed token so that the Outlook Add In can replace it accounts list of AccountSummary userAccountSize Integer number of characters in the longest user account userEmailSize Integer number of characters in the longest user email userNameSize Integer number of characters in the longest user name userPortalSize Integer number of characters in the longest user portal userEnabledSize Integer number of characters in the longest user enabled state subject String subject line from the sender s email toRecipients list of TO recipient EmailAddress es ccRecipients list of CC recipient EmailAddress es disambiguate Boolean whether the package has more than one non BCC tracking recipient recipientCount int the total number of To and Cc recipients sender
229. ng Windows Kerberos Authentication To manage Mail Express administrator accounts 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under User Management click Administrators The Administrator User Management page appears The administrator account details are displayed in sortable scrollable columns Administrator User Management Administrator user accounts may be searched based on their email address username and display name may be used to match a single character and may be used to match 0 or more characters Search criteria Search Reset Add User Email gt Username Display Name Enabled Force Password Change no reply mailexpress com Pl ce e The administrator account that is displayed here is the one you created when you installed Mail Express Server Be sure to use a valid email address in case you have to reset the account e g if you forget the password admin admin 3 Do one of the following e To search for a user in the Search box type the email address or display name that you want to search for then click Search Wildcards are supported matches 1 character matches 0 or more characters can be used to escape an actual or e To edit an account next to the account you want to edit click the Edit icon then edit the account as necessary The username password and email address for users that are created using AD cann
230. ng email addresses internal and external to the Exchange mail domain or enable anonymous access to the Drop Off portal and explicitly set the email addresses Email on behalf of an internal address Send an email from an internal address to an internal address and an external address Verify that the messages are received Email on behalf of an external address Send an email from an external address to an internal address and an external address Verify that the messages are received Configuring File Storage and Purging Mail Express Server stores all files uploaded to it until they are removed based on the data purging policy Mail Express does not manage space but it can notify you when a certain threshold of space has been met The File Store Configuration page provides automated purging settings to remove stored packages based on creation date and the time when the upload is completed with the oldest purged first The threshold setting is simply a warning to the administrator that the space allotted to Mail Express is getting full An email is sent to the System Notification address specified on the General Configuration page If you want to send notifications to one or more recipients you will first have to define the Exchange Server If space is unavailable no additional uploads will be accepted however the Pickup portal will continue to service downloads if temporary space is available for download all requests where a ZIP is crea
231. nge The report displays the IP address from which the event initiated the user who caused the event the type of event and the severity of the event The severity level can be any one of the following types e Informational The default severity level for most events Denotes an event that is expected under normal operation e Warning Denotes system issues that are recoverable e Error Denotes system issues that are not recoverable In the Event Type column you can place your cursor over the event to view a tool tip about the event For example for an invalid login the User column is empty and the Event Type column displays Login Attempt When you place your cursor over Login Attempt a What s this cursor appears and the tool tip displays Login attempted for username from IP address successful false Date IP Address Event Type Severity 7 8 10 9 14 AM 127 0 0 1 Informational 7 8 10 9 14 AM 127 0 0 1 7 8 10 9 13 AM 127 0 0 1 7 8 10 9 15 AM 127 0 0 1 Informational Refer to Audit Event Types for details of the various types of audit events in the Event Type column For details of generating reports of activity configuration changes or users refer to Generating Reports of Mail Express Activity Viewing Configuration History and Viewing User History To view the database schema refer to Mail Express Database Tables To view audit event history 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server administration interface
232. nges Turning On or Off the Outlook Add In In the rare instance of a Mail Express error you may you need to turn off the Mail Express Outlook Add In or turn it back on To turn on or off the Mail Express Outlook Add In In Qutlook 2010 1 Click File gt Options 2 Inthe left pane click Add Ins 3 Inthe Manage box click COM Add Ins then click Go The COM Add Ins dialog box appears 4 Select turn on or clear turn off the Mail Express Outlook Add In check box then click OK Take note of the state of the Add In in the Trust Center i e Active Inactive or Disabled If the Add In is in a disabled state it cannot be enabled using the steps above initially Instead you must perform the following steps in the Trust Center a Next to the Manage box click Disabled Items then click Go b Inthe Disabled Items dialog box click Mail Express Outlook Add In then click Enable c Close the Disabled Items dialog box If the Add In now appears in the Active list it is enabled If the Add In appears in the Inactive list follow steps 3 4 above In Outlook 2007 1 Click Tools gt Trust Center 2 Inthe left pane click Add Ins 168 Using Mail Express in Outlook 3 4 In the Manage box click COM Add Ins then click Go The COM Add Ins dialog box appears Select turn on or clear turn off the Mail Express Outlook Add In check box then click OK Take note of the state of the Add In in the Trust Center i e
233. nload the attachments The sender must provide the password to recipients in a separate email over the phone IM etc 12 Click Send e lf the To Subject or Message boxes are empty the send will fail 178 Using Mail Express in a Web Browser e A message similar to the following example appears if the send was successful File s Successfully Sent Thank you for using Mail Express Please see below for a summary of your transfer Send another package Receive a copy of this receipt via email Recipients km globalscape com Files eula 1028 txt eula 1036 txt eula 2052 txt eula 1040 txt eula 3082 txt eula 1031 txt eula 1041 txt eula 1033 txt eula 1042 txt 17 3 KB 17 3 KB 17 3 KB 17 3 KB 17 3 KB 17 3 KB 118 0 B 9 9 KB 17 3 KB Delivery Details Package Identifier Ql Y6SzWE4IHWs_8MPFYj3llpk7p999MrYt1lc e To send another package click Send e To receive a copy of the receipt in email click email The email is sent to the address specified in the From box of the email Sending Invites with the Internal Portal In Mail Express 3 2 and later Internal users can send invitations to external users to create a Drop Off portal account If the Send Invites link does not appear when you log in to the Internal Portal the administrator has not enabled that feature either on your account or globally for all Internal Users 179 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Internal
234. nt to receive download notifications of the files they send from the Drop Off page they must have an internal user account In Mail Express usernames must be unique across all user accounts Administrators must take care when manually creating Administrator or Internal User Accounts so that the username does not conflict with an Active Directory account If an account is manually created with the same username as an Active Directory user then that user will be unable to connect to the server with the Outlook Add In using Windows Kerberos Authentication 149 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 To manage drop off user accounts 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under Users click Drop Off The Drop Off User Management page appears The account details are displayed in sortable scrollable columns Drop Off User Management Drop off user accounts may be searched based on their email address and display name may be used to match a single character and may be used to match 0 or more characters Search criteria Search Reset Add User a Email Display Name Enabled Force Password Change No records found 3 Do one of the following e To search for a user in the Search box type the email address or display name that you want to search for then click Search Wildcards are supported matches 1 character matches 0 or more characters can be used to esc
235. nt to type in a temporary password that is provided in out of band communication with the recipient e g phone call or email By default the Mail Express System will retain attachments for 2 weeks but you can increase or decrease this period based on corporate security auditing and usage requirements When you send an attachment the attachment is uploaded to Mail Express Server over HTTPS and then the recipient receives an email with hyperlinks to download the files from the server When the recipient clicks the hyperlink in the email notification a Web page appears from which the recipient can download the attachment All visits to the download page and file downloads are recorded in the database Auditing to a database provides a detailed history of transfers showing senders and receivers which files were transferred and when they were transferred When you allow Mail Express to manage email attachments sent via Microsoft Outlook emails remain in the Outbox until the Mail Express processing is complete and the attachments are completely uploaded Normally mail clients have a hard time managing large attachments and can often become unresponsive while these files are attached Using Mail Express own Attach File button very large files can be attached to an email quickly reducing the time waiting for the mail client to become responsive again When Mail Express manages an email it uploads the attachments to the Mail Express Server remov
236. o TX 78249 No warranty support indemnity or liability obligation is offered with respect to SPNEGO and if offered in the future will be offered solely by GlobalSCAPE The source code for SPNEGO source code may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation Our provision of this source code does not include any licenses or any other rights to you under any Microsoft intellectual property If you would like a license from Microsoft e g to rebrand redistribute you need to contact Microsoft directly send mail to protocol microsoft com 198 Mail Express EULA ISS EXPORT RESTRICTIONS THE SOFTWARE CONTAINS ENCRYPTION TECHNOLOGY THAT IS CONTROLLED FOR EXPORT BY THE U S GOVERNMENT You agree to comply fully with all relevant export laws and regulations of the United States Export Laws to assure that i the Software is not exported directly or indirectly including as a result of providing access to the Software to a national or resident of and embargoed or restricted country in violation of Export Laws or the applicable laws of any other jurisdiction or ii or provided to anyone on the U S Treasury Department s list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U S Commerce Department s Table of Denial Orders or Entity List Among other things the Export Laws provide that the Software may not b xported or r xported to certain countries that ar mbargoed or restricted or to certain restricted per
237. o Requesting Access to the Internal Portal 2 After you have your Internal user account do one of the following e Open a web browser and navigate to the web address of the Internal web portal e g https mymailexpress org internal e Open a web browser and navigate to the web address of the default landing page e g https mymailespress org If a welcome page appears and displays icons with which to connect to the Drop Off portal or Internal Portal click Internal Portal The Welcome page appears The options that appear depend on the administrator s configuration of the Internal Web Portal and the type of account Send Files Email From Karla lt krsh scape com gt To Ma Add CC Add BCC swiet aaa Attachments D Bowe Attachments Message Options V Send Reply link I Notify me when files are picked u M Link expiration Ro Week s Send Pick Up Page link only Require password to download and upload files Password i Confirm password o Delivery Send 2 Inthe From box is completed for you and is not editable 177 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 In the To box provide the recipient s email address Multiple email addresses can be separated by commas Click Add CC and Add BCC to add copy recipients In the Subject box provide a descriptive title for your email Here are the files is too generic and could get lost in multiple e mails Attached are the documents for Friday s W
238. o The General Status area displays the status of your Mail Express Server connection If the Mail Express Add In is not connected to the Mail Express Server it will not try to upload packages Depending on the settings on Mail Express server the package is either saved to a queue until a connection to Mail Express Server is restored the email is sent through Outlook without Mail Express managing the attachments or a prompt is displayed when the connection to Mail Express is lost and asks you to specify whether to wait for Mail Express connection or send immediately 170 Using Mail Express in Outlook o The Transfer Status area displays the status of attachments being sent including recipient subject line size of the file status Pending Transferring Verifying File Digest etc and the number of upload attempts o To dock or undock the Mail Express Status pane Click and hold the title bar of the Status pane until the Move cursor p appears or click the down arrow on the title bar of the pane then click Move then drag the pane to undock it and move it where you want To dock the pane click in the title bar and drag the pane back to the right or left side of the primary Outlook window To resize the pane when undocked click and hold a corner of the pane or click the down arrow on the title bar of the pane then click Size then drag the pane to the size you want e If the upload failed the Transfer Status area
239. ode Even if the interface is hidden the Add In can still process emails depending on the rules defined by the administrator on the Mail Express administration site When the Add In is in transparent mode users will not have access to the Add In s Attach File button and will have to attach files with Outlook s Attach File button instead When using Outlook s Attach File button users may be prompted that a particular attachment cannot be attached because it exceeds the allowable limit The attachment size exceeds the allowable limit This occurs because Outlook is trying to enforce the attachment size limits defined in Exchange Therefore it is important to realize that if the Add In is running in transparent mode the attachment size thresholds in Exchange will have to be increased to allow users to send larger attachments with Mail Express Keep in mind that by increasing these Exchange limits it may be possible for users to send emails with large attachments through Exchange without the attachments being managed by the Add In e g if the Add In is disabled which could affect the performance of the Exchange Server When the Add In s user interface is enabled the Add In is no longer in transparent mode and all of the interface elements of the Add In are accessible This means that users will have the ability to use the Add In s Attach File button in addition to Outlook s Attach File button When attaching files with the Mail Expres
240. odules are called SMTP Virtual Servers In Exchange 2007 and 2010 these modules are called Receive Connectors In the example below they are called modules Port 24 is reserved for any private mail system Demonstrated below is anonymous access using a module listening on this port named Restricted Relay The most important qualities of this module are that it registers port 24 and allows anonymous access See also Configuring Authenticated Access to Exchange In Exchange 2007 and 2010 1 Inthe Exchange Management Console under Server Configuration gt Hub Transport create a new module Select the server on which you want to create the connector and then click the Receive Connectors tab In the action pane click New Receive Connector Follow the prompts in the New SMTP Receive Connector wizard You can name it anything Restricted Relay is used in the example below 2 Right click the new module then click Properties The Properties dialog box appears 3 Click the Network tab Restrxted Relay Properties xj General Network Authentication Permission Groupe Use these local IP addresses to receive mal pads 7 Eat 26 Local IP addressies Pos Al avaiable IPv4 oddesses 24 Receiye mal from remote servers that have these IP addresses pads 7 Ett X Remote IP addressies 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0K coa aw te 4 Under Use the local IP addresses to receive mail the Local IP address es an
241. oe metest com gt 2011 11 56 John Doe Pending No reply invites lt johndos metest com gt x 2011 11 56 John Doe Pending No reply invites lt johndoa metest com gt 2011 11 57 John Doe Account created No reply invites lt johndos metest com gt Mike Doe lt mikedoe metest co m gt 2011 11 57 Pending No reply invites To generate an invite Activity report 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under Reports click Invite Activity The Invite Activity Report form appears Invite Activity Report Date Range Start date 03 29 2011 fr 12 gt 00 AM v End date 05 30 2011 fr 12 00 AM Note that each report is limited to 1 000 rows Please refine report accordingly Options File type Create Report Jf Reset 3 Inthe Start date boxes specify the beginning date and time of the report range Reports default to a minimum start date of the Mail Express Server installation date Click the calendar icon to select a date from a popup calendar 4 Inthe End date boxes specify the end date and time of the report range Click the calendar icon to select a date from a popup calendar 12 00 00 AM is midnight of the previous day For example for a report of activity from June 1 through the end of the day on June 30 set the Start date to 06 01 2010 at 12 00 00 AM and the End date to 07 01 2010 at 12 00 00 AM 5 Inthe File type box specify the format in which
242. og This log may be viewed in real time using tools such as DebugView that is part of the SysInternals Suite from Microsoft e Default Disabled by default e Example debug logfile lt file gt e Description Log installation messages to the specified file this is in addition to the internal log that is always created by the installer Quotes should be used for paths containing spaces e Default None e Example logfile C Temp MEInstall log InstallerOperation lt operation gt e Description Specifies the main operation that the installer should perform e Valid values e INSTALL Perform a new installation of the Mail Express Server Only applicable when the Mail Express Server is not already installed e UPGRADE Upgrade an existing installation of the Mail Express Server Only applicable when an older version of the Mail Express Server is currently installed e REINSTALL Reinstall the Mail Express Server software Only applicable when the Mail Express Server is already installed and its version is the same as the installer e DATABASE Modifies the database settings used by the Mail Express Server Only applicable when the Mail Express Server is already installed and its version is the same as the installer e UNINSTALL Uninstalls the Mail Express Server Only applicable when the Mail Express Server is already installed 56 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express InstallDirectory lt
243. oint the Mail Express Server at an alternate database or to change the credentials used to log in to the database This action is similar to running the Mail Express Server installer in maintenance mode modify the database configuration e Display the database configuration currently in use by the local Mail Express Server e Test the connection to a database e Perform limited validation of a database and or database user account to ensure they have settings appropriate for use by the Mail Express Server The database utility is executed using the DOS batch file DBUtil bat in the Mail Express s lt Installation Directory gt bin directory For your convenience the Mail Express Server installer creates a Start menu shortcut that will open a Command Prompt in this directory 61 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 To open the database utility e Click Start gt GlobalSCAPE gt Mail Express gt Mail Express Command Prompt It will be under a different folder if you chose an alternate Start menu group during the Mail Express Server installation The utility includes built in help documentation Additionally the utility provides feedback on incorrect or missing command line parameters To view help on using the utility e Type DBUtil bat help e For detailed help with the various top level actions type DBUtil bat help action lt Action ID gt Where lt Action ID gt is one of e CREATE_DATABASE creates a database e CREAT
244. ommodate Mail Express Server log files and temporary files e Adequate storage should be provided for uploaded attachments e Regular disk maintenance management of resources Mail Express administration requires a small amount of available disk space in order to service requests When the disk is full Mail Express may not function as expected 1024x768 or higher resolution monitor Supported browsers with latest OS browser patches with JavaScript and cookies enabled e Internet Explorer 7 or later Internet Explorer 8 recommended e Firefox 3 6 or later Firefox 5 recommended e Safari 4 or later Safari 5 recommended Access to an Exchange Server e Exchange Server 2003 e Exchange Server 2007 e Exchange Server 2010 Additional modules in Exchange Server that meet the specific needs of Mail Express Refer to Configuring Anonymous Access to Exchange or Configuring Authenticated Access to Exchange for details Service account in AD for Mail Express Optional Account is necessary for Kerberos authentication an existing account can be used if preferred Access to a SQL Server 2008 R2 database SQL Server Express which can be installed with the Mail Express installer for evaluation is not intended for production use See SQL Server 2008 R2 Express specific requirements below Anti virus optional The Mail Express Server computer should have a current anti virus application installed so that attachments managed by Mail Expres
245. on Permission Groups Specity who is allowed to connect to this Receive connector I Anonyinqus users Exchange users Exchange servers I Legacy Exchange Servers l Painos Co J ow j e jol 7 In conjunction with the basic authentication we want to ensure that Exchange is authenticating against Exchange users and not accepting anonymous users Ensure the Exchange users check box is selected that the Anonymous users check box is not selected then click OK to close the Properties dialog box and save your settings 8 Grant permission to the Mail Express user When Mail Express users send packages via the web portal Mail Express generates email on their behalf which it then directs to the Exchange server The ability to Impersonate another user requires a special permission In Exchange 2007 2010 the user whose credentials with which Mail Express will be authenticating requires the Accept any Sender permission when impersonating external addresses and Accept Authoritative Domain Sender when impersonating local addresses Do one of the following 88 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server Open the Exchange Management Shell to alter the permissions The permissions are called ms Exch SMTP Accept Any Sender and ms Exch SMTP Accept Authoritative Domain Sender In the example below the receive connector is called Client ADSERVER and the Mail Express user is called Mail Express NWindow ient AD
246. on of Mail Express Server for instructions for initial setup Both the username and the password are case sensitive Silent Installation of Mail Express Server The Mail Express Server installer supports silent installation maintenance and removal Installation proceeds without any prompts or visual indications to the user The installer logging functionality may be used to verify the outcome and diagnose potential issues To initiate a silent installation use the S command line parameter and provide additional parameters as described in Installation Command Line Parameters The sections below provide information on the required and optional command line parameters for each of the main functions or paths in the installer New Installation Using an Internal Evaluation Database This path will instruct the installer to install the Mail Express Server and the internal SQL Server 2008 R2 Express database instance initialize the database and set it for use by the Mail Express Server This database instance is intended for evaluation purposes Production environments should use an external SQL Server 2008 R2 database This option is only applicable when the Mail Express Server is not already installed Required Parameters Optional Parameters DatabaseType INTERNAL AdminUsername lt username gt AdminPassword lt password gt AdminEmail lt email gt IS debug ogfile lt file gt InstallDirectory lt path gt
247. ons of the template The subject template applies to both HTML and plain text Common Template Data Structures Many templates use data in a common format The properties of these structures are detailed in the table 118 Configuring the DMZ Gateway Connection Structure Description Props Cid Represents a user account emailAddress String account email address e g joe bloggs example com username String account user name e g joe bloggs displayName String account display name may be null e g Joe Bloggs personalizedAddress String combines display name and email address e g Joe Bloggs lt joe bloggs example com gt kind String type of account Administrator administrators InternalAutomatic internal users from LDAP InternalManaged internal users manually added External drop off users Attachment Represents a file attachment to an email title String the document title length Double the document size unit String the document unit Kb MB etc link String document access URL Problem Represents an system error title String a brief name of the issue description String more detailed description of the issue level Integer nesting level for the issue used when they are chained together based on root cause the initial level is 0 AccountSummary Represents a user account from an invitation actor Actor the account holder portal String the portal URL based on the ac
248. or scripting Enable Under Scripting e Active scripting Enable Safari e Preferences gt Security tab gt Web content gt Enable JavaScript selected Enabled by default Firefox e Tools gt Options gt Content tab gt Enable JavaScript selected Enabled by default 184 Using Mail Express in a Web Browser Sending Files with the Reply Portal Mail Express allows users to send large email file attachments to recipients inside or outside of their organization If you have received an email from a Mail Express user and the email contains a link to the Reply Portal you can click the link to return files to the sender You must attach at least one file To send files with the Reply Portal 1 Click the Reply to link in the email you received Your default browser opens and the Reply Portal appears Welcome to the Mail Express Reply Portal Email From Karla lt krsh globalscape com gt To Karla lt krsh globalscape com gt Add CC Add BCC Subject IRE sending package Attachments Browse Attachments maximum 10 files Message Options I Show message options Delivery Send In the From box the email address is completed for you and is not editable In the To box the email address is completed for you Authenticated Internal users can change the recipient and add multiple recipients In the Subject box the original Subject line appears with RE reply in front of
249. ot be edited in Mail Express e To delete an account next to the account that you want to delete click the Delete icon amp When an account is deleted it is marked deleted in the database and is no longer visible in the Internal User Management page however audit reports can look for and reference deleted accounts e Tocreate an account click Add User The Administrator User Details page appears 145 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Administrator User Details User Information Email Username Display name Password Confirm password Account Options M Enabled I Force password change Restore Save Cancel In the Email box provide the email address associated with the account In the Username box provide the username for the account c Optional In the Display name box provide the name for the account user The Display name appears in the From box with the sender s email address for example KarlaGmail lt klbb gmail com gt d Inthe Password and Confirm password boxes provide a password for the account The password must be between 6 and 256 characters and adhere to at least 3 of the following requirements contain at least 1 number 1 upper case 1 lower case and 1 non alphanumeric character e If you want the user to change the account password upon signing in select the Force password change check box f The Enabled check box is selected by default To disable the account c
250. ount It will not attempt to authenticate against the Active Directory account When authenticating an Active Directory backed user with the Mail Express Server the server will attempt to locate the following attributes on the user account e mail The email address for the user is used to populate the email address for the user within Mail Express Basically this field should exist since the LDAP backed users inherently originate from the Outlook Add In and thus should have Exchange accounts This field is required e displayName The display name for the user is not required but if present it will be used to populate the user s display name within Mail Express If a user account lacking the mail attribute attempts to authenticate with the Mail Express Server an ERROR level log message appears in the MailExpressServer log similar to the following ERROR Failed to locate attribute mail for user IdontHaveAnEmail To enable and configure Active Directory authentication 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under Configuration click Active Directory The Active Directory Configuration page appears 74 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server Active Directory Configuration General Settings Host Settings Active Directory host Active Directory port I Connect using SSL Authentication Settings Authentication mode Simple login Anonymous logi
251. ovide added t security Uploads Internal Web ld Client users eee a upload their files a i via their web l Package Internet browser Internal Pick up Web Client l Portal DMZ Gateway Downloads A Internal Recipients download files via their Reply Portal web browser either directly clicking the link in the email message or Internal M External Recipients navigating to the Package Recipient ie dounioad tes va thair il o Inemal Web Portal directly clicking the link in the email message or 5 User requests are made via the navigating to the Package Pick up Drop off and Internal Web Pick up Portal portals Portals communicate with Mail Express Server to provide requested information 11 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Mail Express Quick Start Provided below is a quick start check list to assist you in getting Mail Express installed and functional Please click the links in each step to read the detailed procedures complete with screen shots e Additional configuration may be required depending on your individual requirements e All passwords must be at least 6 characters and contain at least 3 of the following types of characters uppercase letters lowercase letters numbers and special characters e g e f you print this checklist please refer to the online help for screen shots and detailed procedures http help globalscape com help me3 index htm mail express quick
252. plicable law whichever is less If GlobalSCAPE is required to take legal action to collect any overdue amount you shall also pay GlobalSCAPE s reasonable costs of collection including reasonable attorney fees 10 SECURITY The Software creates a means for others to gain access to your computer Although we have taken commercially reasonable measures to prevent unauthorized persons from gaining access to your computer via the Software we cannot foresee or control the actions of third parties Therefore use of the Software will make you vulnerable to security breaches that you might not otherwise face and could result in the loss of your privacy or property You agree that GlobalSCAPE is not liable to you for security breaches resulting from your use of the Software or otherwise Use of secure passwords and keeping passwords confidential are not the responsibility of GlobalSCAPE or the Software 11 AUDIT You should retain Your authorization to use the Software at a specified level That level may be measured for example by the number of servers processors or users and may be set forth on your invoice or sales receipt You agree that on GlobalSCAPE s request you will certify in writing your compliance with the terms of this Agreement including your use of the Software only on or in connection with the number of computers and users licensed You further agree that GlobalSCAPE may during normal business hou
253. pon signing in select the Force Password Change check box To allow this user to access the Drop Off page select the Drop Off access enabled check box Refer also to the Register Internal Users as Verified setting on the Drop Off Portal Settings page To allow the user to send account invitations select the Allow account invitations check box You can also enable this globally on the Internal Settings page To allow the user to include Mail Express Reply links in messages select the Allow Mail Express Reply links check box You can also enable this globally on the Internal Settings page Click Save to create the account or click Cancel if you do not want to create the account Click Restore to restore the settings in the boxes to their last saved state 4 After you click Save the changes appear on the Internal User Management page Managing Drop Off User Accounts The Drop Off User Management page provides status and configuration options for all senders that are authorized to use of the package Drop off Portal On this page you can modify add and delete the accounts When you delete an account the account is marked as deleted in the database but is no longer visible in the account table in the interface Audit reports can still look up and reference deleted accounts You can have up to 25 000 active accounts The message options on the Drop Off page are only available for internal verified users If Drop Off users wa
254. ported SSL protocols However the list of allowed SSL Algorithms is limited to a set of stronger SSL 3 0 and TLS 1 0 algorithms As such clients that attempt to connect using SSL 2 0 may do so but must then must negotiate that the remainder of the SSL session be handled under SSL 3 0 or TLS 1 0 e The supported SSL protocols have been set using configuration item o SSLProtocol all e The allowable values for this item include o all o SSLv2 o SSLv3 o TLSv1 o SSLv2 SSLv3 e For more information on this setting refer to http tomcat apache org tomcat 6 0 doc apr html HTTPS e For information on higher security settings refer to the High Security Settings section below 130 Mail Express Security and SSL SSL Algorithms The supported SSL algorithms have been limited to the following SSL m Key Protocols Open Smideniirier Exchange Ephemeral SSLv3 TLSv1 DHE DSS AES128 SHA Diffie Hellman DSA AES 128 SHA1 Ephemeral SSLv3 TLSv1 DHE DSS AES256 SHA Diffie Hellman DSA AES 256 SHA1 EDH DSS DES CBC3 Ephemeral RSA RSA IDEA 128 SHA1 Ephemeral SSLv3 TLSv1 DHE RSA AES128 SHA Diffie Hellman RSA AES 128 SHA1 Ephemeral SSLv3 TLSv1 DHE RSA AES256 SHA Diffie Hellman RSA AES 256 SHA1 EDH RSA DES CBC3 Ephemeral SSLv3 TLSv1 RC4 MD5 RSA RSA RC4 128 MD5 SSLv3 TLSv1 RC4 SHA RSA RSA RC4 128 SHA1 e The SSL algorithm combinations using RSA for authentication will only be available when using an RSA key pair wi
255. press Setup 5 xi Choose New or Existing Database Choose whether to create a new database or use an existing database A Choose to create a new database if you would like the installer to create a new database for use by Mail Express Choose to use an existing database if one is already available and you would like to use it with this installation of Mail Express C Create a new database Use an existing database Nullsoft Install System v2 46 Click Use an existing database The Configure Database Server Connection Seitings page appears 28 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express Configure Database Server Connection Settings Specify the database connections settings and login credentials Database server host WIN YJ5VEE4JS4K Database server port 1433 V Database instance name MSSQLSERVER IV Database name MAILEXPRESS Authentication mode SQL Server authentication Windows authentication Login name Password Nullsoft Install Syste lt Back comei Provide the connection information e Database server host name 255 characters is the maximum length for a SQL Server hostname Database server port This option is disabled by default and the value defaults to 1433 the default SQL Server listener port When enabled the port value is required and must be between 1 and 65535 If you are not running the SQL Server Browser Service and not using the default port then you need to
256. press user e The credentials are not passed between the Add In and the Mail Express Server which is more secure j To configure Mail Express for Windows Kerberos authentication 1 Configure Active Directory 2 Configure Kerberos 3 Configure the Service Principal Names 4 Configure the Outlook Add In 1 Configure Active Directory To configure the Mail Express Server to use Windows Authentication launch the Mail Express Administration Web Site and navigate to the Active Directory page Complete the form as it pertains to your environment After configuring the settings on the Active Directory page make sure that the settings are accurate by completing the Test Configuration fields Test username Test user password and Confirm test user password and clicking Test Be sure to click Save to save your settings before leaving the page 2 Configure Kerberos If the Active Directory settings test was successful then proceed to the Internal Settings page select the Enable Single Sign On Kerberos check box complete the Single Sign On fields then click Save Refer to Configuring the Add In and Internal Portal for details of configuring Single Sign On 3 Configure the Service Principal Names Using the Windows setspn utility create Service Principal Names SPN which is necessary for Kerberos to function correctly for Mail Express The SPN is a name by which the Add In can uniquely identify the Mail Express S
257. press web portal is provided for users to exchange files using Mail Express outside of Outlook The web portal that appears depends on how the administrator has configured your default landing page https lt server_URL gt https lt server_URL gt dropoff or https lt server_URL gt internal To connect to the web portal 1 Open a web browser and navigate to the web address of the Mail Express Welcome page provided to you by the Mail Express administrator 173 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 2 If the Welcome page appears and displays icons with which to connect to the Drop Off portal or Internal Portal click the Drop Off Portal icon or the Internal Portal icon The selected portal page appears The options that appear depend on the administrator s configuration of the portal and the type of your account Otherwise your default landing page appears GlobalSCAPE Professional Services can customize this page for you Requesting Access to the Drop Off Portal If you need to use the Drop Off Portal to send documents using Mail Express on the Mail Express Welcome page you can request an account The request is sent to the Mail Express administrator To send file using the drop off page 1 Open a web browser and navigate to the web address of the drop off page https lt server_URL gt dropoff The login page appears Mail Express powered by gi balscare Welcome Sign in Help E
258. quirements and prerequisites below and ensure that they are met before installing Mail Express Ensure all Microsoft updates have been installed and the computer has been rebooted If all of the prerequisites are not met the installation will abort You can print this page of the help and check off the requirements as you verify that they are installed available Mail Express Server Requirements Prerequisites The table lists the system requirements prerequisites on the computer on which Mail Express Server is installed e For Outlook Add In system requirements refer to Outlook Add In Requirements Prerequisites below e For SQL Server 2008 R2 Express system requirements refer to SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Installation Requirements Prerequisites below These are the requirements that the installer verifies refer to the Microsoft link below for additional SQL Server system requirements e For SQL Server 2008 R2 system requirements refer to http www microsoft com download en details aspx id 12548 e Mail Express silently installs Java Runtime Environment JRE version 1 6 0 build 25 or later and Apache Tomcat version 6 0 32 web server you do not need to update or maintain these applications 15 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Mail Express Server Requirement Prerequisite Mail Express Server must be accessible from the Internet either directly or via the DMZ Gateway if applicable so that recipients can browse the attachment l
259. r User choice Default user choice to Managed v D Always TThe user will have the choice whether or not to include Mail Express Reply link it will be defaulted to include it on emails already managed by Mail Express Authentication Settings Basic Auth realm Mail Express Server Enable Single Sign On Kerberos Policy Settings Require Mail Express to manage attachments Always use Mail Express D Mail Express use not required D Use Mail Express based on the following policy E Manage embedded attachments El Enforce Rich Text conversion Perform file integrity check Behavior when Mail Express server is unavailable D Queue emails until Mail Express Server is available D Send emails via Outlook without Mail Express Allow sender to specify behavior Note When policy would otherwise indicate that a message be managed by Mail Express the Add in will require that the format of the message be changed from Rich Text to either HTML or plain text 2Note Files may be rejected by Exchange Server size limitations 3 Select the Add in services enabled check box If the Add In services enabled check box is cleared the Outlook Add In will not be able to connect to the Mail Express Server The Add In services enabled check box also controls whether the Authentication Settings and Policy Seitings are available 4 Select the Internal Portal enabled check box to allow Internal users to connect to the Internal Portal
260. r SkipbSQLServerCreateSchema DatabasePort lt port gt DatabaselnstanceName lt instance name gt DatabaseName lt database name gt New Installation Using an Existing Database and Database User This option installs the Mail Express Server and uses an existing database and database user on an external SQL Server database instance This option is only applicable when the Mail Express Server is not already installed Required Parameters Optional Parameters DatabaseType EXTERNAL ExternalDatabaseMode EXISTING AdminUsername lt username gt AdminPassword lt password gt AdminEmail lt email gt DatabaseServerName lt server gt AuthenticationType lt type gt LoginName lt usernames gt if AuthenticationType SQLSERVER LoginPassword lt username gt if AuthenticationType SQLSERVER S debug logfile lt file gt InstallDirectory lt path gt AttachmentDirectory lt path gt StartMenuGroup lt group gt SkipPrereqCheck SkipDBUtilFirewallUpdate SkipDesktopShortcut SkipStartService SkipSQLServerCreateSchema DatabasePort lt port gt DatabaselnstanceName lt instance nane gt DatabaseName lt database name gt 34 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express Reinstall This path will instruct the installer to reinstall the Mail Express Server software This path is only applicable when the Mail Express Server is already installed an
261. r This Connector may be found by searching for the text port 443 b Within the Connector definition change SSLProtocol TLSv1 to SSLProtocol all 3 Update the DMZ Gateway Protocol Handler configuration if this feature is being used 141 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 a Locate the Connector that defines the DMZ Gateway Protocol Handler This Connector may be found by searching for the text protocol com globalscape protocolhandler DMZProtocolHandler b Within the Connector definition change sslProtocols TLSv1 to sslProtocols SSLv2Hello SSLv3 TLSv1 4 Save the changes 5 Restart the Mail Express Server service e g Start gt Run gt services msc Using Anti Virus with Mail Express If you are using an anti virus AV application with Mail Express you should add an exclusion to the AV application to skip files with a gsb extension Most AV applications have some kind of real time scan feature that scans files when they are accessed Their user interface allows you to specify to scan files when writing to disk when reading from disk on network drives and or opened for backup When AV applications detect an issue they may clean it delete it or quarantine it To Mail Express the file will simply disappear it will appear to be deleted by an agent other than Mail Express The AV applications try to be smart about when they scan a file once they have scanned it they do not re s
262. r check box in the Upload X 509 certificate box browse to the location of the Base 64 encoded X 509 signed certificate that is to be used to validate the certificate chain A certificate in this format must begin with BEGIN CERTIFICATE and end with END CERTIFICATE Upload the Public Certificate of the Certificate Authority that signed the Public Certificate of the Exchange Server Typically this will be the Public Certificate of the Active Directory server 7 Ifthe Exchange Server requires authentication in the Authentication Settings area select the Use Exchange authentication check box then specify the username and password to authenticate Refer to Configuring Anonymous Access to Exchange and Configuring Authenticated Access to Exchange for more information 8 Inthe Email Settings area in the From address and the Reply to address boxes specify the email address used in the email message header when notification emails are sent from Mail Express If you are using authentication the From address ought to match the account used to authenticate 9 Optional In the Mailbox Settings area select the Monitor mailbox check box to monitor for returned mail messages i e bounced emails Returned mail notifications are sent to the internal sender specified in the From address In the Mailbox Type list specify either IMAP4 or POP3 then specify the Mailbox Port the defaults are IMAP over SSL 933 and POP3 over SSL
263. r is currently configured to connect to the database as a user with limited database privileges During upgrades the installer requires that the account used to connect to and upgrade the database have privileges to modify database objects In cases such as this you should specify alternate credentials for a database account with higher privileges such as an account with the db_ddladmin or db_owner database roles e f specified alternate credentials will be only be used by the installer to perform the upgrade The credentials in use by the Mail Express Server will not be modified 49 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 For Authentication mode use SQL Server authentication when connecting as the privileged user account When SQL Server authentication is selected you must specify the Database owner username and Database owner password for the privileged user account to use when connecting to the database Or you can use Windows authentication to use the active Windows user account when connecting to the database The active Windows user account is the account running the installer 7 Click Test if you want to test the connection to the database before continuing or click Upgrade which also tests the connection 8 If the Mail Express Server service is running you must stop the service before you can continue If a message appears asking if you want to stop the Mail Express Server service click Yes The Mail Express Server
264. r s configuration of the Drop Off Portal and the type of account 2 Inthe From box provide the sender s email address If the administrator requires all senders to be verified users the From box is completed for you and is not editable 3 Inthe To box provide the recipient s email address Multiple email addresses can be separated by commas The email addresses and number of recipients are validated against administrator defined values 4 Inthe Subject box provide a descriptive title for your email Here are the files is too generic and could get lost in multiple e mails Attached are the documents for Friday s Widget discussion is more descriptive and easier to identify in a search You are allowed up to 256 characters 5 Inthe Attachments area click Browse to select a file to attach You can only select one file at a time and cannot select entire directories You are limited to 10 attachments per send After 10 attachments have been added the Browse button is unavailable 6 Inthe Message box describe the purpose of the email The Message box allows up to 10248 characters You cannot use HTML tags to format the message 7 If CAPTCHA is displayed in the text box type the text in the CAPTCHA If CAPTCHA is not displayed the administrator did not select the check box in the Drop Off Portal Settings 8 Click Send o Ifthe To Subject or Message boxes are empty or if the CAPTCHA fails the send will fail and the CAPT
265. r s hostname Another check performed by the browser is verifying that the public certificate has been signed by a trusted certificate authority CA using the CA s own public certificate and private key pair Signing of public certificates is hierarchical in that a public certificate may be signed by a certificate authority and that CA s public certificate may have in turn been signed by another certificate authority and so on Browsers by default include a set of industry standard trusted CA s public certificates in a Trusted Certificate Authority list Additionally users may add to this list of trusted CAs When the browser checks the server s public certificate it traces up the signing hierarchy starting at the server s public certificate looking for a certificate authority that is in its trusted list Note that the above description is a gross generalization of Public Key Infrastructure and the TLS SSL protocol For more detailed information please refer to the following online articles e Attp en wikipedia org wiki Public_key infrastructure e Attp en wikipedia org wiki Transport_ Layer Security 135 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 What is an SSL Certificate Authority Certificate Chain In some cases a public certificate is signed by one or more intermediate certificate authorities CA For example a commercial certificate authority uses its own intermediate certificate to sign the server s publi
266. r to complete installation During installation the EULA is copied to the installation folder by default C Program Files GlobalSCAPE Mail Express license txt The text of the EULA is also below for your convenience GlobalSCAPE Mail Express version 3 End User License and Support Agreement This Software is licensed by GlobalSCAPE Inc GlobalSCAPE not sold You may use this Software only as described in this Agreement BY INSTALLING OR USING THE ENCLOSED SOFTWARE OR UTILIZING THE REGISTRATION SERIAL NUMBER YOU AGREE AND ARE SUBJECT TO THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS SE FORTH BELOW If you do not agree to the terms of this Agreement do not install the Software or use any registration serial number that was provided with the Software You may return the Software to the place of purchase for a refund if you have not used the registration serial number 1 SOFTWARE The capitalized term Software refers to the object code for the computer program known as Mail Express any updates supplemental code or programs provided to you by GlobalSCAPE with or in connection with Mail Express such as the user s manual and Help file any components any related media and printed materials and any related online or electronic documentation The Software includes three basic components the Server Program the Web Interface s and the Add In
267. ransport Layer Security TLS Redquires encryption so that the user password cannot be intercepted in transit 6 Next you will specify the user with which Mail Express will be authenticating on the Exchange server When Mail Express users send packages via the web portal Mail Express generates email on their behalf which it then directs to the Exchange server The ability to impersonate another user requires a special permission In Exchange 2003 this is the Send As permission In the Exchange console tree click Servers gt ADSERVER2003 then right click ADSERVER 2003 and click Properties The Properties dialog box appears fAosenven2009 Properties Diagroitics Logging Pubic Folder Roelens Dasi Gonera Locales Mailbox Management Directoy Access Policies Security Ful Textindming Monitering Group of uset names Domain Admins AD Q003SERVER Doman Adnans a Erterprice Admans AD 200GSERVER E nterpeine Admins g Even a Exchange Doman Servers AD 2003S ERVER Exchange Doma AK Bee Permissions for Mal Express Allow Dery Adristei ntormahor sioe o Create named properties in the information store C o o View inficemation store stahus o o Recerve As o o Send As z o Specs Peimitsors o o d Foe special permissions or for advanced sotiings Advanced check Advanced _ Advanced 7 Click the Security tab then click Add to specify the user account that the Mail Express server will be using to authen
268. refer to the DMZ Gateway in application help or online help To register DMZ Gateway 1 Open a web browser and log in to the Mail Express administration interface 53 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 2 Inthe left navigation pane under Configuration click General The General Configuration page appears 3 On the General Configuration page in the DMZ Gateway area click Register Licensing and Registration Mail Express License type Trial Register License state Active Client access licenses 50 Trial expiration date Fri January 7 2011 at 5 47 00 PM CST DMZ Gateway License type Trial Register License state Active Trial expiration date Fri January 7 2011 at 5 47 00 PM CST The Registration page appears DMZ Gateway Registration Registration Details Serial number Lost Serial Number Registered by Personal Information Any information provided will be used only for account verification locating lost serial numbers and similar account activities Email address Company name Street address City State province Postal zip code Country United States Proxy Details C Use system proxy settings No proxy Manually configure proxy Proxy Configuration HTTP Proxy Address Username Password Confirm password 54 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express In the Serial number box provide the serial number from your invoice If you do not have your invoic
269. ress Administration Login Page Username Password Remember me l Sign in Reset The Mail Express Status page appears and indicates that the portals are not yet configured Mail Express Status Component Status File Store e Database 4 2 MB used Current Activity Me eash iee Drop Off Portal Disabled Pick Up Portal Disabled Internal Portal Disabled Reply Porta Disabled Outlook Add In Disabled General Configuration Domain Name Disabled Exchange Mail Server Disabled DMZ Gateway Disabled Installed Software Version 3 2 0 build 7 69 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 3 On the Mail Express Status page enable configure Disabled items by clicking the relevant link in the navigation pane The Component column also links to the configuration pages On each configuration page if you make changes to the settings click Save to save your changes or click Restore to cancel changes If you navigate away from the page without clicking Save your changes are discarded e Drop Off Portal Enable the Drop Off portal if used and configure the Security Policy e Pick Up Portal Enable the Pick up portal e Internal Portal On the Internal Settings page enable the Internal portal if used enable Add In services and configure Internal User settings Basic Auth Kerberos and the Mail Express policy for Internal users e Reply Portal Enable the Reply portal if used and configure the Security Policy for th
270. rge logs older than I Send notification on database status Storage threshold Send notification when database is Send notification every See General Configuration page for notification recipient list Restore Save 3 To specify a purging schedule select the Purge audit and transaction logs check box then in the Purge logs older than boxes specify the age of logs to purge from 5 minutes to 99 years Database Purging cannot be enabled unless external and internal File Store Purging is enabled By default purging is turned off When turned on the default setting is 3 months 4 To specify whether to send email notifications regarding database status select the Send notification on database status check box selected by default then specify a Storage threshold what full to trigger the notification and how frequently to send notifications The frequency notifications must be more frequent than the purging schedule Note that the storage threshold is simply a threshold at which notifications are to be sent The default threshold is set to 10 GB 90 full every 30 minutes The storage threshold is not a hard limit that the Mail Express Server enforces it is a level at which you would like to retain Mail Express data If the threshold is exceeded Mail Express will still function as long as there is sufficient disk storage available A disk full or space unavailable message indicates that the disk space allocated to Ma
271. rithm Name Documentation included in the Security area of the Java API Documentation Note however that not all identifiers included in the standard name list will be supported by the JCE SSL Certificates The DMZ Protocol Handler is configured to use the same Public Certificate and Private Key used by the default HTTPS listener 143 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 144 Managing Administrator and User Accounts Managing Administrator and User Accounts On the Administrator Management page you can create modify and delete administrator accounts Administrator accounts are unique within the system and are not file transfer accounts you cannot use your administrator credentials to access any portal other than the administration portal You will receive an access denied message This page is the only interface by which administrators can be added or removed from the system To create Internal user accounts refer to Managing Internal User Accounts You can have up to 25 000 active accounts In Mail Express usernames must be unique across all user accounts Administrator s must take care when manually creating Administrator or Internal User Accounts so that the username does not conflict with an Active Directory account If an account is manually created with the same username as an Active Directory user then that user will be unable to connect to the server with the Outlook Add In usi
272. rmat PKCS 8 formatted encrypted private keys are not currently supported Log in with administrator privileges to the computer on which Mail Express Server is installed Navigate to the Mail Express configuration directory e g C Program Files GlobalSCAPE Mail Express conf 4 Name the files MailExpress crt and MailExpress key and paste them into the directory This will overwrite the default cert key pair Backups of these files are shipped with Mail Express in case you need to revert back named MailExpress Default crt and MailExpress Default key 5 Modify the configuration to use the new files e Using a text editor edit the lt Installation Directory gt conf server xml configuration file 133 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 e Locate the Connector that defines the default port 443 listener This Connector may be found by searching for the following text Deora Aas Ww e Change the SSLPassword setting for the Connector to the password used to encrypt the private key SSLPassword mailexpress e Alternatively if password protected was not used on the private key then it should read SSLPassword e If the DMZ Gateway is being used the SSLPassword setting must also be modified for the DMZ Gateway Protocol Handler connector This Connector may be found by searching for the following text protocol com globalscape protocolhandler DMZProtocolHandler 7 Restart Mail Express Server What if speci
273. rovide multiple email addresses separated by commas 4 Click Save to save your changes or click Restore to reset the boxes to their previous setting If you navigate away from the page without clicking Save your changes are discarded 73 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Configuring Active Directory Authentication On the Active Directory Settings page you can configure Mail Express s Active Directory settings When configured to use Active Directory Outlook Add In users and Internal users accessing the Drop Off Portal or Internal Portal may log in using their existing Active Directory domain account credentials When users initially log in an internal user account will be created within the Mail Express Server that corresponds to the Active Directory account This allows Mail Express administrators to further customize the user account as it pertains to the Mail Express system To use the Single Sign On SSO capability of Mail Express you must also configure AD authentication Mail Express logs all information regarding AD configuration changes made within the Administration Portal including the administrator performing the modification the time and date of modification and the Active Directory settings after modification If a manually created Internal user account has a username that matches a username in the defined set of Active Directory user accounts Mail Express will only authenticate against the manually created user acc
274. rs and with reasonable prior notice request and gain access to your premises for the limited purpose of conducting an inspection to determine and verify your compliance with this Agreement The inspection will be conducted no more than once per year and ina manner not intended to disrupt your business and will be restricted in scope and duration to that reasonably necessary to achieve its purpose 12 TERMINATION This Agreement terminates if you fail to comply with its terms and conditions If your Agreement terminates you must destroy all copies of the Software Termination of this Agreement shall not release you from any liability which at the time of termination has already accrued or which thereafter may accrue with respect to any act or omission before termination or from any obligation which is expressly stated in this Agreement to survive termination The provisions in Sections 6 7 9 12 13 15 16 17 and 19 shall survive the termination of this Agreement 197 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 13 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY CONFIDENTIALITY You acknowledge that you have only the limited non exclusive right to use and copy the Software as expressly stated in this Agreement and that GlobalSCAPE retains title to the Software and all other rights not expressly granted You agree not to remove or modify any copyright trademark patent or other proprietary notices that appear on in or with the
275. rtificate of the of the Certificate Authority that signed the Exchange Server s Public Certificate typically this is the Public Certificate for the Active Directory server Because the Client module accepts Exchange users we want to ensure that the Use Exchange authentication check box is selected In the illustration the Exchange user is mail express dev globalscape com With this configuration the From address and Reply to address will be used in messages generated by the Mail Express system The From address will also be used in the SMTP transfer with Exchange after authentication and must reflect the mailbox for the user specified in the Username box You can set the Reply to address to whomever the administrator wants to monitor those messages 93 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Exchange Configuration Host Settings Host dev globalscape com Port 587 M Connect using SSL M Always trust certificates from Exchange server Trusted Certificate Authority CA Certificate des version v3 Subject CN smtp gmail com O Google Inc L Mountain View ST California C U5 Signature Algorithm SHALWItTHRSA OID 1 2 840 113549 1 1 5 Key Sun RSA public key 1024 bits modulus 39345710834174517959174107497510743 107491751734 01734975971 034 71294 7190651907429167 490127412 074912 74129074124 308934 5710834174 5179591 74107497510743 107491751734 0173497 ha Upload X 509 TN certificate _Browse Authentication
276. run Microsoft Office 2010 Primary Interop Assemblies e Installer Name Microsoft Office 2010 Primary Interop Assemblies Redistributable e Installer File 02010PIA msi e Download Page http www microsoft com downloads en details aspx FamilyID 938fe8ad 583b 4bd7 a345 23250dc15855 Note The download file is named PlARedist exe The 02010PIA msi installer file will be extracted from this executable when run Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Tools for Office Second Edition Runtime build 8 0 50727 940 e Installer Name Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Tools for Office Second Edition Runtime build 8 0 50727 940 x86 e Installer File vstor exe e Download Page http www microsoft com downloads en details aspx FamilyID 8315654b adae 4108 b7fc 186402563f2b amp displaylang en Microsoft Visual Studio Tools for the Microsoft Office System version 3 0 Runtime and Service Pack 1 Note that this prerequisite consists of 2 separate installers The main installer and a service pack upgrade installer Both are detailed below e Microsoft Visual Studio Tools for the Microsoft Office System version 3 0 Runtime o Installer Name Microsoft Visual Studio Tools for the Microsoft Office system version 3 0 Runtime x86 o Installer File vstor30 exe o Download Page http www microsoft com downloads en details aspx FamilyID 54eb3a5a 0e52 40f9 a2d1 eecd7a092dcb amp displaylang en e Microsoft Visual Studio Tools for the Microsoft Office Syste
277. s cceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeneeseeeeeseaesesaaeseeeeseaeeesaeeseaeeeeaees 18 Authentication Options for Connections to SQL Server 2008 R2 cccccccsseceeesseeceeseneeeeseaeeeesesaeeeeseaas 20 Internal SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Instance cccccccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeecaaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeneeseaees 21 TGP IP SettingS ssi tvcies ta atin Mined dees Wide a ie Ln ae ei idaaiaaaa 21 Additional Service Dependency ccccccsceceeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeseaeeesaaeedeaeeseeeeesiaeeseeeeseneesaas 21 External SQL Server 2008 R2 Instance cccccceeceeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeeaeseeeeeceaeeesaaeedeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaaeeeeneeseaees 22 Installing Mail Express Server cccccceesceceeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeaeeesaaeeeeaaeseeeeesaeeesaaeeseaeeseeeeccaeeesaeeeeneeseaees 23 Silent Installation of Mail Express Server ccccceceeeceeeeeeeeseeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeceaeeesaaeseeeeeseeeesaeseeaeseeeeesaas 33 Deploying the Outlook Add In ceccccecceesceceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeneeceaeeesaaesdeaaesaaeeeceaeeseaaesgeaeesseeeesaeeseaaesseneesenees 37 Installing the Outlook Add In cccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeaaeeeeeeeceaeeecaaeeecaaeseeeeesaaeeesaaeegeaeeseeeeesaeeesaesseneeseeees 37 File Configuration Locations ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeedeaeeseaeeeseaeeseaaeseeeeeseeeesnaeeseeeseeneees 41 Running the MSI Instalati siii aa ei ae aeaa hie aa a aa ali ate a
278. s 0 ccccccccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaee scenes ceaeeeseaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeseeeeess 104 Table of Contents Custom URLs for the Drop Off and Internal Portal cc cccceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeeeeneeess 105 Enabling the Pick Up Portal cis shit tan E tae en alienated a 106 Enabling and Configuring the Reply Portal ccccceeeececeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeesaaeeseeeeseeeeesaaeeeeaeeeeeeeesaas 107 Configuring the DMZ Gateway COonnection cccccccsseceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 109 Advanced DMZ Gateway Configuration Options c ccceccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeteeeees 110 Viewing and Managing FeS ersat eis E A E en teeciel eels eA Ay ei ate A 111 Viewing and Managing Package eccccceceestceeeenneeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeneaas 113 Viewing Mail Express Status 0 ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeecaaeessaaeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeaaeseeeeescaeeesaeeseaeeseaees 115 Logging Mail Express Server Activities 0 ieee cece eee terete eae eae seae see eeeeneeeseeeseeeseeeesaeeeneeenaeeaee 116 Installation LOGGING ese eeir aa raa E EAEAN EAE PRAE AEE AEAEE O ANA EEEE RA 116 Mail Express Server Diagnostics Logging cccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeecaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeaaeeeeneeeaas 116 Mail Express Server Service Diagnostics Logging cc ccccceeeeeeece
279. s 7 Edt HK Remote IP addressies AT FETE SIT SO St Set seat set 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 x owa j e _ 3 Under Use these local IP addresses to receive mail the Local IP address es and Port appear Verify that the receive connector is listening on port 587 The actual port number is not significant as long as the Mail Express Server is configured to use the same port If necessary click Add or Edit to add or change the listening port then click OK 4 Click the Authentication tab 87 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Chent ADSERVER Properties xj General Network Authentication Permission Groupe Speafy which seourty mecheriems are avellable for Incoming connections Transport Layer Seourty TLS I Enable Doman Securty Mutual Ath TLS IV Bape Authentication J7 Offer Basic authentication only wher stating TLS I Exchange Server authentication F kgegated Windows authertcation I Etematy Secured for example wth IPsec Co J ow j e 5 Select the following check boxes then click OK e Basic Authentication The most important requirement of this module is that it allows basic authentication e Transport Layer Security TLS Requires encryption so that the user password cannot be intercepted in transit e Offer Basic Authentication only after starting TLS Ensures that the client s password is sent encrypted 6 Click the Permission Groups tab x General Network Authenticati
280. s TOC Introduction to Mail Express Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by GlobalSCAPE Go gt 4X http help globalscape com help mailexpress IntroductionToMailExpress htm Ele Edit view Favorites Tools Help iy Favorites 3 E Pay 120 amp YGlo st GSH GSnet Gswiki Hel Pandora Radio Listen to Fr Introduction to Mail Expr X oO 00 4 a Show You are here Home gt Introduction to Mail Express Introduction to GlobalSCAPE Mail Express GlobalSCAPE Mail Express allows you to send and receive e mail file attachments to recip the load on your mail server and without manually creating or maintaining FTP accounts Ma 5 If you want to see the topic with the TOC click Show The URL will update in the address bar and the TOC will appear to the left of the topic 189 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Mail Express 2 2 Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by GlobalSCAPE Go 5 XK 11S http shelp globalscape com help mailexpress index htm IntroductionToMailExpress htm File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Jr Favorites 3 EjPay 120 W co s GSH GSnet GSWiki Hel 98 P Pandora Radio Listen to Fr Mail Express v2 2 ea B index E Aa You are here Home gt Introduction to Mail Express Introduction to GlobalSCAP GlobalSCAPE Mail Express allows you to
281. s When using the standard port users will not have to specify a port value in the browser s URL if they are manually typing the URL to connect to a portal such as the Drop Off portal e Using a non standard client HTTPS listener port will require either adding the port to the General Configuration Hostname so that the port is included on links generated by the Mail Express system or the networking infrastructure must be configured using port forwarding to redirect external HTTPS traffic to the configured Client HTTPS port on the DMZ Gateway computer 6 Click Save to save the changes or click Restore to return to the previous settings If the connection to DMZ Gateway was lost e g due to network errors you can click Reconnect or wait 30 seconds for the Mail Express Server to automatically try to reconnect Advanced DMZ Gateway Configuration Options For security communications routed through the DMZ Gateway are denied access to the Administration portal Internal User portal and Outlook Add In web service interfaces by default Typically communications to these portals should only come from the internal corporate networks This functionality allows limiting access to portals similar to the functionality provided by a web application firewall Additionally authentication that takes place through the DMZ Gateway will not authenticate against Active Directory LDAP if applicable This provides an additional layer of security against brute
282. s and FATAL log messages Messages include the time and date of the event an indication of the severity of the event and a message describing the event When you log in to the Mail Express Server Mail Express displays the Mail Express status In general the flag colors indicate OK green Warning orange or Fatal red A red flag can indicate that the component is not yet configured misconfigured or otherwise not functioning as expected You can also view reports for more information Mail Express Status Component Status Dae 304 Files stored File Store 11 0 GB used Disk 92 full Database 23 9 MB used 1 full ey ee 1 Webserver request Current Activity 2 k aii wy 0 50 Licenses in use Drop Off Portal 0 Uploads Pick Up Portal 0 Downloads Internal Portal 0 Uploads Reply Portal 0 Uploads Outlook Add In 0 Transfers General Configuration Domain Name Exchange Mail Server DMZ Gateway Installed Software Version localhost mail globalscape com Disabled 3 2 0 build 7 Last updated July 20 2011 11 03 57 AM CDT The Mail Express Status page displays status of the following components e File Store Number and size of files stored and percentage of disk used An orange warning flag indicates that the file store limit has been reached or exceeded A red flag indicates that the file store is not valid or not writable To adjust the allowed disk space refer to Configuring File Storage e Database Connectivi
283. s click Reply Settings The Reply Portal Settings page appears Reply Portal Settings General Settings Portal enabled Security Policy Require CAPTCHA to send File size limit Link expiration File type exclusions Valid recipient domains Restore To enable the Reply Portal select the Portal enabled check box 4 To require reply users to use CAPTCHA select the Require CAPTCHA to send check box CAPTCHA Completely Automated Public Turing Test To Tell Computers and Humans Apart is a program that displays a test that humans can pass but a computer is not likely to such as reading a series of distorted letters and typing the same letters into a box thus limiting the amount of spam emails 5 To limit the total file size of one transfer select the File size limit check box then specify the file size in the boxes from 1 KB 2 GB The default is 20 GB 6 To expire download links select the Link expiration check box then specify the duration If no link expiration is defined packages will be purged based on the file retention policy When you modify the file expiration value you are modifying this setting for all future transfers Packages that are active within the system retain the expiration value in place at time that they were created The default is 2 weeks Link expiration can be from 1 hour to 99 years 107 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 7 To exclude specific file types from being
284. s Attach File button a surrogate file is attached rather than the actual file This surrogate file has the same name as the file being attached except that it ends ina mailexpress suffix This surrogate file is a simple text file that contains the path to the actual file on the file system Attaching files with the Mail Express Attach File button provides the following benefits over Outlook s standard Attach File button Large emails can be attached more efficiently with Mail Express because a surrogate file is always small When attaching large files through Outlook s standard Attach File button Outlook may appear to hang while it is processing the attachment and writing it to the file system in several places The Mail Express Attach File button eliminates this delay f the Exchange administrator has defined attachment size limits in Exchange then Outlook will complain with a message The attachment size exceeds the allowable limit when attaching files that exceed these limits using Outlook s Attach File button The Mail Express Attach File button does not suffer from this problem i If a file is attached via the Mail Express Attach File button the email will be managed by Mail Express regardless of the policy settings It is assumed that since you are using the Mail Express button you want to use Mail Express to manage the email Outlook 2010 similar Mail Express options appear in Outlook 2003 and 2007 gl W 4
285. s BS Internet Explorer cannot display the webpage am amp J Pager Safety Tose Internet Explorer cannot display the webpage Diagnose Connection Problems More information If this occurs it may be due to the SSL 2 0 protocol being enabled in Internet Explorer When this option is enabled Internet Explorer will initially attempt to connect to the server using an SSLv2 format message When using high security settings the SSLv2 protocol is disabled which results in the server not responding to the request The issue may be resolved on the client side by modifying Internet Explorer configuration or on the Server side by not using the high security settings Each resolution is detailed below Alternative 1 Modify Client Configuration Disable SSL 2 0 support within the Internet Explorer options 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools gt Internet Options The Internet Options dialog box appears 2 Click on the Advanced tab then scroll down to the Security section 140 Mail Express Security and SSL Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced i Settings Do not save encrypted pages to disk C Empty Temporary Internet Files folder when browser is cle Enable DOM Storage Enable Integrated Windows Authentication C Enable memory protection to help mitigate online attacks Enable native XMLHTTP support O Use SSL 2 0 Use SSL 3 0 Use TLS 1 0 Warn about cert
286. s Server are free from malicious software If slower than normal uploads are observed ensure your antivirus software is properly configured 16 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Installation Requirements Prerequisites If you are installing SQL Server 2008 R2 Express available in the Mail Express Server installer for evaluation purposes ensure that the computer meets the requirements prerequisites in the table below When you choose to install SQL Server 2008 R2 Express with the Mail Express Server installer the installer will verify that the proper prerequisites requirements are available before installing If the requirements are not met the installation will abort Listed in the table below are the requirements that the installer verifies refer to the Microsoft link below for additional SQL Server system requirements If you are connecting to an external SQL Server 2008 R2 database refer to the SQL Server 2008 R2 requirements SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Requirement Prerequisite Microsoft NET Framework v3 5 1 SP1 Microsoft Installer Service 4 5 or later included in Windows 2008 for Windows 2003 download from Microsoft Download Center The following privileges must be enabled for the administer account running the installer e SeBackupPrivilege e SeDebugPrivilege e SeSecurityPrivilege Installation temporarily requires up to 3 6 GB of free space on the system drive Minimum
287. s certificate select the SSL key is password protected check box then provide the password in the SSL key password and Confirm SSL key password boxes 4 Click Save to save the changes on the server or click Restore to cancel the changes You must restart the Mail Express Server service before the new certificate key takes effect Manually Configuring SSL Certificate Key Options You can specify an SSL certificate and key on the General Configuration page in the administration interface as described above If you want to paste the certificate and key files into the Mail Express configuration directory and configure the certificate key options manually refer to the procedure below e The default public certificate file is lt Installation Directory gt conf MailExpress crt o The default public certificate is an X 509 PEM encoded 2048 bit RSA certificate with a SHA1 digest e The default private key file is lt Installation Directory gt conf MailExpress key o The default private key is a PEM encoded 3DES encrypted 2048 bit RSA private key To configure SSL certificate key options manually 1 Obtain an appropriate public certificate private key pair signed by a trusted certificate authority e The public certificate and private key may be either RSA or DSA based e The public certificate and private key should be placed in separate files and must be PEM encoded e If an encrypted private key is specified it must be in traditional PEM encoded fo
288. s s 97 Configuring File Storage cccccseeeseeeeeeeee 95 Configuring Mail Express for Windows Kerberos AUthentiCation serrin a 77 configuring Mail Express Server 69 Configuring Message Options cceeee 165 Configuring Microsoft Exchange Server Communication cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaees 78 Configuring the Default Landing Page 72 Configuring the DMZ Gateway Connection 109 Configuring the Internal Web Portal 101 Configuring the Reply Portal c ceeee 107 Configuring the Web Browse sseeee 184 connect to Mail Express Server 130 164 165 170 connected to the Exchange 06 164 170 Connecting to Mail Express Server 164 Connecting to the Web Portal cceeee 173 CONNECTIONTIMEOUT eee ee eeeeeeeeetteeeeenaeeeeeeaee 134 connects to the Mail Express 169 GP EEES TT T A TEEN 15 lo ET iL E PEE E TE T 147 149 Create Report ceceeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 151 CW ATE E ANE E E T AT 130 134 OSV E AT E A ET 151 Current ACtIVItY aie aerie igean arste eee erensceeese 115 CUSTOM WR vs 22 ie loeccceteeee abe adeeniadtean eee ees 105 Custom URLs for Dropoff and Internal Portal 105 Customizing Mail Express Pages and Notifications E E A E 117 D Data PUGET eioan A 156 Database moi a O aR 97 Database Configuration c ccccccseeeeseeeeees 97 Database Initialization Log
289. saeeeeeeeseaees 139 Alternative 1 Modify Client Configuration cccccccseeceeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeaeeseeeesaaeeesaaeeeeeeesaas 140 Alternative 2 Modify Server Configuration ccsccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeseaeeseeeesaeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaas 141 Using Anti Virus with Mail Express ceccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeteaeeeeeseaeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeaeeesenaaees 142 The DMZ Protocol Handlers 2 4iccsait decid aie OEEO REKE a een etd cee AK 143 SSE PlOlOCOIS eezesetesees TE ET A tacos Ot lynne blag bial E TA caine EAE 143 SSL AIGOFtHMS evasive ower ei ai ie nd laden Cavern 143 SOL Certificates nien iaa aii SEAT ea ieee Wa i ee a aa 143 Managing Administrator and User ACCOUNTS ccscssteresseneeeeesseeeeneesseeeneenseneseneeneenneees 145 Managing Internal User ACCOUNTS asresten A REE E TEE tude AER EAE AA EAE SETTRA A 147 Managing Drop Off User Accounts cccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeecaaeeeeaaeedeeeeceaeeesaaeseeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeseneeess 149 Auditing and Reporting Mail Express Activity 0 cccccssscessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeneeeeeees 151 Generating Reports of Attachment Activity cccccccecseeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeseeeseeneess 151 Detailed Activity Report ie ean a E E AN SEE ATES RA AERE EEE ESSERE tote 153 Viewing Configuration History cccccceccseeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaeeceeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeeseaaeseeeeseaeeeeaeeseaeeeea
290. sage appears that the file is invalid On the File Management page a table displays details of the files currently on the Mail Express Server within a date range The Start Date defaults to 1 day prior to the current date and time and the End Date defaults to the current date and time Package details include e File s File s in the file e Sender Email address of the person who sent the file e Recipient s Email address of the person who received the file e Upload Time Date and time when the file was uploaded to the Mail Express Server e Package ID Unique identifier used to track the file You can filter the list of files by Package Filename Sender Recipients or Source 111 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 To manage files 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under System Information click File Management The File Management page appears File Management Search Criteria Start Date 02 07 2011 fz 3 f PM End Date 04 08 2011 A 3 04 PM Search By Sender v global Exact Match Search Reset Select all deselect all Delete selected files File s Sender Recipient s Upload Time Package ID 04 01 2011 02 56 18 pluggy 03 31 2011 12 57 30 lt jo globalscape com gt PM e To search for files o To filter data by Upload Time specify the Start Date and End Date 12 00 AM equals midnight of the previous day o To search for data
291. seeeeees 37 Internal Sender User Details 0 eeeeeee 147 Internal User Management 147 Internal Web Portal ccccccceseees 72 101 177 Internet Explorer cccceeeseeeeeeeees 15 183 188 Internet Options ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteneeteees 139 invalid Certificate ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 130 IP 154 157 195 IP addres Snn naa a a 71 154 157 J J p n se niaior et areenide ie aay 183 NAV e A E E EA EAE E EEA cerned bate 15 Java Runtime Environment 000200008 15 23 Java SCript itie eee iene 15 JR Ei te tae lo etait keaton 15 23 K keepAlive TIMCOUt ceceeeeeeeesteeeeeeees 130 134 KOSCOM M AEE 117 202 L Language teiiscnaeeee ie tha edieliadienieaedeneed 183 Language Options cccesceeeseeeeteeeeteeeeeeeees 183 Launch the Mail Express Server n 69 Licensing the Outlook Add IN seeeeeeee 53 INKS a a a a 165 188 Local SettingS cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneeeeeeeees 169 Local System eneeeeeseeeseeesresersssrrssrrssrrssnnssrnees 23 lOO EE se ET E RE E E EA 116 rove i A EE rere et rete coer ETET 164 Log On ACCOUNT sa atane eaves 23 lOQGING ONAA eve ea atte oa T 116 Logging in to Mail Express Server 0008 70 OQ TT ONTE AERA A Ae O S a ea eel te 164 Login Attempt cic ee tie ee ee 156 LoginAttempt cise ive tata tel eee 156 LOGOut H iesriee at aie ia ead 156 Lost PASSWOIGC
292. send and re reliably and securely while reducing the load on your r can send files as an add in to Microsoft Outlook with s process sets up temporary user accounts assigns home transactions expires old temporary accounts and finall Installing Mail Express Q Administering Mail Express Configuring Mail Express for Use with Micr Auditing Sending Files with Mail Express B Picking Up Files Troubleshooting Mail Express version 2 2 EULA When you send a file using Mail Express the system ge pair The Mail Express administrator can configure the i Express Server to download their files One authenticat other requires the recipient to type in a temporary user Done 6 Copy the URL from the address bar to paste into an email or document In Firefox right click in the frame then click This Frame gt Open Frame in New Tab In Safari right click in the frame then click Open Frame in New Tab The URL for the topic appears in the address bar of the new tab GlobalSCAPE Support Center For fast answers to most questions visit the GlobalSCAPE Help Center Our Customer Service team can answer your questions about software activation and registration or help with order problems If you need technical assistance with your software please submit your question to the Technical Support team GlobalSCAPE also offers numerous self help resources The GlobalSCAPE User Forum is a great place to find i
293. sername that the Add In will use to authenticate with the Mail Express Server if the LOGINTYPE is MANUAL MEPASSWORD The Mail Express password that the Add In will use to authenticate with the Mail Express Server if the LOGINTYPE is MANUAL INSTALLLOCATION The path to the folder where the Outlook Add In will be installed This defaults to Yuserprofile Application Data GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin FILESTORELOCATION The path to the folder where the Outlook Add In will temporarily store attachments for emails that it is processing This defaults to userprofile Local Settings Application Data GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Outlook Addin It is possible to install the Add In silently without providing any installation arguments In that case the default values mentioned in the table above are used In this case end users will need to provide their connection information manually in Outlook so that the Add In knows how to connect and authenticate with the Mail Express Server Alternatively an administrator can deploy the registry settings that the Add In uses Refer to Connecting to Mail Express Server for more information about manual configuration in Outlook Generating the Installation Script Use the Mail Express Server Administration Site s Add In Installer page to generate the Add In installation batch file script with the appropriate installation parameters Under the Outlook Add In Installation Script section specify the
294. setting is mainly used for debugging purposes Default Disabled by default Example SkipSQLServerSettings SkipSQLServerCreateDB Description For installation paths where the installer would normally create the database this setting will instruct the installer to skip the database creation This setting is mainly used for debugging purposes Default Disabled by default Example SkipSQLServerCreateDB SkipSQLServerCreateDBUser Description For installation paths where the installer would normally create the database user this setting will instruct the installer to skip the database user creation This setting is mainly used for debugging purposes 60 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express e Default Disabled by default e Example SkipSQLServerCreateDBUser SkipSQLServerCreateSchema e Description For installation paths where the installer would normally initialize the database schema this setting will instruct the installer to skip initialization of the database schema This setting is mainly used for debugging purposes e Default Disabled by default e Example SkipSQLServerCreateSchema SkipSQLServerUninstall e Description By default the uninstaller will remove the internal evaluation SQL Server 2008 R2 Express database server instance if it is present This option provides a way to instruct the uninstaller to leave the database server instance on the machine e Default Disabled by default e Example S
295. sitive Do not use an Active Directory AD username as the Mail Express administrator account as this may cause later collisions between internal Mail Express account s and AD accounts e Inthe Password and Confirm Password box provide a password 6 128 characters to use when administering and monitoring Mail Express Server The password is case sensitive should be between 6 and 128 characters and must contain at least three of the following types of characters uppercase letters lowercase letters numbers special characters e g If the password does not meet complexity requirements an error message appears Choose and type the password carefully if you do not know your password at initial login you will not be able to log in and will have to uninstall and then reinstall the application After you log in to the server you will have the opportunity to change the password and to create other administrator accounts e Inthe Email Address box provide the email address that will receive Mail Express administration email notifications 11 Click Next The Choose Database Server page appears 27 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 ZJ GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup g Choose Database Server Choose the type of database server to use with Mail Express A Choose whether to use an existing SQL Server or to install an evaluation database server Use an existing SQL Server or SQL Server Express Install SQL Ser
296. sons Embargoed and restricted countries currently include but are not limited to Cuba Iran North Korea Syria and Sudan In addition to other restrictions described in this section you may not use the Software or export the Software to any destination where you know or have reason to know that the Software may be used in connection with the proliferation of nuclear chemical or biological weapons or missiles You shall indemnify and hold GlobalSCAPE harmless in connection with any breach of this Section T 16 NO WARRANTIES TO THE E SUPPORT SERVICES ARE PROVID IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR AW REQUIRES A WARRANTY ENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW THE SOFTWARE AND ANY D AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR LIMITATION HE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY URPOSE QUALITY PERFORMANCE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IF APPLICABLI HE REQUIRED WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO NINETY 90 DAYS FROM YOUR HC ILE Ol COM ONE H OFTWARE COMPUTER PROGRAMS ARE INHERENTLY COMPLEX AND TH OFTWARE MAY NOT BE FRE F ERRORS THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED WITH ALL FAULTS AND TH NEIRE SRESK As Oy sALEshACTORY OUATIMG PERE ORMANCH AC CURACY PANDRE ERORE SAVIO GLOBALSCAPE DOES NO AAKE ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY REPRESENTATION OR ENDORSEMENT TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY WHATSOEVER WITH REGARD TO ANY DATA CAPTURED TRANSFERRED ACCESSED OR SHA
297. specify the port Database instance name This option is enabled by default and the value defaults to MSSQLSERVER When enabled the instance name is required and must be between 1 and 128 characters If you have not specified a port but are running the SQL Server Browser service then you need to specify the database instance name so that the browser service can be queried for the correct port MSSQLSERVER is the default instance name for an SQL Server 2008 R2 installation Authentication mode Use SQL Server authentication when connecting as the privileged user account which is the default When SQL Server authentication is selected you must specify the username and password for the privileged user account to use when connecting to the database When Windows authentication is selected the installer will use the active Windows user account when connecting to the database The active Windows user account is the account running the installer Login name and password The credentials Mail Express is to use to log in to the database When Windows authentication is selected these fields are disabled Optional To verify that Mail Express will be able to connect to the database using these settings click Test a If the connection is successful click OK to dismiss the success message b If the connection fails click OK to dismiss the error message and then verify that you have entered the configuration correctly Click Install
298. ss Server in the location specified during installation in a unique folder for each email not on your SMTP server Such as Microsoft Exchange The Add In stores information about emails that it is processing in an individual workspace by default in userprofile Local Settings Application Data MailExpress The Mail Express administrator configures message sending options on the Mail Express server You can configure more strict options in Outlook for all messages or for specific messages Refer to Configuring Message Options for details If you attempt to send a package larger than 25 GB a prompt appears informing you to decrease the size and try to send again That is if you attach multiple files to an email and the total size is more than 25 GB you will have to remove some of the attachments and send them separately Sending the email can fail in the following situations Offline mode Messages are stored in the outbox until Outlook is online and the Add In connects to the Mail Express server Loss of connectivity to the Mail Express server Interrupted uploads due to loss of connectivity to the Mail Express Server are continued from the point at which they were stopped when connection to the server is re established Insufficient disk space The Add In will receive a FileSystemError response from the server and the Add In will treat this as an unrecoverable error Refer to What is This Recover Email for more information
299. steeeeeenaes 183 Citi iiiitine eri era kE EA 147 149 email In URG ascetic eee ete eee ete 105 Email Message Toolbar ccsseeeeesteeeeenees 161 Email Settings a0 t4 04cieiea ean ad 78 Email Template Srno a 117 Enable CAPTCHA dialog cccccceeeeeeseeeeees 98 enable the SSLV2 ccessceseeeseteeeeteeeeeeeeees 139 Enablg conigli a 69 enableLookupS ccccceceeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeees 130 134 Enabling Active Directory Authentication 74 Enabling and Configuring the Drop Off Portal POIICY ANE T E E E AA IT 98 enabling the add in 168 Enabling the Pick Up Portal s an 106 RRO Ra a eal r aeea a te eee a aoe 116 OVEN V EWET 2 cee eeeecceceececeeeeeeeeneeceteeeeeeeenenaeees 116 EV6NIS is lteter nee annie 156 EXCRANGC a eoi idoine atarin pateeute si tome 15 78 154 Exchange Configuration cccsccesteeeseeeees 78 Exchange Servel u cccccccessssceeesssseeeesseteeens 78 171 Exchange Server 2008 css cesteeessteeeeseeeeees 15 Exchange Server 2007 css ceeeeeessteeteseeeees 15 externaluserinvitation Ntml ftl ee eeeeeeee 117 externaluserinvitation subject ftl eee 117 externaluserinvitation text ftl ce eeeeeeeeeeeee 117 F EERENS E E AAE 95 154 File Store Configuration 0 cccceceseeeeseeeeeees 95 File Upload Limit 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 183 FIIGEXPUISION in aiai 156 Filename ae iaaa 151 FilePUrg Erenn aia
300. stronger SSL 3 0 and TLS 1 0 algorithms As such clients that attempt to connect using SSL 2 0 may do so but must then negotiate that the remainder of the SSL session be handled under SSL 3 0 or TLS 1 0 The supported SSL protocols have been set using configuration item o sslProtocols SSLv2Hello SSLv3 TLSv1 The allowable values for this item are a comma separated list that includes 1 or more of the following identifiers o SSLv2Hello o SSLv3 o 6TLSv1 For information on higher security settings refer to Higher Security Settings SSL Algorithms The supported SSL algorithms have been limited to the same set of algorithms provided by the default HTTPS listener with the exception that the Idea based algorithm IDEA CBC SHA is not available for use with the DMZ Protocol Handler The SSL Algorithms have been constrained to strong types with the configuration item o ciphers SSL_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5 SSL_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA SSL_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA SSL_DHE_RSA_WITH_38DES_EDE_CBC_SHA SSL_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA Note Spaces were added above in the cipher list to allow text wrapping Do not use spaces in your cipher list o Fora list of standard algorithm names refer to the Java Cryptography Architecture Standard Algo
301. t but are running the SQL Server Browser service then you need to specify the 30 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express database instance name so that the browser service can be queried for the correct port MSSQLSERVER is the default instance name for an SQL Server 2008 R2 installation Authentication mode Use SQL Server authentication when connecting as the privileged user account which is the default When SQL Server authentication is selected you must specify the username and password for the privileged user account to use when connecting to the database When Windows authentication is selected the installer will use the active Windows user account when connecting to the database The active Windows user account is the account running the installer Privileged username and Privileged user password The privileged database account such as the sa account has permission to connect to the database server create users and create or alter users If the password does not meet complexity requirements an error message appears When Windows authentication is selected these fields are disabled Optional To verify that Mail Express will be able to connect to the database using these settings click Test e If the connection is successful click OK to dismiss the success message e Ifthe connection fails click OK to dismiss the error message and then verify that you have entered the configuration correctly Click
302. t of canned reports that you can use to generate reports of Mail Express attachment activities based on a specified date range You can generate the report in csv html pdf or rtf format The following report types are available e Total Outbound Activity Provides a report of the total number of files uploaded and total size of files uploaded by Outlook Add In senders 151 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Total Outbound Activity Jun 1 2010 00 00 To Jun 30 2010 00 00 Total Files Uploaded ll Total Size of Files Uploaded 138 68 KB e Sender Outbound Activity Provides a report of number of files uploaded and total size of files uploaded by each Outlook Add In sender Sender Outbound Activity Jun 1 2010 00 00 To Jun 30 2010 00 00 Sender karla lt km elobalscape com gt Total Files Uploaded Total Size of Files Uploaded e Total Inbound Activity Provides a report of the total files uploaded and total size of files uploaded for inbound activity via the Drop Off Portal Total Inbound Activity Jun 1 2010 00 00 To Jun 30 2010 00 00 Total Files Uploaded ll Total Size of Files Uploaded 138 68 KB For details of generating reports of configuration changes events or users refer to Viewing Configuration History Viewing Audit Event History and Viewing User History To view the database schema refer to Mail Express Database Tables To generate a Mail Express report 1 Log in to the
303. t s display name may be null dropoffUrl String the URL to the drop off page username String new account s username same as email address password String new account s password forcePasswordChange Boolean whether the new user will have to change the password the first time the account is accessed 121 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Template Name Template Files Data Model Package Upload e dropoffsendnotification htm ftl Portal Send Notification The email sent to e dropoffsendnotification text ftl recipients of packages sent from the Package Upload Portal e dropoffsendnotification subject ftl hasDownload Boolean whether the package has attachments hasAccountinvite Boolean whether the package has account invitations hasReplylnvite Boolean whether the package has reply invitations expiration java util Date when the package expires may be null subject String subject line from the sender s email packageLinkOnly Boolean whether to include links to all the files in the package individually or only the package pickup page senderCopy Boolean whether the sender wants a copy of the message delivered to the recipients like a CC message String sender s message accompanying the package sender EmailAddress the sender s email address recipientCount Integer the total number of To and Cc recipients packageLink String package access URL at
304. t was sent because it was sent erroneously or an external sender attempted to upload malicious files Package management allows you to expire packages that you do not want transferred into or out of the organization If you click a link for a package that has expired a message appears that the package is invalid On the Package Management page a table displays details of the packages currently on the Mail Express Server within a date range The Start Date defaults to 1 day prior to the current date and time and the End Date defaults to the current date and time Package details include e Package ID Unique identifier used to track the package e Expiration Date and time when the package will no longer be available for download e Sender Email address of the person who sent the package e Recipient s Email address of the person who received the package e Details tcons indicate whether the package contains files reply invitations and or account invitations When you place your cursor over the file icon a tool tip displays the number of files uploaded in the package You can filter the list of packages by Package Filename Sender or Recipient To manage packages 1 Log in to the Mail Express Server Administration Interface 2 Inthe navigation pane under System Information click Package Management The Package Management page appears Package Management Search Criteria Start Date 02 07 2011 PM End D
305. tachments list of Attachment s attachmentLengthSize Integer number of characters in the longest attachment length and unit attachmentTitleSize Integer number of characters in the longest attachment title attachmentLinkSize Integer number of characters in the longest attachment link accountLink String URL to activate account invitation accountMessage_HTML String account invitation message has HTML accountMessage_TEXT String account invitation message as ASCII replyAllLink String URL to reply to all recipients with uploads replyLink String URL to reply to the sender with uploads 122 Configuring the DMZ Gateway Connection Template Name Template Files Data Model Package Upload Send Confirmation The email confirmation sent to the sender detailing the transfer s files recipients dropoffsendconfirmation html ftl dropoffsendconfirmation subject ftl dropoffsendconfirmation text ftl accountinvites Boolean whether these recipients were sent an account invite or not expiration Date when the package expires may be null identifier String the package that was uploaded hasDownload Boolean whether the package has attachments hasAccountinvite Bboolean whether the package has account invitations hasReplylinvite Boolean whether the package has reply invitations recipientsHaveNames Boolean whether any of the recipients have a personal name or just email address
306. tcut to the Mail Express administration portal that typically occurs at the end of installation reinstallation and upgrade Default Disabled by default Example SkipDesktopShortcut SkipStartService Description Skips launching of the Mail Express Server Windows service that typically occurs at the end of installation reinstallation upgrade or database settings modification Default Disabled by default Example SkipStartService SkipSQLServerPrereqCheck Description Skips checking the prerequisites for installing the internal SQL Server 2008 R2 Express database software This setting is mainly used for debugging purposes Default Disabled by default Example SkipSQLServerPrereqCheck SkipSQLServerlnstall Description When the installer has been configured to use the internal SQL Server 2008 R2 Express database instance enabling this setting will instruct the installer to skip the actual installation of the SQL Server software This setting is mainly used for debugging purposes Default Disabled by default Example SkipSQLServerlnstall SkipSQLServerSettings Description When the installer has been configured to use the internal SQL Server 2008 R2 Express database instance enabling this setting will instruct the installer to updating the settings related to SQL Server that typically occur after installing the SQL Server software This setting only takes effect if the SQL Server install has not been skipped This
307. ted Every 5 minutes Mail Express determines whether to purge The date and time of the file purge is noted in the audit log as well as the number of files purged Mail Express logs all information regarding file store configuration changes including the administrator performing the action time and date of modification and which files were deleted On the File Store Configuration page you can manage data retention for all files that are uploaded and stored on Mail Express Server This page also allows you to configure available storage monitoring and alerts for the file store The file store path is displayed at the top of the page and cannot be changed D The file storage location is configured during installation and cannot be changed in Mail Express Server configuration If it is necessary to change the file storage location after installation please contact GlobalSCAPE Customer Service for assistance It is important to provide regular disk maintenance management of resources Mail Express administration requires a small amount of available disk space in order to service requests When the disk is full Mail Express may not function as expected Ideally you should separate the installation area from the storage area to avoid running out of temporary space Purging is actor based that is selecting the Purge files sent by Internal Users check box only purges files sent by internally defined users and the Purge files sent by Drop Off
308. th the Server Conversely the SSL algorithm combinations using DSA for authentication will only be available when using a DSA key pair with the Server Authentication Encryption MAC e The SSL Algorithms have been constrained to strong types with the configuration item o SSLCipherSuite ALL ADH SSLv2 EXPORT40 EXP LOW o For more information on the format of this setting refer to http www openssl org docs apps ciphers html CIPHER LIST FORMAT SSL Certificates The majority of browsers will issue a warning to users when navigating to a site that uses a self signed certificate Typically this behavior is undesirable As such it is highly recommended that the Mail Express Server be configured to use an alternate public key private key pair that has been signed by a trusted Certificate Authority Version 3 1 of Mail Express also supports certificate chaining e The public certificate is specified with the following configuration item o SSLCertificateFile catalina home conf MailExpressDefault crt e The private key is specified with the following configuration item o SSLCertificateKeyFile catalina home conf MailExpressDefault key e If the private key is encrypted then the password is specified with the following configuration item o SSLPassword mailexpress e If the private key is unencrypted the line should be removed e Both the public certificate and private key files must be in the PEM encoded format 131 Mail Expr
309. the calendar icon to select a date from a popup calendar In the Search By box leave it blank to search by all fields or click the list to search by IP Address or Modifier then provide the IP address or modifier username e Select the Exact Match check box to control how the value in the Search box is used If the Exact Match check box is selected the column data must match the search value exactly In the Resource Filter box leave it blank to search all resources or click the list to filter on a particular resource Database Drop Off Settings File Store General Active Directory Pick Up Settings Exchange or Web Services Settings Click Filter The report updates with your search and filter selections e Click Reset to clear the filter 154 Auditing and Reporting Mail Express Activity Configuration History Start Date 08709 2010 fal j2 oo AM gt End Date 08 09 2010 fl l2 o2 PM gt Search By ip Address z I Exact Match Resource Filter z Filter Reset Date IP Address Modifier gt Resource Modified 08 09 2010 01 45 29 PM 127 0 0 1 mailexpress Exchange 08 09 2010 01 44 45 PM 127 0 0 1 mailexpress Active Directory 08 09 2010 01 42 49 PM 127 0 0 1 mailexpress General 08 09 2010 01 42 28 PM 127 0 0 1 mailexpress Web Senices Settings 08 09 2010 01 42 27 PM 127 0 0 1 mailexpress Add In Settings 08 09 2010 01 42 15 PM 127 0 0 1 mailexpress Pick Up Settings 08 09 2010 01 40 41 PM 127 0 0 1 maile
310. the following protections e Mail Express uses HTTPS to secure all TCP IP communication channels The Mail Express Server includes a pre generated self signed public certificate private key pair used by the Mail Express Server to provide secure HTTPS communications for the various web interfaces and web services After installation you should install your own certificate before deploying Mail Express to the enterprise e The Mail Express Server provides a default HTTPS listener on port 443 e When licensed and enabled for operation with the DMZ Gateway the Mail Express Server also provides HTTPS communications through the DMZ Protocol Handler e When a limit defined by the administrator is reached the package is purged from the database After the package is purged if users attempt to access the package a message appears stating the file they are attempting to download is unavailable e You should also install anti virus protection on the server to monitor files being stored on the Mail Express server computer If a file is removed or quarantined by the anti virus software a user attempting to download the file receives a file unavailable prompt 129 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 i If you notice unusually slow upload behavior ensure the antivirus software is properly configured for use with Mail Express Configuring the Default HTTPS Listener Port 443 Mail Express communicates over the HTTPS protocol only HTTP wit
311. the maintenance operation to perform A 4n older version of GlobalSCAPE Mail Express is currently installed Select the operation you want to perform Upgrade Mail Express Uninstall Mail Express Nullsoft Install System 2 46 5 Click Upgrade The Database Upgrade Credentials page appears and indicates to which database it is connecting Z GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup i lol x Database Upgrade Credentials Specify the credentials to use when upgrading the database Fal The installer will upgrade the current Mail Express Server database MAILEXPRESS on the database server localhost MAILEXPRESS By default the credentials currently configured for use by the Mail Express Server will be used when upgrading However you may optionally specially an alternate account if the configured account lacks the necessary database administration privileges JV Use the configured Mail Express Server database credentials Authentication mode SOI Server authentication Windows authentication Database owner username allexpress1 Database owner password eeecccccccee Test Nullsoft Install System v2 46 coax ope ce 6 By default the current credentials are used when upgrading If you want to connect using an alternate account clear the check box and then specify the new credentials e The ability to specify an alternate set of database credentials is provided to handle the case in which Mail Express Serve
312. the same as the installer e InstallerOperations DATABASE IS e DatabaseServerName lt server gt debug logfile lt file gt DatabasePort lt port gt DatabaselnstanceNames lt instance nane gt DatabaseName lt database name gt AuthenticationType lt type gt LoginName lt username gt if AuthenticationType SQLSERVER LoginPassword lt username gt if AuthenticationType SQLSERVER 36 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express Deploying the Outlook Add In Listed below are different methods that you can use to install the Outlook Add In to multiple desktops across the enterprise The following are just general guidelines the scenario that works best for your organization may differ Deploying the Outlook Add In includes installing the Outlook Add In prerequisites based on Microsoft Office Version Methods for deploying the Add In include e Preferred method Silently install the prerequisites and the Add In In this scenario users are never asked to do anything to install the Add In Installation can be accomplished a variety of ways such as with a logon script or group policy e Silently install the prerequisites then ask users to run the Add In installer msi file from a network location e Silently install the prerequisites then ask users to run a batch file in a network location to install the Add In silently or with minimal user interaction using the installation argumen
313. ticate 8 With the user selected ensure that the Send As permission s Allow check box is selected while every other permission s check box is cleared 9 After granting the permission the SMTP service must be restarted so that it is aware of the changes LT ini Ele Action yew tep e SPOR CH gt a um Server Supports fi Started Akona Local System By Shed Hardware Detection Provides Rated ALANIK Local System By Serpe Mal Transfer Protocol SMTP Transports Rated Atomatic Local System Bp System Evert Notification Moriterss Started Autometic Local System d B rceyip NetBIOS Helper Provides s Started Aboma Local Service z 92 Configuring and Administering Mail Express Server Configuring Mail Express for Authenticated Access After you have configured the Exchange Server for authenticated access you must configure Mail Express to access the Client module that you defined above 1 On the Mail Express Exchange Configuration page in the Host box provide the Exchange Server domain and in the Port box specify port 587 If you enabled encryption in Exchange select the Connect using SSL check box then do one of the following e Select the Always trust certificates from Exchange Server check box and don t upload a file This option is useful for testing but is less secure that the next option e Clear the Always trust certificates from Exchange Server and then click Choose File to upload the Public Ce
314. tification html ftl account AccountSummary activation accountactivationnotification subject ttl invites List of e notification accountactivationnotification text ftl InviteSummary email sent to accountactivationconfirmation htm ftl inviteTitleSize Integer users who accountactivationconfirmation subject tl number of characters of the ona accountactivationconfirmation text ftl longest invite title recipientAddressSize the user who Integer number of characters just activated aka their account in the longest recipient email address confirmation ene R email sent recipientPersonalSize to the user Integer number of characters who just in the longest recipient activated personal name their account recipientUtfTextSize Integer number of characters in the longest recipient personal amp address text 120 Configuring the DMZ Gateway Connection Template Name Template Files Data Model Account Password Reset The email sent to users who have requested that their password be reset The email contains a link to the password reset page accountpasswordreset html ftl accountpasswordreset subject ftl accountpasswordreset text ftl user Actor account being accessed url String URL to follow to reset the password The Account Password Reset template formats the email sent to users who have requested their password be reset The email contains a link to reset the password This link
315. tion server then adds the serial number to our registration database Your contact information is used to look up your account if you contact Customer Support or Sales A message appears indicating successful activation If activation is not successful ensure you have access to the Internet and try again or contact GlobalSCAPE Support on the GlobalSCAPE Web site http www globalscape com support customerservice aspx Installation Logging The installation log file is intended for debugging purposes and contains messages that may help resolve issues that arise in the field During installation and maintenance the installer will create and log to an Installer log file created in lt Documents amp Settings gt lt Current User gt Local Settings Temp Mail Express At the completion of the installation run either due to success or failure the installer will copy the final log to the lt Installation Directory gt logs directory if it exists Note that if the installer fails during an initial clean installation the lt Installation Directory gt logs directory may not exist In this case the final log file will be in lt Documents amp Settings gt lt Current User gt Local Settings Temp Mail Express e The installer will attempt to append to the existing log file on subsequent runs of the installer e g if the user performs a Reinstall It does this by copying any existing Installer log file from the installation directory into the temp
316. tion subject ftl senddropoffurlinvitation text ftl accountpasswordchanged htn1l ftl accountpasswordchanged subject ftl accountpasswordchanged text ftl storenotification htm ftl storenotification subject ftl storenotification text ftl test html ftl test subject ftl test text ftl recipient String recipient of the invitation dropoffURL String the URL to the drop off page user Actor account being accessed internalUser Boolean true when user kind is either InternalAutomatic or InternalManaged false otherwise date java util Date when the user changed their password percentFull Double ratio of the current size to the quota storeType String type of store FileSystem Database sizeAmount Double current size of the store sizeUnit String amount unit Kb MB etc quotaAmount Double quota for the store quotaUnit String amount unit Kb MB etc 124 Configuring the DMZ Gateway Connection Template Name Template Files Data Model Undeliverable Notification undeliverablenotification html ftl e undeliverablenotification subject ftl The email sent to sender in the event that Mail Express was e undeliverablenotification text ftl unable to deliver the message and the reason why also whenever you receive a delivery status notification update from the mail server Outlook Add In Email Templates user Actor original sender of the failed message subject Stri
317. to only allow TLSv1 negotiations 1 Ina text editor such as Notepad open server xml e g C Program Files GlobalSC APE Mail Express conf server xml 2 Update the HTTPS Port 443 configuration a Locate the Connector that defines the default port 443 listener This Connector may be found by searching for the following text port 443 b Within the Connector definition change SSP wotocol lah to SSLProtocol TLSv1 4 Update the DMZ Gateway Protocol Handler configuration if this feature is being used a Locate the Connector that defines the DMZ Gateway Protocol Handler This Connector may be found by searching for the text protocol com globalscape protocolhandler DMZProtocolHandler b Within the Connector definition change ScubPmoOrocols Nicol olmlorpro oles ESNIA to Sclipo moc oles A MTSN A 5 Save the changes 6 Restart the Mail Express Server service e g Start gt Run gt services msc Internet Explorer and High Security Settings When using the high security settings for the SSLProtocol and SSLCipher configuration items you may sometimes encounter connection issues when connecting with Internet Explorer Typically you will see a page similar to the following when connecting 139 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 gt Internet Explorer cannot display the webpage Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by GlobalSCAPE 6 De e 127 0 0 1 P Fie Edt Wew Favores Tools Help iy Favorite
318. to the tags let us know in the comments of the articles To search the KB 1 Open a web browser and go to http kb globalscape com 191 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 GlobalSCAPE Knowledge Base Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by GlobalSCAPE OGO femmo OO A e Ble gdt Wew Favorites Tools telp x Google Aand O er Barer o dni gt A Osin x cower Pset sip Favortes is Spor E Payu 212 AY do st East E GSWK E Hel Gos Eea Bao Beo eac aw a o Som gt Pages Safety Tose e Secure Information Exchange products amp services solutions downloads support shop news amp events blog company GlobalSCAPE Knowledge Base Home Search Tags Glossary Members Welcome Guest Login Register Latest Additions Most Popular Knowledgebase amp Resources GlobalSCAPE Knowledge Base Quick Search Knowledgebase wt Resources Search by keywords or type Browse our categorized collection of articles Q Browse our categorized collection of resources Search for Q Search Taas Search content comments amp attachments Quickly discover content of interest Advanced Search Search Glossary Aa LLLI ENNILL LOES ALA AAAA LES LLL LENSA LLE AESA Listing of common keywords and their meaning 2 On left side in the middle of the page click Knowledgebase A navigation tree and the latest articles list appear 192 Getting Help GlobalSCAPE Knowledge Base Microso
319. ts described in Silent Installation of the Outlook Add In With a batch file the user does not need to know about the Add In installation arguments or how to use the command line e Place the prerequisite installer bundle in a network location then ask end users to manually install the Add In using the bootstrapper which will install the prerequisites and launch the msi file The prerequisites and msi file need to be in the same folder You will need to provide end users with instructions to connect to Mail Express Server and to configure message options You can copy and paste instructions into an email directly from the help file or provide end users with an online link to the topics in Using Mail Express in Outlook Installing the Outlook Add In Refer to Deploying the Outlook Add In to determine deployment method before installing This topic covers each of the possible methods For instructions for upgrading the Add in refer to Upgrading the Outlook Add In The Outlook Add In installer is available from the Mail Express Server administration Outlook Add In Installer page and in the Mail Express Server installation folder by default C Program Files GlobalSCAPE Mail Express e Before installing the Outlook Add In be sure to review the system requirements e You need administrator privileges to install its prerequisites however the Add In installer does not require administrative privileges to run e If NET is not instal
320. ts have the ability to download files instantly by clicking on the links provided in an email or by visiting the Package Pick up Portal where files are listed for download Reply Portal When an internal or external user receives an email from a Mail Express user the email can contain a link to the Reply Portal in which recipients can respond to the email to return files to the sender The following diagram illustrates how the components work together in the network File downloads from Mail Express Server Internal External Access File uploads to Mail Express Server Administrator Demarcation defines usage using Corporate Policy configuration downloads to Mail Express Server and Clients policy for Mail Firewall Express System Exchange Server Communication between Web Portals and Mail Express Server Email goes to Exchange with Administration links files are Portal l transferred to Mail Express Server External Senders send Package Pick up Reply and files via the Package Drop off Portals are accessible Drop off Portal Outlook Plug in l to both internal and external user attaches files users Firewall access will need to email message to be modified to accommodate normally Mail this scenario Express Outlook Add In replaces files with links MailExpress WY LST Server z Optional use of External Djop oir Portal GlobalSCAPE DMZ Gateway can pr
321. ty and percent full To adjust allowed size refer to Configuring Database Purging and Notifications e Current Activity Displays number of requests and number of current licenses consumed and total licenses Licensing status displays Unlicensed if a valid license string has not been provided e Drop off Portal Indicates whether the Drop off Portal is enabled When enabled shows the number of active uploads occurring via the Drop off portal To enable and configure the Drop Off page refer to Configuring the Drop Off Portal e Pick up Portal lIndicates whether the Pick up Portal is enabled When enabled shows the number of active downloads occurring via the Pick up portal To enable and configure the Pick Up page refer to Enabling the Pick Up Portal 115 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 e Reply Portal lIndicates whether the Reply Portal is enabled When enabled shows the number of active uploads occurring via the Reply portal To enable and configure the Reply page refer to Enabling and Configuring the Reply Portal e Internal Portal Indicates whether the Internal Portal is enabled When enabled show the number of active uploads occurring via the Internal Portal To enable and configure the Internal Portal refer to Configuring the Add In and Internal Portal e Outlook Add In Indicates whether Outlook Add In access is enabled When enabled shows the number of active transfers occurring from Outlook Add Ins To enable a
322. type from the list click it in the list then click Delete o Number of Attachments Messages that match or exceed the number of attachments specified trigger Mail Express use Defaults to 10 when enabled valid values are between 1 100 To specify that Mail Express should manage embedded attachments such as company logo select the Manage Embedded Attachments check box Mail Express does not process emails that are in rich text format however Mail Express does provide an administrative setting Enforce Rich Text Conversion that requires users to change the format of rich text messages to plain text or HTML if they try sending a rich text email that meets the policy criteria This feature is useful in situations where an organization wants to ensure that users cannot bypass Mail Express by sending attachments via rich text messages By default the Enforce Rich Text Conversion feature is turned off For instructions for changing the format of emails to HTML or Plain Text in Outlook refer to Sending Files with the Mail Express Outlook Add In File integrity checking is enabled by default With integrity checking enabled if there is a mismatch between sent and received files the Add In will resend the attachment A mismatch is typically due to a network error If you do not want to use file integrity checking clear the Perform file integrity check check box If your server experiences heavy traffic turning off file integrity checking can
323. ullsoft Install System v2 45 6 Specify a location for Mail Express Server or keep the default of C Program Files GlobalSCAPE Mail Express 7 Click Next The Choose Attachment Folder page appears 25 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Z GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup ee lx Choose Attachment Location Choose the folder in which to store the GlobalSCAPE Mail Express email attachments A The Mail Express Server will store email attachments under the following folder To store the attachments in a different folder click Browse and select another folder Click Next to continue Please ensure the Mail Express Server Windows service is run with the necessary permissions to access the specified location param Files GlobalSCAPE Attachment Folder Space required 217 9MB Space available 25 2GB Nullsoft Install System 2 46 8 Specify a location in which to store file attachments or keep the default of C Program Files GlobalSCAPE Mail Express MailExpressAttachments This folder potentially requires a large amount of available space Using a UNC path to network locations requires running the Mail Express Server Windows service under a true user account instead of Local System By default Local System account does not have access to network paths and giving it access is not recommended Do not use a mapped drive for the file storage location 9 Click Next The Choose Start Menu Folder pa
324. umber During the term of the Evaluation License the Software will contact our registration and activation servers periodically to verify that the Software is still eligible for use under your Evaluation License The Software may also identify and report to us your Windows language identifier setting IP address and the date and time of installation and or activation GlobalSCAPE uses this information to count installations detect piracy of the Software and develop rough statistical data regarding the geographic location of the Software users GlobalSCAPE may tie this information to personally identifiable information it has about you GlobalSCAPE may use any non proprietary information you provide as part of obtaining support services and for GlobalSCAPE s business purposes including product support and development In addition to as otherwise provided herein GlobalSCAPE s policies related to this information are as is further provided in the Privacy Policy available at www globalscape com 196 Mail Express EULA 7 RESTRICTIONS You may not reduce the Software to human readable or source code form reverse engineer de compile disassemble merge adapt or modify the Software except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly required to be permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation You may not use the Software to perform any unauthorized transfer of information such as
325. unt Specified when creating database users o Default None o Example newuser medb2 e newpass lt new password gt o Description The password for the new database user account Specified when creating new database users and newauth is set to SQLSERVER o Default None o Example newpass fkV6ZsX669p3 e Dme admin username lt user gt o Description The username to use for the initial Mail Express Administration account Specified when initializing a new database All D style parameters must come last when specified on the command line o Default None o Example Dme admin username meadmin e Dme admin password lt password gt o Description The password to use for the initial Mail Express Administration account Specified when initializing a new database All D style parameters must come last when specified on the command line 65 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 o Default None o Example Dme admin password wkBG2YxgzBpR e Dme admin email lt email address gt o Description The email address to use for the initial Mail Express Administration account Specified when initializing a new database All D style parameters must come last when specified on the command line o Default None o Example Dme admin email nmeadmin example com e Dme filesystem root lt path gt o Description The email attachment directory Specified when initializing a new database Supports both local physi
326. ure If you want Mail Express to make these embedded attachments into file download links select the check box Cleared by default e Notify me when the files are picked up When selected download notification is sent to you when the recipient clicks the download link in the email or Download Files on the Pick Up page Cleared by default e Send pick up page link only When the check box is selected only the Pick Up page link is sent If the check box is not selected individual links for each file are included in the email Cleared by default e Link expiration When selected the ability to download the attachments will expire in the time that you specify If the recipient attempts to download a file that is past its expiration date the following message appears The file you are attempting to download has expired Please contact the sender if this file needs to be resent Cleared by default e Require password to download and upload files When selected the recipient must provide a password to download the attachments and to upload files to send back to you via an account or reply invitation The password you create is only valid for that specific package The password will be placed on the email in the Sent Items folder after the email is sent in case the sender needs to recall which password was used with a particular email Cleared by default 4 Click OK to save your changes or Cancel if you do not want to save your cha
327. ver 2008 R2 Express Edition Prerequisites This option is provided for evaluation purposes and is not intended for use in production environments SQL Server Express can take more than 20 minutes to install Nullsoft Install System v2 46 lt Back Cancel 12 Choose whether to install the evaluation database use an existing database then follow one of the three procedures a b or c in the table below to install the evaluation database use an existing database or create a new database Type of database to install _ Type of database to install _ database to install Evaluation database b Existing database Use this option to have the installer initialize an existing database and configure the Mail Express Server to use the database You should use this option if you have already manually created the database and database user account for use by the Mail Express Server or if you have previously used the Mail Express Server Installer to create a database You will need to provide the installer with the database connection information and user account credentials for the existing database and database user Procedure Click Install SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Edition then click Install The Next button changes to Install if you choose this option Click Use an existing SQL Server or SQL Server Express then click Next The Choose New or Existing Database page appears Z GlobalSCAPE Mail Ex
328. w globalscape com with copy to legal globalscape com Please print a copy of this Agreement for your records Revo WG 1520110 200 NE Thare ticit cena ite eva Min tent hie 15 A ACCEPTCOUN ee eeeeececesseeceeeenteeeeseseeeeeeees 130 134 Account ReQuESt eeeeceeeeeteeeeeteteeeeeeteeeeee 117 accountrequest Atml ftl oe eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 117 accountrequest subject ftl eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 117 accountrequest text fl eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 117 active directory ccceeeeeeesereeeeeees 74 154 164 Active Directory Configuration s 74 Active Directory Settings esseere 74 AD e e ere a S E ee 74 147 164 addinsendtemplate html ftl eerie 117 addinsendtemplate rtf ftl ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 117 addinsendtemplate text fil eeeeeeeeeeeee 117 address of a Mail EXpresS s e 73 ADH eiiieh sree anasto cee ee eed 130 134 Administering Mail Express Server 006 69 adminloginportalcustomization htm1 ftl 117 Advanced veiin e iaria aina akiai 139 Advanced Options ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 168 ANONYMOUS nianna kee 74 ANIVIFUS irinae aei anaa abaa aaah 15 ANU VIFUS risiini aiina iaaa aa i aaah 15 Apache TOmMmCat ccccceeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeteees 15 23 Application Data ceee 37 164 169 172 Application Event Log eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 116 Attach File button cc eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
329. want but you do eventually find the correct article please add a comment to the article to let us know that we should add that tag to the article to improve future searches Using Advanced Search You can use GlobalSCAPE s Advanced Search to search only kb globalscape com or help globalscape com help or any other domain on GlobalSCAPE s server To get to the Advanced Search page 1 In your browser go to globalscape com 2 Inthe search box at the top of the page type a keyword or phrase then click Search The results page appears 3 Ifthe topic you want does not appear in the search results or if there are too many results at the top of the page click Advanced Search The Advanced Search page appears 193 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 giCbalscare Advanced Search Advanced Web Search with alll of the words 10 results with the exact phrase with any of the words without the words Return pages written in any language gt Return results where my terms occur anywhere in the page e g google com org Find results Only Areturn results from the site or domain by Relevance gt 4 Inthe Domains box type the domain that you want to search e g ko globalscape com help globalscape com help then click Search 194 Mail Express End User License Agreement EULA When you install Mail Express you must agree to the terms of the Mail Express End User License Agreement EULA in orde
330. with the installation of version 3 0 or later 3 Double click the installer The Welcome page appears Z GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup lol xj Welcome to the GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup Wizard This wizard will guide you through the installation of giCbalscare M q IA GlobalSCAPE Mail Express It is recommended that you close all other applications before starting Setup This will make it possible to update relevant system files without having to reboot your computer Click Next to continue gC balscaPe 24 Installing and Uninstalling Mail Express 4 Click Next The License Agreement appears J GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup License Agreement Please review the license terms before installing GlobalSCAPE Mail Express slobalSCAPE R Mail Express TM version 3 End User License and Support Agreement This Software is licensed by GlobalSCAPE Inc GlobalSCAPE not sold You may use this Software only as described in this Agreement BY INSTALLING OR USING THE ENCLOSED SOFTWARE OR UTILIZING THE REGISTRATION SERIAL NUMBER YOU AGREE AND ARE SUBJECT TO THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS SET FORTH BELOW If you do not agree to the terms of this Agreement do not install the Software or use any registration serial number that was Nullsoft Install System v2 46 J GlobalSCAPE Mail Express Setup Choose Install Location Choose the folder in which to install GlobalSCAPE Mail Express M
331. xpress Drop Off Settings Gompare Click any column header that has an up down arrow to sort the data ascending or descending To compare two items select their check boxes and then click Compare You can only compare changes to the same IP address modifier and resource The Compare button is not available if the selections are invalid The Audit Details of the selected items appears Audit Details Setting Source Value Target Value embeddedEnabled false pluginUsageRequired Always linkExpirationEnabled true attachmentCountEnabled fileExtensionEnabled fileSizeThreshold ileSizeEnabled attachmentCount 10 10 modifiedDate 2010 06 21 17 39 36 947 2010 06 22 09 57 38 603 cind luginConfig JuginConfig disconnectBehavior Unset nset inkExpiration_number 2 fileExtensions doc pdf oc pdf inkExpiration_timeUnit WEEKS WEEKS createdDate 2010 06 21 17 39 36 947 2010 06 21 17 39 36 947 serviceEnabled true true Tak e The settings that changed are in darker text settings that did not change are grayed In this example the setting for managing embedded attachments was changed from false unselected to true selected e Place the cursor over an abbreviated value to view the full text 10 Click Back to return to the report 155 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Viewing Audit Event History The Audit Event History report displays all events that occurred on the Mail Express server within a particular date ra
332. y link is Never included Always included or User choice If User choice is specified the sender can choose whether to include the Mail Express Reply link When User choice is specified you can also specify whether the default user choice is Never Managed or Always Managed is specified by default Managed means that the Mail Express Reply link is included on all emails managed by Mail Express In the Basic Auth realm box specify the Mail Express Server name This name is used as the realm name when performing basic access authentication for web services To enable Kerberos select the Enable Single Sign On Kerberos check box If Kerberos authentication is enabled the account with which the Outlook user is logged into the operating system is used for authentication If you selected the Enable Single Sign On check box more options appear Refer to Configuring Mail Express for Windows Kerberos Authentication for more information about using Kerberos e Inthe KDC Host box provide the string between 1 256 characters that used as the Key Distribution Host when performing Kerberos authentication A KDC for a domain is located on a domain controller If a domain has a single domain controller the KDC host will be the same as the Active Directory server host For example mailexpress globalscape com e Inthe KDC Port box provide the port that the KDC is listening on default 88 valid values are 1 to 65535 e Inthe Domain Name box
333. ycompany com internal to sales mycompany com could be used to create a link to a client s Internal Portal with sales mycompany com pre populated in the To field https me mycompany com dropoff to customer support mycompany com engineering mycompany co mis an example of using multiple recipients with this feature The To field would be pre populated with both recipients Note that the email addresses are separated by a comma Any other delimiters such as semicolons will result in errors Below is an example of the Drop Off Portal when rendered using httos me mycompany com Drop Off to sales mycompany com showing the To field populated with the email address 105 Mail Express User Guide v3 2 Mail Express resin gC balscare Welcome to the Mail Express File Dropoff Portal Email From To Subject Attachments Browse Attachments maximum 10 files and 300 0 MB Message m Please enter the text you see above Send Enabling the Pick Up Portal When a Mail Express user sends an email with an attachment the attachment if managed by Mail Express is sent to the Mail Express Server and the recipient receives an email that contains the body of the original sent email plus one or more hyperlinks from which the recipient can download the attachment The attachment is not processed by the SMTP server nor sent to the recipient s email client The link to the attachment is embedded in the email The URL for the
334. you shouldn t continue Get me out of here Technical Details I Understand the Risks In Internet Explorer such a warning would be similar to x There is a problem with this website s security certificate We recommend that you close this webpage and do not continue to this website Click here to dose this webpage Continue to this website not recommended More information Misconfiguration of the chain is not the only cause for the browser to display the warning page You must examine the additional details provided by the browser to determine the exact cause of the error Other causes include e Use of the wrong URL to access the Mail Express Server e Use of the wrong Common Name in the Mail Express Server s public certificate 138 Mail Express Security and SSL e The final certificate authority is not in the browsers list of trusted certificate authorities e The servers public certificate has expired Higher Security Settings By default Mail Express allows initial connections from clients using the SSLv2 SSLv3 or TLSv1 protocols in an effort to support a wider variety of browsers If higher security is desirable then the allowed SSL protocols may be locked down to TLSv1 only however some clients including Internet Explorer may be unable to connect in some situations Refer to Internet Explorer and High Security Settings below for more information on known issues To modify the server

Mail Express v3.2 User Guide - Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents